Entec ETMFC610 User Manual

Release Date: Aug. 2019 / Manual Revision: 1.04

MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL

ETMFC610

USER’S MANUAL

Copyright © 2018 by ENTEC ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD all right reserved.

ENTEC

ENTEC

ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD

Forerunner Distribution & Automation

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610

Release Note:

[May. 2018] Ver1.00

New user manual for ETMFC610

[Oct. 2018] Ver1.01

Add “Multi-Bit Protocol”

[Feb. 2019] Ver1.02

Add “FI Auto Reset” function.

[May. 2019] Ver1.03

Add “Negative Sequnce Over Voltage” function.

[Aug. 2019] Ver1.04

Modify to the latest H/W Drawings. http://www.entecene.co.kr

EN HANCED TEC HNOLOGY i

Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 1

1.1. Description .......................................................................................................................... 1

1.2. Summary of Features ........................................................................................................... 2

2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................ 7

2.1. Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................................................... 7

2.2. Type Withstand Tests ........................................................................................................... 9

2.3. Metering Accuracy ............................................................................................................ 11

2.4. Fault Indication Type Functions ........................................................................................ 12

2.5. Protection Type Functions ................................................................................................. 13

2.6. Direction Controls ............................................................................................................. 15

2.7. Cold Load Pickup .............................................................................................................. 16

2.8. Loop Control ..................................................................................................................... 16

2.9. Monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 17

2.10. Recorder .......................................................................................................................... 25

2.11. Communications .............................................................................................................. 31

3. APPLICATION ............................................................................................................. 32

4. DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION .................................................................... 33

5. SIDE PANEL CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................ 34

5.1. Communication Port .......................................................................................................... 35

5.2. NTC Connector ................................................................................................................. 37

5.3. Current Input Connector .................................................................................................... 38

5.4. Voltage Input Connector .................................................................................................... 38

5.5. Status Inputs Connector ..................................................................................................... 39

5.6. Outputs Connector ............................................................................................................. 39

5.7. SCADA Connector (Option) ............................................................................................. 40

5.8. Power Input / Battery Input Connector ............................................................................. 40

5.9. Power Output Connector ................................................................................................... 41

5.10. Charge Circuit ................................................................................................................. 41

5.11. Battery Protection ............................................................................................................ 42

5.12. Typical Wiring Diagram .................................................................................................. 43

EN HANCED TEC HNOLOGY ii


6. USER INTERFACE PANEL ........................................................................................ 44

6.1. Construction ...................................................................................................................... 45

6.1.1. Operation Section ................................................................................................... 45

6.1.2. Local Control Section ............................................................................................. 46

6.1.3. Menu Control Section ............................................................................................ 49

6.1.4. Fault Indication Section ......................................................................................... 51

6.1.5. Voltage Element Section......................................................................................... 51

6.1.6. System Diagnostic Section ..................................................................................... 51

6.1.7. Battery Status Section ............................................................................................ 52

6.1.8. User LED Section ................................................................................................... 52

6.1.9. Set Group Status Section ........................................................................................ 53

6.2. LCD Display ..................................................................................................................... 54

6.2.1. Menu Structure Tree ............................................................................................... 54

6.2.2. GLOBAL Setting ................................................................................................... 57

6.2.3. GROUP Setting ...................................................................................................... 58

6.2.4. Event ...................................................................................................................... 59

6.2.5. Maintenance ........................................................................................................... 59

6.2.6. Time ........................................................................................................................ 59

6.2.7. Status ...................................................................................................................... 59

6.2.8. Metering ................................................................................................................. 59

6.3. Using the LCD Menu ........................................................................................................ 60

6.3.1. Initial Screen .......................................................................................................... 60

6.3.2. Main Menu ............................................................................................................. 63

6.3.3. Setting Example ..................................................................................................... 63

6.3.4. Setting Save ............................................................................................................ 64

7. GLOBAL SETTING ..................................................................................................... 65

7.1. General Setting .................................................................................................................. 65

7.1.1. System .................................................................................................................... 66

7.1.2. Event Recorder ....................................................................................................... 73

7.1.3. Monitoring .............................................................................................................. 76

7.1.4. Loop Control .......................................................................................................... 93

7.1.5. Passcode ................................................................................................................110

7.1.6. PLC ....................................................................................................................... 111

7.1.7. Device .................................................................................................................. 120

7.1.8. Save Setting .......................................................................................................... 129

EN HANCED TEC HNOLOGY iii


7.2. Communication ............................................................................................................... 130

7.2.1. Protocol Setup ...................................................................................................... 130

7.2.2. Port Setup ............................................................................................................. 164

7.2.3. RTU Communication (Dialup Modem) Setup...................................................... 171

7.2.4. FTP-SSL ............................................................................................................... 176

7.2.5. Wifi ....................................................................................................................... 177

7.2.6. Event & Etc Setup ................................................................................................ 178

7.2.7. Save Setting .......................................................................................................... 182

8. GROUP SETTING ...................................................................................................... 183

8.1. Fault Indication ................................................................................................................ 184

8.1.1. FI Type.................................................................................................................. 184

8.1.2. FI Pickup Current ................................................................................................. 185

8.1.3. FI Setting Time ..................................................................................................... 186

8.1.4. Inrush Restraint .................................................................................................... 190

8.1.5. FI Auto Reset ........................................................................................................ 191

8.2. Protection......................................................................................................................... 192

8.2.1. Phase Time Overcurrent (51P) ............................................................................. 195

8.2.2. Ground Time Overcurrent (51G) .......................................................................... 200

8.2.3. Negative Sequence Overcurrent (51Q(46)) .......................................................... 204

8.2.4. Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (50P) ................................................................ 208

8.2.5. Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (50G) ............................................................ 210

8.2.6. Sensitive Earth Fault (50SG) ................................................................................ 212

8.2.7. Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent (50Q) .......................................... 214

8.2.8. Inrush Restraint .................................................................................................... 216

8.2.9. User Curve - Time Overcurrent Curves ................................................................ 225

8.3. Directional Controls (67) ................................................................................................. 260

8.3.1. Phase Directional Controls (67P) ......................................................................... 260

8.3.2. Ground Directional Controls (67G) ...................................................................... 263

8.3.3. SEF Directional Controls (67SEF) ....................................................................... 265

8.3.4. Negative Sequence Directional Controls (67Q) ................................................... 266

8.4. Cold Load Pickup ............................................................................................................ 269

8.5. Monitoring ....................................................................................................................... 272

8.5.1. Broken Conductor(46BC) .................................................................................... 272

8.5.2. Voltage (27/59/64N/47P) ...................................................................................... 274

8.5.3. Frequency (81) ..................................................................................................... 278

8.5.4. Power (32) ............................................................................................................ 286

EN HANCED TEC HNOLOGY iv


8.5.5. Demand (49) ......................................................................................................... 290

8.5.6. Phase Difference................................................................................................... 292

8.5.7. Synchro’ Check (25) ............................................................................................. 294

8.5.8. Open Phase ........................................................................................................... 298

8.5.9. Live Line Block .................................................................................................... 299

8.5.10. Fault Locator ...................................................................................................... 300

8.5.11. Load Current Alarm ............................................................................................ 303

8.5.12. Power Factor (55) ............................................................................................... 305

8.6. Save Setting ..................................................................................................................... 306

9. EVENT RECORDER .................................................................................................. 307

9.1. Operation Event............................................................................................................... 308

9.2. Fault Event ...................................................................................................................... 309

9.3. Fault Cycle - Summary ....................................................................................................311

9.4. System Event ................................................................................................................... 312

9.5. Set Change Event ............................................................................................................ 313

9.6. Load & Energy Event ...................................................................................................... 314

9.6.1. Load & Energy/Min. Event .................................................................................. 314

9.6.2. Load & Energy/Hour Event ................................................................................. 316

9.6.3. Load & Energy/Day ............................................................................................. 317

9.6.4. Load & Energy Field Configuration..................................................................... 318

9.7. Diagnostic Event ............................................................................................................. 319

9.8. PQM Event ...................................................................................................................... 321

9.9. Load Current Alarm Event .............................................................................................. 322

9.10. Clear Saved Data ........................................................................................................... 324

10. MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................................... 325

10.1. Count ............................................................................................................................. 325

10.1.1. ETMFC610 Count ............................................................................................. 325

10.1.2. Fault Count ......................................................................................................... 326

10.1.3. PQM Count ........................................................................................................ 327

10.1.4. Communication Count ....................................................................................... 331

10.1.5. User Count.......................................................................................................... 332

10.2. Interrupt Time ................................................................................................................ 333

10.3. Contact Wear ................................................................................................................. 333

10.4. Data Reset ..................................................................................................................... 334

10.5. Controller Information .................................................................................................. 334

EN HANCED TEC HNOLOGY v


10.6. Mechanism Scale ........................................................................................................... 335

11. TIME........................................................................................................................... 336

12. STATUS ...................................................................................................................... 337

12.1. ETMFC610 .................................................................................................................... 337

12.2. Input Ports ..................................................................................................................... 339

12.3. Output Ports ................................................................................................................... 339

12.4. GOOSE Single Input ..................................................................................................... 340

12.5. GOOSE Double Input ................................................................................................... 340

12.6. GOOSE Output .............................................................................................................. 341

12.7. Latch Logic.................................................................................................................... 341

12.8. Diagnostic ...................................................................................................................... 342

13. METERING ............................................................................................................... 343

13.1. Current ........................................................................................................................... 343

13.2. Voltage ........................................................................................................................... 344

13.3. Frequency ...................................................................................................................... 346

13.4. Power ............................................................................................................................. 347

13.5. Energy ........................................................................................................................... 348

13.6. Demand Current and Power .......................................................................................... 349

13.7. Unbalance ...................................................................................................................... 351

13.8. Harmonics ..................................................................................................................... 352

13.9. True R.M.S .................................................................................................................... 352

13.10. Controller Reference ................................................................................................... 353

14. MAINTANANCE ...................................................................................................... 354

14.1. Warning Events.............................................................................................................. 354

15. PLC function .............................................................................................................. 357

16. Function of File Transfer Protocol ........................................................................... 358

16.1. Patching firmware to upgrade ....................................................................................... 358

16.2. COMTRADE................................................................................................................. 359

16.2.1. File format and Name ......................................................................................... 359

16.2.2. Related Setting Items .......................................................................................... 359

17. Wireless Connection .................................................................................................. 360

17.1. Connection using WIFI (PC) ......................................................................................... 360

17.2. Connection using Smart ETIMS ................................................................................... 361

EN HANCED TEC HNOLOGY vi


17.3. Security ......................................................................................................................... 362

17.3.1. SSL / TLS ........................................................................................................... 362

17.3.2. AES .................................................................................................................... 362

EN HANCED TEC HNOLOGY vii


1. INTRODUCTION

1.1. Description

http://www.entecene.co.kr

ETMFC610 is a multi-functional control unit built-in with RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) for distribution automation system (DAS), supporting the communication protocols such as DNP3.0,

MODBUS™, IEC60870-5-101, IEC60870-5-104 and IEC61850(option).

It provides the fault indication, monitoring and control of distribution system based on accurate measurements. It can also save and manage the various events and load profiles that are useful for analyzing the cause of the line fault.

The ETMFC610 supports 6 setting group, PLC (Programmable Logic Control, Scada I/O ports and user programmable lamps etc. to provide convenient application in various distribution environment. Especially, PLC (Programmable Logic Control), Scada I/O ports and user programmable lamps does not require any H/W change for implementing number of Input/Output signal and status indications.

Moreover, it is operated based on Linux OS that can provide the user with comfortable and useful operation technology such as smart mobile App. function (optional), WIFI (optional), USB port and remote access of distribution line equipment.

By the remote access and the file managing system, the user is not required to visit the actual site for upgrading the program, or downloading and uploading of recorded files in COMTRADE standard format and setting changes respectively.

Due to convenient remote access, the security is strengthed by AES256/SHA256 coding and user access authorization and control.

EN HANCED TEC HNOLOGY 1


1.2. Summary of Features


FAULT INDICATION

 Phase Fault Indication

 Ground Fault Indication

 Sensitive Earth Fault Indication

 Negative Sequence Fault Indication

 Inrush Restraint and Cold Load Pickup

 Phase, Ground, Sensitive Earth Fault and Negative Sequence Directional Controls

 Auto Sectionalizer (Loop Control)

 Tie Point Switch (Loop Control)

PROTECTION

 Dual Phase Time Overcurrent Elements

 Dual Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements

 Dual Ground Time Overcurrent Elements

 Dual Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements

 Dual Sensitive Earth Fault Elements

 Dual Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Elements

 Dual Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements

 Inrush Restraint and Cold Load Pickup

 Phase, Ground, Sensitive Earth Fault and Negative Sequence Directional Controls



MONITORING (COMMON)


 Broken Conduct Element

 Two Under Voltage Elements

 Two Over Voltage Elements

 Two Neutral Over Voltage Elements

 Two Negative Sequence Over Voltage Elements

 Two Under Frequency Elements

 Two Over Frequency Elements

 Frequency Decay Element

 Two Forward Power Elements

 Two Directional Power Elements

 Phase Current, Ground Current, Negative Sequence Current, Active Power and Reactive

Power Demand Elements

 Phase Difference

 Synchro’ Check

 Open Phase

 Live Line Block

 Fault Locator

 Load Current Alarm

 Power Factor (Lead and Lag)

 Live Line

 Operation Count

 Contact Wear per Phase

 Battery Automatic Load Test & Battery Management

 Power Quality

Interrupt, Sag and Swell

Harmonics

Current Unbalance

Voltage Unbalance

Under Voltage

Over Voltage

Under Frequency

 Breaker Failure with Current Supervision

 System Power



EVENT RECORDER


 Switch(or CB) Operation Recorder – last 5,000 events

 Fault Event Recorder – last 1,500 events

 Fault Waveform(60 cycles× 64 samples) – last 32 events

 System Event Recorder – last 5,000 events

 Setting Change Event Recorder – last 2,000 events

 Load&Energy Recorder

Average Load & Energy – last 8,640 events (Max 360 days)

Peak Load & Energy in every hour – last 8,640 events

Peak Load & Energy in every day – last 8,640 events

 Diagnostic Event Recorder - last 2,000 events

 PQM Detection Event Recorder - last 1,500 events

 Load Current Alarm Event Recorder - last 1,500 events

NOTE : 1. The maximum number of all events except fault waveform to be stored can be increased according to user requests.

2. According to sting, waveform can support COTRADE format.

MAINTENANCE

 Restart, Diagnostic and Operation counters

 Fault Trip and Fault counters

 PQM counters

 Communication counters

 User counters

 Interrupt Time

 Contact Wear per Phase



METERING


 Each Phase Current and Phasor : Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Isef

 Each Phase Pick Current : Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Iq

 Each Phase and Line to Line Voltage and Angle : Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt, Vab, Vbc, Vca, Vrs,

Vst, Vtr

 Current and Voltage Symmetrical Component : I1, I2, 3I0, V1, V2, 3V0

 Source and Load side Frequency, Frequency Change Rate, Slip Frequency and Slip Angle

 Single Phase and Three Phase Power : Active Power(kW), Reactive Power(kVar), Apparent

Power(kVA), Power Factor(%)

 Positive and Negative Energy : Active Energy(kWh), Reactive Energy(kVarh)

 Present and Positive/Negative Maximum Demand

Demand Current : Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Iq

Single Phase and Three Phase Active Power(kW) and Reactive Power(kVar)

 Source/Load side Voltage and Current Unbalance

 Voltage and Current Harmonics (THD, 2nd ~ 31th order)

 Voltage and Current True R.M.S

 ETMFC610 Condition Reference

Battery Voltage, Charger Voltage and Charger Current

Battery Capacity

ETMFC610 Internal Temperature

ETMFC610 External Temperature

System Power : +12V, -12V, Reference Voltage

COMMUNICATIONS

 Side panel RS232-1 and RS232-2 Serial Port : DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC60870-5-101 and Multi-

Bit Protocol, ETMFC610 Interface Software

 Side panel RS485 Port : DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC60870-5-101 and Multi-Bit Protocol

 Side panel Eth1 and Eth2 Ethernet Port or Fiber Optic(Option) Port : DNP 3.0, Modbus,

IEC61850(option), IEC60870-5-104 and Multi-Bit Protocol, ETMFC610 Interface Software

 Front Panel USB-B Type Port : ETMFC610 Interface Software



USER INTERFACE


 Fault Indicators

 Manual Battery Load Test: Battery Voltage and Charge Voltage

 Dual Functional Keypads

 20×8 Character LCD Display

 49 LED indicators - Fault indications, Sequence status, Battery status, etc.

 Setting Range Help Messages

 Access Security(3 Passwords with Different Authorities)

OTHERS

 Programmable Logic Control(PLC)

 Time Synchronism Device (IRIG) – Option

 Wifi – Option

AUXILIARY INPUTS

 12 Opto-isolated Programmable Inputs – Option

AUXILIARY OUTPUTS

 8 Opto-isolated Programmable Outputs – Option



2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.1. Inputs and Outputs

SYSTEMS

 3phase-3wire or 3phase-4wire, 38 ㎸ maximum, 800 Amp maximum

FREQUENCY

 50 / 60 ㎐ system and ABC/ACB phase rotation

CONTROL VOLTAGE INPUT

 AC Voltage Input 24Vac ( ± 20%)

 Nominal Battery Voltage : 24Vdc

 Power Consumption : 8.4W at 24V dc

USER AVAILABLE DC POWER OUTPUT

 DC Power Voltage : 24Vdc or (12Vdc, 15Vdc option)

 DC Power Continuous : 40W(60W/1 min)

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER INPUTS (VT)

 Voltage Inputs Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt(

 Input Voltage Range : Phase-Neutral Continuous <8V

 Burden: 0.002VA(4V)

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER INPUTS (VT) - Option

 Voltage Inputs Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt

 Input Voltage Range : Phase-Neutral Continuous <300V

 Burden: 0.6VA(300V), 0.2VA(220V), 0.05VA(120V), 0.02VA(67V)



CURRENT TRANSFORMER INPUTS (CT)

 Current Inputs Ia, Ib, Ic, In and Isef

 Ia, Ib, Ic, In Input Current Range

 1A Nominal

 2A continuous

 25A 1 second

 Burden : 0.38VA(1A)

 Ise Input Current Range

 0.05A Nominal

 0.16A Continuous

 0.6A 1 second

 Burden : 0.0375VA(0.05A)

CONTROL INPUTS - Option

 Control Inputs 12 Channel

 Nominal Voltages and Operating Range

 12V..24Vdc (-15%, +20%)

 125Vdc (-15%, +20%)

 250Vdc (-15%, +20%)

 Operating current : < 5mA at Nominal Voltages

CONTROL OUTPUT CONTACTS - Option

 Control Outputs 8 Channel

 300Vac / 350Vdc Varistor for differential surge protection

 Operate / Release time : < 5ms at +20 ℃ (+68 ℉ )

 Maximum operating power

Table 2-1. Control Output Contacts

(L/R=7ms)

(cos Φ =0.4)

125Vdc

48Vdc

24Vdc

250Vac

125Vac

0.1A

0.8A

3A

3A

5A http://www.entecene.co.kr



2.2. Type Withstand Tests


Electromagnetic Compatibility Immunity

 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity : IEC 61000-4-2 : 2008

 Level 3 and 6 ㎸ contact, 8 ㎸ air

 Radiated electromagnetic field immunity : IEC 61000-4-3 : 2010

 10 V/m at 80 ㎒ ~1.0

㎓ and 1.4

㎓ ~2.7

㎓

 Electrical Fast Transient Burst Immunity : IEC 61000-4-4 : 2012

 2 kV at 5 kHz (Communication Ports)

 Surge Immunity : IEC 61000-4-5 : 2017

 4 kV line to line

 4 kV line to earth

 4 kV Comm. ports

 Conducted disturbance immunity : IEC 61000-4-6 : 2013

 10 V at 150 kHz ~ 80 MHz

 Power frequency magnetic field immunity : IEC 61000-4-8 : 2009

 100 A/m (Continuous), 1 000 A/m (3s)

 Voltage dips, interruption and variation immunity : IEC 61000-4-11 : 2004

 Voltage disp immunity test : 0%, 40%, 70%, 80%

 Voltage interruptions immunity test : 0%

 Voltage variations immunity test : 70 % / 30 cycles

 Test for immunity to conducted, common mode disturbances : IEC 61000-4-16 : 2015

 30 V (continuous), 300 V (short duration)

 Oscillatory wave immunity : IEC 61000-4-18 : 2006

 Immunity test for 1 MHz burst ; Comm: 2.5 kV, Differential : 1.0 kV

 Immunity test for 100 kHz burst; Comm: 2.5 kV, Differential : 1.0 kV

 Emission test : CISPR 11 , Class A



Environmental

 Cold : IEC 60068-2-1 :2007

 Test Ad : 16 hours at -40 ℃

 Dry Heat : IEC 60068-2-2 :2007

 Test Ad : 16 hours at +85 ℃

 Damp heat, steady state : IEC 60068-2-3 : 1969

 Severity Level : 40 ℃ , 4day

 Relative Humidity : 93%

 Damp heat, Cyclic : IEC 60068-2-30 : 2005

 Severity Level : 25 ℃ to 55 ℃ , 2cycles

 Relative Humidity : 95%

 Vibration : IEC 60255-21-1 : 1988

 Shock and bump : IEC 60255-21-2 : 1988

 Seismic : IEC 60255-21-3 : 1993

Safety


 Dielectric Strength : IEC 60255-27 : 2013

 2000 Vac on Control inputs, control outputs, and analog inputs, communication for

1minute

 Impulse : IEC 60255-27 : 2013, 0.5 J, 5 kV, 1.2/50 ㎲

 Insulation resistance : IEC 60255-27 : 2013, 100 ㏁ at 500 V d.c.



2.3. Metering Accuracy


The quantity of electricity used in metering and protection is based on fundamental content which harmonic is removed in input voltage and current parameters.

VOLTAGE METERING

 Rated voltage : AC effective value voltage 4 V

 Phase A, B, C : ±0.5%( 50 ~ 200% of rated voltage), ±0.5˚

 V1, V2, 3V0 : ±0.6 %( 50 ~ 200% of rated voltage), ±1˚

CURRENT METERING

 Rated current : AC 0.6 Arms

 IA, IB, IC, IN : ± 0.5 mA ± 0.5 % of reading(0.03~1.5 A), ±0.5˚

 ISEF : ± 0.005 mA + ± 0.5 % of reading(0.5~16.0 mA), ±1˚

 I1, I2, 3I0 : ± 0.01 A ± 3 % of reading(0.003~1.5A ), ±1˚

POWER METERING

 Apparent Power : ± 1.2 %( Rated Voltage >80 %, Rated Current >0.03)

 Active Power : ± 0.7 % PF=1, ± 1% PF>0.87(Rated Voltage >80%, Rated Current >0.03)

 Reactive Power : ± 0.7 % PF=0, ± 1% PF<0.5(Rated Voltage >80%, Rated Current >0.03)

FREQUENCY METERING

 Source/Load Voltage Frequency : ± 0.01 Hz

HARMONIC METERING

 ± 5%

The above measurement accuracy is applied only for ETMFC610 controller. The measurement accuracy of voltage and current including thank is about ± 1 %.



2.4. Fault Indication Type Functions


Fault Indication

Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Pickup Level ...... OFF, 10 to 1600A in steps of 1A

Sensitive Earth Fault Pickup Level ........................... OFF, 0.1 to 160.0A in steps of 0.1A

*. The setting range of Pickup Level can vary according to H/W option.

Permanent/Temporary FI Time.................................. 1 to 180 sec in steps of 1 sec

Type I Delay Time ..................................................... 0.01 to 180.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec

Dropout Level ........................................................... 96 to 98% of Pickup

Pickup Level Accuracy .............................................. ± 5% of setting time or ± 20 ㎳

Inrush Duration Time

Phase/Ground/S.E.F/NEQ Inrush Duration Time ..... 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec

Make Use ‘I’ .............................................................. NO/YES

Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20 ㎳

Fault Indication Auto Reset

Auto Reset Mode ....................................................... OFF/Temporary/Permanent/ALL

Auto Reset Time ........................................................ 0.01 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec

Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20 ㎳



2.5. Protection Type Functions


Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Time Overcurrent Protection (+/-)

Function..................................................................... DISALBE/TRIP/TRIP&ALARM/ALARM

Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Pickup Level ...... 10 to 1600A in steps of 1A

*. The setting range of Pickup Level can vary according to H/W option.


Curve Type ................................................................ Total 62 Curves

 ANSI/IEEE : Normally, Very, Extremely

 IEC : Normally, Very, Extremely, Long Time Inverse, Short Time Inverse

 EB : Normally, Very, Long Time Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse

 Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s

 Korean(Kepco) Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4

 User programmable curves : USER-1, USER-2, USER-3, USER-4

 McGraw-Edison : Non-Standard Curves 32

 Fuse Non-standard Curve : 3 (RI, HR, FR)

Time Dial ................................................................... 0.01 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01

Time Adder ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

Minimum Response Time ......................................... 0.00 to 10.00s in steps of 0.01s

Reset Type ................................................................. INSTANTANEOUS/LINEAR

Low Set Definite Time .............................................. OFF, 0.01 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%

Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50 ㎳ at 0 ㎳ trip time delay

5% of trip time or ± 20 ㎳

Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection(+/-)

Function..................................................................... DISALBE/ENABLE

Phase/Ground/Neg’ Pickup Level ............................. 10 to 20,000A in steps of 1A


Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

Active Sequence ........................................................ 1~5shot in steps of 1shot






Sensitive Earth Fault Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection(+/-)

Function ..................................................................... DISALBE/TRIP/TRIP&ALARM/ALARM

Pickup Level .............................................................. 0.1 to 160.0A in steps of 0.1A


Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.0 in steps of 0.01s

Pickup Level Accuracy .............................................. 5%



Inrush Restraint

Phase/Ground/SEF/Neq Seq’ Function….………..DISABLE/ ENABLE

Fault Pickup Level at Inrush Restraint Duration

 Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Pickup Level ……….10 to 20,000A in steps of 1A

 SEF Pickup Level…………………….……….0.1 to 2,000.0A in steps of 0.1A

 Dropout Level…………………………………5%

Restore Minimum Time

 Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ Function…………..DISABLE/ ENABLE

 Restore Minimum Time……………………….0.01 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

Inrush Restraint Reset

 Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Rest Current…….…..10 ~ 1600A in steps of 1A

 SEF Rest Current…….………………………..0.1 ~ 160.0A in steps of 0.1A

 Reset Time…………………………………….0.01 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Curves

 Curve Type…………………………………….Total 62 Curves

ANSI/IEEE : Normally, Very, Extremely

IEC : Normally, Very, Extremely, Long Time Inverse, Short Time Inverse

EB : Normally, Very, Long Time Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse

Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s

Korean(Kepco) Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4

User programmable curves : USER-1, USER-2, USER-3, USER-4

McGraw-Edison : Non-Standard Curves 32

Fuse Non-standard Curve : 3 (RI, HR, FR)

 Time Dial……………………………………..0.01 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01

 Time Adder……………………………………0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

 Minimum Response Time…………………….0.00 to 10.00s in steps of 0.01s

 Reset Type…………………………………….INSTANTANEOUS/LINEAR

Outage Time .............................................................. 0.01 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s



Outage Current .......................................................... OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A

Make Use ‘I’……………………………………….NO/YES


Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 5% of setting time or ± 20 ㎳

2.6. Direction Controls

Phase Directional Control

Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Positive Sequence Voltage V1

Detecting Direction .................................................... NONE/FORWARD/REVERSE

Maximum Torque Angle ........................................... 0 to 359 Lag in steps of 1 Lag

Minimum Polarizing Voltage ................................... OFF, 0.10 to 0.80 xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES

Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2°

Internal Operation Delay ........................................... 1.5cycle

Ground/Sensitive Earth Fault Directional Control

Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Zero Sequence Voltage (–3V0)

For voltage element polarizing the source

VTs must be connected in Wye




Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES

Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2°


Negative Directional Control

Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Negative Sequence Voltage(-V2)




Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES

Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2°




2.7. Cold Load Pickup


Cold Load Pickup

Function ..................................................................... DISALBE/ENABLE

Make Use ‘I’……………………………………….NO/YES

Multiple of Cold Load….………………………….1.0 to 5.0 xMTC in steps of 0.1 xMTC

Cold Load Interval Time ........................................... 1 to 720 min in steps 1 min

Pickup Level Accuracy .............................................. 5%

Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 5% of setting time or ± 20 ㎳

2.8. Loop Control

Loop Control

Function ..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE

Type Select ................................................................ NONE/SEC/TIE

Auto Sectionalizer Operation Count ......................... 1 ~ 5 Shot in steps of 1 Shot

Auto Sectionalizer Operation Time Delay ................ 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec

Auto Sectionalizer Reset Time Delay ....................... 1.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec

Voltage Response Side to Tie Point Switch ............... VS/VL/VS&VL

Tie Point Switch Operation Count ............................ 1 ~ 5 Shot in steps of 1 Shot

Tie Point Switch Close Operation Time Delay ......... 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec

Tie Point Switch Open Operation Time Delay .......... 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec

Tie Point Switch Reset Time Delay ........................... 1.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec

Dead Line Time Delay of Source Side ...................... 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec

Dead Line Time Delay of Load Side ......................... 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec

Level Accuracy .......................................................... ± 5%

Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec



2.9. Monitoring


Broken Conduct

Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE

Pickup Level (I2/I1) .................................................. 1 to 100% in steps of 1%


Minimum Normal Current ........................................ OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A

Maximum Normal Current ........................................ OFF, 10 to 630A in steps of 1A


Timing Accuracy ....................................................... at 0 ㎳ time delay (50 ㎳ max)


Voltage

Under Voltage 1,2

 Function………………………………………..DISABLE/ENABLE

 Pickup Level …………………………………...0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

 Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

 Minimum Normal Voltage……………………..0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

 Active Voltage Type……………………………Any One(1P)/Any Two(2P)/All Three(3P)

Over Voltage 1,2

 Function……………………………………….. DISABLE/ENABLE



 Active Voltage Type…………………………… Any One(1P)/Any Two(2P)/All Three(3P)

Neutral Over Voltage 1,2




Negative Sequnce Over Voltage 1,2




Level Accuracy .......................................................... 5%

Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup when Over Voltage

102 to 105% of Pickup when Under Voltage


5% of setting time or ± 20 ㎳



Frequency


Under Frequency 1,2


 Pickup Level …………………………………... 45.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01

㎐


 Reset Time………………………….…………. 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

 Minimum Normal Voltage……………………...0.00 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

 Minimum Normal Current………………………OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A

Over Frequency 1,2


 Pickup Level …………………………………... 40.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01

㎐


 Reset Time………………………….…………. 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s



Frequency Decay

 Function………………………………………..DISABLE/ENABLE

 Pickup Level(Hz/sec) …………………………0.01 to 5.00 in steps of 0.01

㎐ /sec


 Reset Time………………………….……….….0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

 Minimum Normal Frequency…..……………...45.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01

㎐



 Active Type………….…………………………INCREASE/DECREASE/ABSOLUTE

Level Accuracy .......................................................... at VT ± 0.02

㎐ , at CVD ± 0.05

㎐

Dropout Level ........................................................... at VT Pickup + 0.02

㎐ when Under Frequency at CVD Pickup+0.05

㎐ when Under Frequency at VT Pickup - 0.02

㎐ when Over Frequency at CVD Pickup -0.05

㎐ when Over Frequency


5% of setting time or ± 20 ㎳



Power



Function Block Time After Close ............................. 0.02 to 300.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec

Forward Power 1,2

 Pickup Level ………………………………….OFF, 0.00 to 300.00MW in steps of 0.01MW

 Time Delay……………………………………0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec

 Polarizing Power………………………………3-Phase Active Power

Directional Power 1,2

 Active Minimum Power Level..………………. OFF, -300.00 to 300.00 in steps of 0.01MW

 Angle………………………………………….0.00 to 359.99

° in steps 0.01

°


 Polarizing Power………………………………3-Phase Active Power and Reactive Power

Level Accuracy .......................................................... 5%



Demand


Pickup Level

 Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Current…..…………10A to 1600A in steps of 1A

 Active Power………………………………….0.01 to 300.00 MW in step of 0.01 MW

 Reactive Power………………………………..0.01 to 300.00 Mvar in step of 0.01 Mvar


Demand Type ............................................................ THERMAL/BLOCK

Thermal Interval Time .............................................. 5/10/15/20/30/60 min

Block Interval Time .................................................. 5/10/15/20/30/60 min

Level Accuracy .......................................................... ± 5%





Phase Difference



Dead Voltage Maximum Level .................................. 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

Live Voltage Minimum Level ................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

Maximum Voltage Difference ................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

Maximum Angle Difference ...................................... 1° to 100° in steps of 1°

Maximum Frequency Difference .............................. 0.01 to 5.00Hz in steps of 0.01Hz

Difference Check Phase ............................................ ALL/A/B/C

Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps 0.01sec

Voltage Level Accuracy ............................................. 5%

Angle Level Accuracy ............................................... ± 2°

Frequency Level Accuracy ........................................ at VT ± 0.02

㎐ , at CVD ± 0.05

㎐


Syncro’ Check


Dead Voltage Maximum Level .................................. 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

Live Voltage Minimum Level ................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

Maximum Voltage Difference ................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

Maximum Angle Difference ...................................... OFF, 20.0° to 80.0° in steps of 0.1°

Maximum Frequency Difference (Slip Freq.) ........... 0.5 to 5.00Hz in steps of 0.01Hz

Syncro’ Check Phase ................................................. A/B/C/AB/BC/CA

Compensation Angle ................................................. 0° to 330° in steps of 30°

Load Side Voltage Compensation Factor .................. 0.50 to 2.00 in steps of 0.01

Switch(or CB) Closing Time ..................................... 0.00 to 600.0msec in steps 0.1msec

Closing Wait Time ..................................................... 1 to 600sec in steps 1sec

Voltage Level Accuracy ............................................. 5%

Angle Level Accuracy ............................................... ± 2°

Frequency Level Accuracy ........................................ at VT ± 0.02

㎐ , at CVD ± 0.05

㎐




Open Phase



On Level .................................................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

Off Level ................................................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT


Level Accuracy .......................................................... 5%


Live Line Block


Live Level ................................................................. 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

Live Line Check Source ............................................ VS/VL/VS&VL


Level Accuracy .......................................................... 5%


Fault Locator


Total Length of Feeder .............................................. 0.1 to 99.9 of 0.1km

Real impedance of the feeder positive seq. ............... 0.01 to 99.99 of 0.01ohms

Imaginary impedance of the feeder positive seq. ...... 0.01 to 99.99 of 0.01ohms

Real impedance of the feeder zero seq. ..................... 0.01 to 99.99 of 0.01ohms

Imaginary impedance of the feeder zero seq ............. 0.01 to 99.99 of 0.01ohms

Load Current Alarm


Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Pickup Level ...................... OFF, 10 to 1600A in steps of 1A

Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Time Delay ........................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps 0.01s

Level Accuracy .......................................................... ± 5%




Power Factor 1,2



Pickup Level for Lag ................................................. OFF, 0.05 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01

Pickup Level for Lead ............................................... OFF, 0.05 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01

Time Delay ................................................................ 1.00 to 600.00sec in steps 0.01sec

Function Block Time After Close .............................. 0.05 to 600.00sec in steps 0.01sec

Level Accuracy .......................................................... ± 5%


Live Line

Pickup Level .............................................................. 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.1sec



Operation Counter


Alarm Count .............................................................. 1 to 20000 in steps of 1

Reset Count ............................................................... 0 to 10000 in steps of 1

Contact Wear


Alarm Pickup Level................................................... 0.0 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1%

Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 1.00s in steps 0.01s

Interruption Current at Point 1(Max. Operation) ...... 1.00 to 600.00kA in steps of 0.01kA

Number of Operation at Point 1(Max. Operation) .... 1 to 60000 in steps of 1

Interruption Current at Point 2(Min. Operation) ....... 1.00 to 600.00kA in steps of 0.01kA

Number of Operation at Point 2(Min. Operation) ..... 1 to 60000 in steps of 1

Set Phase A Wear ....................................................... 0.00 to 100.00 % in steps of 0.01%

Set Phase B Wear ....................................................... 0.00 to 100.00 % in steps of 0.01%

Set Phase C Wear ....................................................... 0.00 to 100.00 % in steps of 0.01%



Battery Automatic Load Test


Test Period ................................................................. OFF, 1 to 720 hours in steps of 1hour

Battery Management


Charge Time .............................................................. 60 to 6,000 min. in steps of 1 min.

Discharge Time ......................................................... 60 to 6,000 min. in steps of 1 min.

Alarm Pickup Level .................................................. 0.00 to 100.00% in steps of 0.01%

Reset Battery Capacity .............................................. 0.00 to 100.00% in steps of 0.01%

Power Quality Monitoring(PQM)


Interrupt

 Pickup Level …………………………………. OFF, 0.10 to 0.49xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

 Time Delay……………………………………0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle

Sag



Swell



Harmonics

 Voltage Total Harmonics Pickup Level………OFF, 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%

 Voltage Total Harmonics Time Delay………..0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec

 Current Total Harmonics Pickup Level………OFF, 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%

 Current Total Harmonics Delay Time…….…..0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec

Current Unbalance

 Pickup Level ………………………………….OFF, 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%


Voltage Unbalance

 Pickup Level ………………………………….OFF, 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%


Under Voltage

 Pickup Level ………………………………….0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT




Over Voltage http://www.entecene.co.kr

 Pickup Level ………………………………….0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT


Under Frequency

 Pickup Level …………………………………..OFF, 45.00 to 65.00Hz in steps of 0.01Hz


Over Frequency

 Pickup Level …………………………………..OFF, 45.00 to 65.00Hz in steps of 0.01Hz


Current Unbalance/THD Detect Limit Current ......... 0 to 630A in steps of 1A

Level Accuracy .......................................................... at VT ± 0.02

㎐ , at CVD ± 0.05

㎐ or ± 5%


System Power

Function ..................................................................... OFF/ON

+12V Pickup .............................................................. OFF, 0.1 to 10.0 V in steps of 0.1V

Time Delay ................................................................ 0.01 to 10.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec

-12V Pickup ............................................................... OFF, 0.1 to 10.0 V in steps of 0.1V


Ref. V Pickup ............................................................ OFF, 0.1 to 10.0 V in steps of 0.1V


Level Accuracy .......................................................... ± 5%




2.10. Recorder


OPERATION EVENT RECORDER

 Trigger Source

 Switch(or CB) Closed(Manual/Remote/Auto/External/Panel Control CLOSE)

 Switch(or CB) Opened(Manual/Remote/Auto/External/Panel Control OPEN)

 Storage Capacity : Total 5,000 Events

FAULT EVENT RECORDER

 Trigger Source

 Fault Indication(applied when Fault Indication type)

 Fault Trip(applied when Protection type)

 Data Channels

 Analog 14 Channels (Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Isef, I1, I2, 3I0, Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt)

 Storage capacity : 1,500 events

FAULT WAVEFORM CAPTURE

 Trigger Source

 Fault Pickup

 Fault Timeout Elements

 Data Channels

 Current 5 Channels(Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Isef)

 Voltage 6 Channels(Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt)

 Digital Input Port Status 8 or 20 Channels (IN101~112, IN201~208)

 Digial Output Relay 8 or 16 Channels (OUT101~108 ,OUT201~207, OUT214)

 Digital Logic Channels

 Sample Rate : 16/32/64 per cycle

 Trigger Position : 1 to 60 cycles(64 sampling base and depending on the sample rate, it changes)

 Storage capacity : 32 events with max 240cycles(Cycle is dependent on Sample Rate)



SYSTEM EVENT RECORDER

 Trigger Source

 Protection Elements

 52A Contact

 Sequence status

 Front panel control

 AC supply

 External control

 Fail operation

 External input status

 System alarm, etc.

 Trigger Time : every 5 msec

 Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout

 Storage Capacity : Last 5,000 Events

SET CHANGE EVENT RECORDER


 Trigger Source

 Global Setting Change

 Group Setting Change – Group 1/2/3/4/5/6


LOAD & ENERGY

1) Average Load/ Minute

 Trigger Source

 Demand Current – A, B, C, N

 Demand Voltage – A, B, C, R, S, T

 Demand Real Power – A, B, C, 3 ф , Positive A, Positive B, Positive C, Positive 3 ф ,

Negative A, Negative B, Negative C, Negative 3 ф

 Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3 ф , Positive A, Positive B, Positive C, Positive 3 ф ,


 Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3 ф

 Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3 ф ), Positive Varhour(3 ф ), Negative Watthour(3 ф ),

Negative Varhour(3 ф )

 Trigger Time : every 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 or 60 minutes




2) Peak Load/ Hour


 Trigger Source










 Trigger Time : every 1 hour

 Storage Capacity : Total 8,640 events, 360 days

3) Peak Load/ Day

 Trigger Source










 Trigger Time : every 1 day

 Storage Capacity : Total 8,640 Events, 27500 days



DIAGNOSTIC EVENT RECORDER


 Trigger Source

 System Power(AC, Battery, ± 12V, +5V)

 A/D Conversion(A/D Fail, Reference Voltage1, Reference Voltage 2)

 Power Down Mode

 Gas Status

 DSP Fail

 RTC Fail

 Memory Fail

 Flash-Rom Fail

 Circuit Voltage Fail

 Event Fail

 Count Fail

 DO Fail

 Close Fail

 Open Fail, etc.

 Trigger Time : every 5 msec

 Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout


PQM EVENT RECORDER

 Trigger Source

 Interrupt Detect

 Voltage Sag Detect

 Voltage Swell Detect

 Voltage/Current Harmonics Detect

 Voltage/Current Unbalance Detect

 Under/Over Voltage Detect

 Under/Over Frequency Detect

 Trigger type : Pick up




LOAD CURRENT ALARM EVENT RECORDER


 Trigger Source

 Phase A, B, C Load Current Alarm

 S.E.F Load Current Alarm

 Negative Sequence Load Current Alarm

 Trigger type : Pick up


NOTE : The maximum number of all events except fault waveform to be stored can be increased according to user requests.

COUNTER

 System Restart Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534

 Diagnostic Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534

 Operation Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534

 Fault Counters : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534

 PQM Counters : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534

 Communication Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534

 User Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534

NOTE: Depending on the “16bit Count Use” setting in the menu “GLOBAL SETTING /

GENERAL / DEVICE / OTHERS” , the roll-over limit of each counter is applied differently.

 When the setting is OFF, each counter is rolled over to 0 if the counter value exceeds 1,000,000

 When the setting is ON, each counter is rolled over to 0 if the counter value exceeds 65,534



INTERRUPT TIME


 Total, Phase A, B and C Interrupt Time : 0 to 1,000,000 sec or 0 to 65,534 sec

 Momentary Interrupt Time : 0 to 1,000,000 sec or 0 to 65,534 sec

 Temporary Interrupt Time : 0 to 1,000,000 sec or 0 to 65,534 sec

 Sustained Interrupt Time : 0 to 1,000,000 sec or 0 to 65,534 sec

NOTE: Depending on the “16bit Count Use” setting in the menu “GLOBAL SETTING /

GENERAL / DEVICE / OTHERS” , the roll-over limit of each interrupt time is applied differently.

 When the setting is OFF, each interrupt time is rolled over to 0 sec if the interrupt time exceeds 1,000,000 sec

 When the setting is ON, each interrupt time is rolled over to 0 sec if the interrupt time exceeds 65,534

CONTACT WEAR

 Phase A Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%

 Phase B Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%

 Phase C Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%

PEAK CURRENT

 Phase A, B, C Peak Current, Ground Peak Current and Negative Sequence Peak Current

 Trigger Source

 Load Current Alarm Detect

ENERGY

 Positive Active Power Energy – A, B, C, 3 ф : 0 to 60,000 kWh or 0 to 999,999,999 kWh

 Positive Reactive Power Energy – A, B, C, 3 ф : 0 to 60,000 kVarh or 0 to 999,999,999 kvarh

 Negative Active Power Energy – A, B, C, 3 ф : 0 to 60,000 kWh or 0 to 999,999,999 kWh

 Negative Reactive Power Energy – A, B, C, 3 ф : 0 to 60,000 kVarh or 0 to 999,999,999 kvarh

NOTE: Depending on the “16bit Ener’ Use” setting in the menu “GLOBAL SETTING /

GENERAL / DEVICE / OTHERS” , the roll-over limit of each energy value is applied differently.

 When the setting is OFF, each energy value is rolled over to 0 if the energy value exceeds 999,999,999

 When the setting is ON, each energy value is rolled over to 0 if the energy value exceeds 60,000



DEMAND

 Demand Current – A, B, C, Ground, Negative Sequence

 Demand Positive Active Power – A, B, C, 3 ф

 Demand Positive Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3 ф

 Demand Negative Active Power – A, B, C, 3 ф

 Demand Negative Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3 ф

2.11. Communications

Table 2-2. Communications

Side panel RS232-1

Side panel RS232-2

Side panel RS485 http://www.entecene.co.kr

RS232,1200-115200bps, None, Odd or Even Parity, 7 or 8 Data bits, 1 or 2 Stop bit

DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC60870-5-101 and Multi-Bit Protocol,

Interface Software


DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC60870-5-101 and Multi-Bit Protocol,

Interface Software


DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC60870-5-101 and Multi-Bit Protocol

Side panel EN1, EN2

RJ-45 or Fiber Optic(Option),10BASE-T/100BASE-T

DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC61850(option), IEC60870-5-104 and

Multi-Bit Protocol, Interface Software

Side panel Wifi - Option

SMA-Female Type

Interface Software

Front Panel USB

USB- B Type

Interface Software



3. APPLICATION


ETMFC610 has two control types (Fault Indication type(default) and Protection type). Control

Type setting is available in the menu “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL /

DEVICE / CONTROL TYPE” . The control type must be selected according to the installed body.

The fault indication function is active on Fault Indication type, and when the switch body or sectionalizer body, Sectionalizer type must be selected. If the selected control type and the body type do not match, erroneous operation or non-operating occurs.

But, the protection function(fault trip) is active on Protection type, and when the CB(or fault interrupters) body, Protection type must be selected. If the selected control type and the body type do not match, erroneous operation or non-operating occurs.

Depending on the control type, different setting menus are applied. Applied setting menus are shown below according to the control type.

Figure 3-1. Control Type Logic Diagram



4. DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION

230

4- 6.5

128.25

110

RUN

DIAG/ERR

RX

TX

ETMFC610

MULTI FUNCTION CONTROL

SET GROUP

1

3

5

2

4

6

AC SUPPLY

CHARGER

BATTERY

PROTECTION

ENABLED

GROUND

ENABLED

SEF

ENABLED

LOOP CONTROL

ENABLED

CONTROL

LOCKED

EVENT

METER

AWAKE

SET

ESC

ENT

FUN

REMOTE

ENABLED

GROUP

SELECT

BATT' TEST

LAMP TEST

FI RESET

AUX 1

C

G

A

B

SEF

A

B PHASE DIFFERENCE

C

ABC / RST LIVE

VA / VR

VB / VS

VC / VT

MECHNISM LOCK

CLOSE BLOCK

OPEN BLOCK

GAS LOW

CLOSE OPEN

Figure 4-1.

Construction and Dimensions



5. SIDE PANEL CONSTRUCTION

ETMFC610 Side panel construction is as follows.

M10 9

NTC

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 F01

2 1 3 2 1

WIFI

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 E01

- +

IRIG-B

FG N

RS485

P

5 4 3

RS232-2

2 D01 8 7 6 5 4

RS232-1

3 2 C01

RS232

DBG

RX

TX

Eth2

07 06 05 04 03 02 B01 7 6

Eth1

5 4 3

1L/ACT

1SPEED

2L/ACT

2SPEED

2 A01

SEF IN IC IB IA

CT

INPUT

IN201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208

PW

VT VS VR

PT

VC VB VA

OUTPUT

OUT201/202 OUT203/204 OUT205 OUT206 OUT207 OUT214

+

108 107 106 105

PW2 OUT

104

OUTPUT

103 102 OUT101

PW1 OUT(Rect')

P N P N

FUSE

+24V 0V

FUSE

112 111 110 109 108 IN107

INPUT

106 105 104 103 102 IN101

POWER IN

BAT+ BAT- AC24+ AC24-

K01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 I01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 H01 2 3 4 P01 2 3 G01 2 3 4

Figure 5-1.

Side Panel

Table 5-1. Connector

Item

NTC

IRIG-B(Option)

RS485

RS232

ETHERNET

ETHERNET(Option)

WIFI(Option)

CT

PT

INPUT(20x)

OUTPUT(20x)

INPUT(10x) (Option)

OUTPUT(10x) (Option)

POWER1 OUT

POWER2 OUT

POWER IN

Connector Model No.

AKZ 950-2P

AKZ 950-2P

AKZ 950-3P

DB9-P

RJ45

Fiber optic LC type

SMA

AKZ 950-10P

AKZ 950-8P

AKZ 950-10P

AKZ 950-6P, AKZ 950-6P

AKZ 950-7P, AKZ 950-7P,

AKZ 950-8P, AKZ 950-5P,

AKZ 950-3P

AKZ 950-4P

AKZ 960-4P

Remark sensor

Time Synchronization

Communition

Communition

Communition

Communition

Communition

Current Transformer

Voltage Transformer

Digital Input

Digital Output

Digital Input

Digital Output

DC21..30V(Motor power)

Modem power

AC24V, Battery



5.1. Communication Port


1) RS232 PORT

RS232 has D-SUB 9pin as Male type and all pins are connected except pin number 9, RI(Ring

Indicator).

Table 5-2. RS232-1/RS2332-2 Pin Description

6

7

4

5

8

Pin

1

2

3

Signal

DCD

RXD

TXD

DTR

GND

DSR

RTS

CTS

Description

Data Carrier Detect

Receive Data(IN)

Transmit Data(OUT)

Data Terminal Ready(OUT)

Ground

Data Set Ready(IN)

Request To Send(OUT)

Clear To Send(IN)

Figure 5-2. RS232

9 N/C No Connection

2) RS485 PORT

RS485 has 3pins as in ‘Table 5-3. RS485 Pin Description’ .

Table 5-3.RS485 Pin Description

Pin Description

3 2 1

1

2

3

RS485+

RS485-

SG (Cable Shield)

FG N P

Figure 5-3.RS485



3) ETHERNET PORT


Ethernet1 and 2 are RJ-45 that has 8pins as in ‘Table 5-4.Ehternet(TP) Pin Description’ .

Ethernet port can be selected between TP and FX type. If FX type is used, LC type optical communication will be supported.

Ethernet 1 and 2 are composed of duplex switch ports

Table 5-4.Ethernet(TP) Pin Description

Pin

1

2

Wire Color

White/Green

Green

10Base-T Signal

100Base-TX Signal

Transmit+

Transmit- Eth2 Eth1

[ Ethernet TP ]

1L/ACT

1SPEED

2L/ACT

2SPEED

5

6

3

4

White/Orange

Blue

White/Blue

Orange

Receive+

Unused

Unused

Receive-

Eth2 Eth1

[ Ethernet FX ]

1L/ACT

1SPEED

2L/ACT

2SPEED

7

8

White/Brown

Brown

Unused

Unused

Figure 5-4.Ethernet Port

4) IRIG-B Connector - Option

It is a IRIG-B connector for time synchronization function using Time Synchronization module.

Input current : 4 mA at 5 V (typical)

Table 5-5. IRIG-B Pin Description 2 1

Connector Pin Description

IRIG-B

Connector

1

2

POSITIVE

NEGATIVE

- +

Figure 5-5.

IRIG-B



5) Wifi Connector - Option


ETMFC610 and ETIMS Interface Software can be connected wirelessly. See “17. Wireless

Connection” for details on Wifi connections.

Table 5-6. WIFI Pin Description


SMA

Connector

1

Connecting the SMA antenna cables

WIFI

Figure 5-6. WIFI

5.2. NTC Connector

A terminal that connects the battery temperature compensation sensor.

(NTC 10 ㏀ B25/85K 3435)

Table 5-7. NTC Pin Description


NTC

Connector

01

02

NTC Thermistor

(NTC 10 ㏀ B25/85K 3435)

M10 9

NTC

Figure 5-7. NTC Thermistor



5.3. Current Input Connector


Current connector starts from pin number 1-2(A phase), 3-4(B phase), 5-6(C phase), 7-8(N, ground), 9-10(SEF) in turn and each phase name is indicated at current input Input connector of

ETMFC610. Connector type is STLZ950-10.

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 F01

SEF IN IC IB IA

Figure 5-8.

Current Input Terminal

Table 5-8.

Current Input Pin Description

Pin

Description

IA

A phase

IB

B phase

IC

C phase

5.4. Voltage Input Connector

IN

N phase

SEF

SEF

Voltage connector receives source side 3 phases(A,B,C) voltages and load side 3 phases(R,S,T) voltages. Pin arrangement is as follow table. Connector type is STLZ950-8P.

Table 5-9. Voltage Input Pin Description

Pin

Default LCD

Display

VA

A

VB

B

VC

C

VR

R

VS

S

VT

T

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 E01

VT VS VR VC VB VA

Figure 5-9.

Voltage Input Terminal



5.5. Status Inputs Connector

8 inputs of status provision.

Table 5-10. Status Input Pin Description

Connector

Status

Input

Connector

Pin

1

2

3

Description

Open Status

Close Status

Gas Pressure Low

4

6

Manual Unlock

Door Open Status

5,7,8 Reserve

9,10 Common

5.6. Outputs Connector


IN201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208

PW

K01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Figure 5-10. Status Input Terminal

Digital Output(DO) terminal has total 6 relay output where sending a control signal, its pin arrangement is as follow.

Table 5-11. Output Pin Description


1, 2 OUT201/OUT202(OPEN)

3, 4 OUT203/OUT204(CLOSE)

Output

Connector

5, 6

7, 8

9, 10

11, 12

OUT205 (OPEN)

OUT206 (CLOSE)

OUT207 (Reserve)

OUT214 (Reserve)

+

I01 2 3 4

OUT205 OUT206 OUT207 OUT214

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Figure 5-11. Output Terminal

 Open operation is controlled by two ports of OUT201 and OUT202, and operates when

OUT201 is high and OUT202 is low.

 Close operation is controlled by two ports of OUT203 and OUT204, and operates when

OUT203 is high and OUT204 is low.



5.7. SCADA Connector (Option)


5 4 3 2 D01 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 C01 07 06 05 04 03 02 B01 7 6 5 4 3 2 A01

108 107 106 105 104

OUTPUT

103 102 OUT101 112 111 110 109 108 IN107

INPUT

106 105 104 103 102 IN101

Figure 5-12.SCADA Input, Output Terminal

Digital output (DO) part is composed of total 8 relay outputs. connector outputs control command.

Digital input (DI) part receives 12 status signals in total by using electrically insulated contacts.

Connector is for receiving status inputs from the control element.

5.8. Power Input / Battery Input Connector

Power Input Connector for ETMFC610 ’s AC24V Power Supply.

It is a battery input connector to charge the battery using inner charger circuit

Table 5-12. Power/Battery Input Pin Description

BAT+ BAT- AC24+ AC24-


Power/Battery

Input Connector

1,2

3,4

BATT INPUT

AC 24V INPUT G01 2 3 4

Figure 5-13.

Power & Battery Input

Thermistor



5.9. Power Output Connector


Power output connector for switch operation or modem power supply and so on. It can supply DC

+12V and +24V, 40W/continuous , 60W/1Min usage.

Table 5-13. Power Output Pin Description


P01 +24V (Rectifier)

Power Output

Connector

P02 -

P03 GND

H01,H03 +24V or +12V

H02,H04 GND

Figure 5-14.

Power Output Thermistor

5.10. Charge Circuit

Charger uses current-control circuit to prevent abrupt-recharge and voltage-steady circuit to prevent overrecharge. Charge power supply is 24Vac, equal with Relay Module. Charging device charges up to 80 percent of battery with constant current, from 80 to 100 percent of battery with constant voltage, to make sure that there is not any danger of overcharging. To measure temperature in charging circuit, it helps to compensate with charging voltage, 26.4V to 28.2V. When measured temperature is 5~35 ℃ , charging voltage becomes

27.3V. Below 5 ℃ and higher than 35 ℃ are measured, charging voltages become 28.2V and 26.4V, respectively.

Charge Voltage : 27.3Vdc(26.4V~28.2V)

Charge Current : 1.386Adc

Charge Time : 10 hours to charge 80% of battery (In case of 17Ah Battery)



5.11. Battery Protection


Battery protection is to protect the battery from over-discharge by disconnecting the battery from the control circuit when AC power is down and before the battery is completely discharged. CPU measures the battery voltage and Latch Relay is set to disconnect the battery circuit either 10 minutes after battery goes down below 21 voltage or right after battery goes down below 19 voltage.

On Power Down status, if the external power is re-supplied or the Power Switch is changed from OFF to ON,

Control Module becomes operating as normal.

When AC Power is not supplied, in order to operate it by Power Switch, turn it OFF for 5 seconds and then turn it ON. When it turns ON without Battery, its power will be down after 10 minutes.

ETMFC610

24Vac

G03

G04

DC/DC

(Insulation)

5V

SYSTEM

POWER

DGND

CHARGER

AGND

+

-

±12V

NTC

Themistor

BATTERY

24Vdc/17Ah

G01

G02

AGND

VGND

AGND

Under Voltage

AGND

DC/DC

(Non Insulation)

Figure 5-15.

Power line and Power Protection

AGND

PW1 OUT(Rect')

+

-

CLOSE/OPEN

MOTOR POWER

(24V / 20~30Vdc)

PW2 OUT

+

-

MODEM POWER

(24Vdc)



5.12. Typical Wiring Diagram


1

2

Figure 5-16.

Typical Wiring Diagram



6. USER INTERFACE PANEL


This section describes User Interface Panel based on the front-panel.

User Interface Panel has a LCD (20  8), keypads and LEDs to monitor selected functions and to indicate selected function and operation status as below.

 Directly control the switch(or CB)

 Verify control status

 View system status

 View metering value

 View information stored in ETMFC610 unit

 View and change ETMFC610 settings

ETMFC610

MULTI FUNCTION CONTROL

1

3

5

2

4

6

AC SUPPLY

CHARGER

BATTERY

ESC FUN

ENT

A

B

C

A

B

C

G

SEF

ABC / RST LIVE

VA / VR

VB / VS

VC / VT

MECHNISM LOCK

닫힘 열림

Figure 6-1. User Interface Panel



6.1. Construction


Panel consists of eight sections as below;

 Operation Section

 Local Control Section

 Menu Control Section

 Fault Indication Section

 Voltage Elements Section

 System Diagnostic Section

 Battery Status Section

 User Selected LED Section

6.1.1. Operation Section

OPEN

Pressing OPEN push-button sends a trip signal to the Switch (or CB).

CLOSE

Pressing CLOSE push-button sends a close signal to the Switch (or CB).

ETMFC610 has a feature of Manual Close Time Delay. The Close Time Delay allows a delay of

0.00 to 600.00 seconds after pressing the close push-button before closing the tank. During the manual close delay time, if the CLOSE push-button is pressed, it closes immediately without waiting for the close delay time to be completed.

POSITION LED

Indicates the position of the the Switch (or CB). Position indicator is based on the Switch (or CB)

52a contacts.

Figure 6-2. Operation Section



6.1.2. Local Control Section


All indicators show status of Control function. The indicators are continuously ON when the control function is enabled and the indicators are continuously OFF when control function is

DISABLE. The push-button toggles ENABLE/DISABLE.

Figure 6-3. Local Control Section

PROTECTION ENABLED

When the LED is illuminated, all fault indication elements (in case of Fault Indication type) protection elements (in case of Protection type) are enabled. The fault indication and protection can be disabled by pressing the “PROTECTION ENABLED” push button on the front panel.

NOTE : If “PROTECTION ENABLED” is ON, all fault indication and protection elements and are operating, however, Ground fault and Sensitive Earth Fault Elements are individually set for enable or disable on front panel by LED ON/OFF button.

GROUND ENABLED

GROUND ENABLED LED is ON and OFF by pressing the “GROUND ENABLED” push-button.

When the “PROTECTION ENABLED” and “GROUND ENABLED” LEDs are both ON, ground fault indication element (in case of Fault Indication type) and ground overcurrent protection elements (in case of Protection type) are enabled. However, even if the “GROUND ENABLED” is

ON and the “PROTECTION ENABLED” LED is OFF, ground fault elements do not operate. If the

“GROUND ENABLED” is OFF, and the “PROTECTION ENABLED” is ON, ground fault elements do not operate, too.

When “GROUND ENABLED” is OFF, “SEF ENABLED” becomes OFF at the same time. Also, when “SEF ENABLED” is ON, “GROUND ENABLED” becomes ON.



SEF ENABLED


SEF ENABLED LED is ON and OFF by pressing “SEF ENABLED” push-button. When the

“PROTECTION ENABLED”, “GROUND ENABLED” and “SEF ENABLED” LEDs are both

ON, Sensitive earth fault indication(in case of Fault Indication type) and SEF overcurrent protection elements (in case of Protection type) operate. However, even if any of the three LED lamps is OFF, sensitive earth fault elements do not operate.

When “SEF ENABLED” is ON, “GROUND ENABLED” becomes ON. Also, when “GROUND

ENABLED” is OFF, “SEF ENABLED” becomes OFF at the same time.

LOOP CONTROL ENABLED

When “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED is ON, loop control function is enabled. However, the loop control function operates only in Fault Indication type.

CONTROL LOCKED

When the “CONTROL LOCKED” LED is on, all the functions in the operation section and Local control section are locked. These can be unlocked by pressing the “CONTROL LOCKED” pushbutton at the front panel.

NOTE : Even though Control Locked function is locked, OPEN, Battery Load Test, Trip Test,

Lamp Test and menu control section can be normally operated.

REMOTE ENABLED

When the “REMOTE ENABLED” LED is ON, all remote control functions (e.g. SCADA system) are enabled. This can be disabled by pressing the “REMOTE ENABLED” push-button at the front panel. SCADA control refers to supported communications protocol such as DNP3.0, MODBUS,

IEC60870-5-101, IEC60870-5-104 and IEC61850, etc.

NOTE : When the “REMOTE ENABLED" LED is ON, depending on user’s request and option, Push-Button controls on the front panel can be blocked except for

“ GROUP SELECT” push-button, LAMP TEST and MENU Control Section.



GROUP SELECT


This button is used to change the setting group applied to ETMFC610.

The procedure of changing the active setting group using the "GROUP SELECT" push-button on the front panel is as follows.

 Use the "GROUP SELECT" push-button to select the setting group you want to apply.

Setting group is cyclically selected;

GROUP1  GROUP2  …  GROUP6

1

3

5

2

4

6

 GROUP1.

 While controlling the "GROUP SELECT" push-button, the LCD display will be like the

“Figure 6-4. Group Select Mode LCD

Display” and the selected SET GROUP LED

Figure 6-4. Group Select Mode LCD Display will flash.

 At this time, if you press the [ENT] button, the selected setting group will be applied. The flashing "SET GROUP" LED will light up.

 If [ESC] button is pressed or if [ENT] button is not pressed for a long time, the setting group before the "GROUP SELECT" push-button control will be returned.

BATT’ TEST

When “BATT’ TEST” push-button is pressed, battery load test is run.

On Test, Battery is disconnected from the charge circuit and connected the battery with load resistor and check the battery. Load resistor shall be connected with AC supply.

LCD displays during Battery Load Testing.

 BATTERY(V) : Display the battery voltage.

Figure 6-5. Battery Test Mode LCD Display

 CHARGER(V) : Display the voltage of charge circuit.

 BAT STATUS : Display battery status.

OK : When the battery voltage is between 21V ~ 28V

HIGH : When the battery voltage is over 28V

LOW : When the battery voltage is between 15V ~ 21V

NO BATT : When the battery voltage is below 15V

 CHG STATUS : Display charge circuit status.

OK : When the charge circuit is between 25V ~29.5V

HIGH : When the charge circuit is over 29.5V

LOW : When the charge circuit is below 25V



LAMP TEST / FI RESET

Fault indication and fault target status are reset. http://www.entecene.co.kr

And all LED lamps on the user interface panel are test (All lamps are ON for a while).

AUX 1

Depending on user’s request, manufacturer sets a function on the LED. When the LED is on, the function is operated.

6.1.3. Menu Control Section

ETMFC610 has 20  8 LCD (Liquid Cristal Display) display.

LCD DISPLAY

8x20 Characters display

CONTROL KEYS

[ ▲ ] [ ▼ ] [ ◀ ] [ ▶ ]

Arrow keys are used for the moving between the menu window and the changing of the setting value

[ ▲ ] (METER) : Up arrow key is used to move to the meter menu, operable in menu starting mode

[ ▼ ] (AWAKE) : Down arrow key is used for panel awake from sleep mode

[ ◀ ] (EVENT) : Left arrow key is used to move to the event menu, operable in menu starting mode

[ ▶ ] (SET) : Right arrow key is used to move to the setting menu, operable in menu starting mode

[FUN] : To move to main menu when present mode is in starting mode

[ESC] : To cancel for data input mode or return the display to the previous level

[ENT] : To select sub menu or data input

NOTE

If control panel is awaken from sleep mode using [AWAKE] key, it must be set to “KEY” or

“BOTH” in setting menu “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTIN G / GENERAL / DEVICE /

PANEL SLEEP / Awake Method” .



1

3

5

2

4

6

ESC FUN

ENT

Figure 6-6. Menu Control Section

[FUN] Key

Press [FUN] key to enter Main menu for displaying information or changing settings. [FUN] key is also used to display a help message in setting change mode and to cancel the help message display.

[ESC] Key

The ESC key can be used to cancel data input mode and return to the previous menu.

[ENT] Key

ENT key is used to select a menu by using Up and Down arrow key. Enter key is also used to accept a new setting by using Up or down arrow key.

[ ◀ ] [ ▶ ] Key

Use the left and right arrow keys to move cursor when you are in the data input mode and when you change display message.

[ ▲ ] [ ▼ ] Key

Use Up and Down arrow keys to move through the various menus and to decrease or increase value when you are in the data input mode.



6.1.4. Fault Indication Section


On fault detection, protection elements and phase are displayed which detects more than pickup level or fault trip.

FAULT INDICATION

 A, B, C : Indicates a phase fault has occurred on one of the phase lines

 G (GROUND) : Indicates an ground fault has occurred

 SEF : Indicates a sensitive earth fault has occurred on the neutral line

Figure 6-7. Fault Indication Section

NOTE : Fault Indication LEDs will remain on after lighting, and will be turned off by "FI

RESET" command.

6.1.5. Voltage Element Section

Indicates that voltage element is occurred.

 PHASE DIFFERENCE : Shows a Phase Difference state between source side and load side voltage.

 ABC/RST LIVE : Show Live Line status of source side and load side

 VA/VR, VB/VR and VC/VT : Shows Open Phase

Status on each phase.

6.1.6. System Diagnostic Section

Figure 6-8. Voltage Elements Section

Indicates Diagnostic status of ETMFC610.

 RUN : Status of ETMFC610 systems shows normal

 DIAG/ERROR : Status of ETMFC610 systems shows warning

 RX : Shows the data receiving status for remote communication.

 TX : Shows the data transferring status for remote communication.

NOTE : RUN LED is blinking when system functional status is normal

Figure 6-9. System Diagnostic Section



6.1.7. Battery Status Section


Indicates the system power status of ETMFC610.

AC SUPPLY indicates ETMFC610 has external power source. CHARGER LED shows ETMFC610 charging status, BATTERY LED shows ETMFC610 battery status.

 AC SUPPLY : Status of supplying the external AC Figure 6-10. Battery Status Section power.

 CHARGER : If Charger LED is On, charger is normal status.

 BATTERY : If Battery LED is On, battery is normal status.

NOTE : Battery voltage and charge circuit voltage are always monitored periodically.

6.1.8. User LED Section

Status of PLC logic which is set by a user is displayed.

PLC logic is set in “ETMFC610 ETIMS Interface

Software” .

Factory default setting is as follows.

MECHNISM LOCK

CLOSE BLOCK

OPEN BLOCK

GAS LOW

Figure 6-11. User LED Section

Table 6-1. Default User LED Function

User LED

PLC Logic

ULED1

ULED2

ULED3

ULED4

ULED5

ULED6

ULED7

ULED8

Name Description

MACHANISM LOCK The LED is ON when status of ETMFC610 is mechanism lock.

CLOSE BLOCK The LED is ON when status of ETMFC610 is close block.

OPEN BLOCK

GAS LOW

The LED is ON when status of ETMFC610 is open block.

The LED is ON when status of ETMFC610 is gas low.

Not defined

Not defined

Not defined

Not defined

The LED is not defined.






6.1.9. Set Group Status Section

GROUP #

It displays the currently applied Set Group to

ETMFC610.

Please refer to the explanation of “ GROUP SELECT ” button in “6.1.2. Local Control Section” for procedure of changing the set group locally. http://www.entecene.co.kr

1

3

2

4

5 6

Figure 6-12. Set Group Status Section



6.2. LCD Display


20  8 character LCD which has back-light support, is used for a user to operate conveniently and to check operation status clearly.

Figure 6-13 .

Initial Logo and Main Menu

6.2.1. Menu Structure Tree

 Screen structure consists Initial Logo and Main menu.

 Initial screen and all menus are round robin algorithm.

 Menu screen is divided in to Setting and Event management menu.

 Main menu has 7 sub-menus.



*. NOTE) Menu Structure Tree may be different according to the version and option of ETMFC610.

Figure 6-14. Menu Structure Tree (1/2)


Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 ⓐ http://www.entecene.co.kr

＇

＇

＇

＇

＇

＇

*. NOTE) Menu Structure Tree may be different according to the version and option of ETMFC610.

Figure 6-14. Menu Structure Tree (2/2)



6.2.2. GLOBAL Setting


SYSTEM

Set items related to power system and main body.

Consists of POWER LINE, CURRENT SENSING and VOLTAGE SENSING.

EVENT RECORDER

Set items related to the format of event behind recoded and whether event is recorded.

MONITORING

Set items related to monitoring for power system and ETMFC610.

Consists of LIVE LINE, OPERATION COUNT, CONTACT WEAR, BATTERY LOAD TEST,

BATTERY MANAGEMENT, POWER QUALITY, TD MONITOR and SYSTEM POWER.

LOOP CONTROL

Set items related to loop control elements. This menu is only applied when “Fault Indication” type is set in “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / CONTROL TYPE” menu.

PASSCODE

Set items related to passcode security.

Consists of PASSCODE1, PASSCODE2 and PASSCODE 3.

PASSCODE 1 is applied when changing General Global settings and Group Settings, and

PASSCODE 2 is applied when communication setting is changed. PASSCODE 3 is applied when clearing or resetting registered data such as event logs, counter logs, energy data, etc.

PLC

Set items related to PLC (Programmable Logic Control) elements.

Consists of LOGIC TIMER, PULSE TIMER, PULSE COUNT, INPUT PORTS and OUTPUT

PORTS.

DEVICE

Set items related to Controller ETMFC610.

Consists of CONTROL TYPE, OPERATION TIME, H/W OPTION, GAS SENSOR, MANUAL

CLOSE, LCD DISPLAY, PANEL SLEEP, TIME ZONE and OTHERS.



COMMUNICATION

Set items related to communication elements. http://www.entecene.co.kr

Consists of PROTOCOLS, PORTS, DIALUP MODEM, FTP-SSL, WIFI and EVENT&ETC.

SAVE SETTING

Save all changed values in the menu.

6.2.3. GROUP Setting

This menu is divided into GROUP 1~ 6 for user’s convenient. Selected group circularly changes each time of pressing the [GROUP SELECT] button. Consists of GROUP 1~6 settings, respectively. If ‘GROUP #’ LED is ON, ‘GROUP # SETTINGS’ settings are applied to

ETMFC610.

1

3

5

2

4

6

Figure 6-15. GROUP SELCT Button and GROUP Setting

The [GROUP SELECT] button is used to select a set group applied to present ETMFC610. Please refer to the explanation of “ GROUP SELECT ” button in “6.1.2. Local Control Section” for procedure of changing the set group locally.

All set groups have the same submenus. Each set group is classified into FAULT INDICATION,

PROTECTION, DIRECTION, COLD LOAD PICKUP and MONITORING sub menus.

When set to “Fault Indication type (FITYPE” type in “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING /

GENERAL / DEVICE / CONTROL TYPE” , “PROTECTION” menu is not operated.

But, when set to “Protection type (PROTYPE)” type, “FAULT INDICATION” menu is not operated.



6.2.4. Event


ETMFC610 event information is shown in this menu.

Consists of OPERATION, FAULT, FAULT CYCLE, SYSTEM, SET CHANGE,

LOAD&ENERGY/MIN, LOAD&ENERGY/HOUR, LOAD&ENERGY/DAY, DIAGNOSTIC,

PQM, LOAD CURRENT ALARM and CLEAR SAVED DATA.

6.2.5. Maintenance

Shows about Event Maintenance items.

 COUNT : Shows counters related with system restart and diagnostic.

 INTERRUPT TIME : Cumulated time of Interruption occurred is displayed.

 CONTACT WEAR : Shows damaged status (contact life) of switch.

 DATA RESET : Maintenance related data is Reset.

 CONTROLLER INFO : Present ETMFC610 information is displayed.

 MECHNISM SCALE : Correction scale factor for main body sensor is displayed.

For more detail information, please refer to “10.

MAINTENANCE”.

6.2.6. Time

Present time can be set and checked.

If “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / Time Syn’ Type” is “GMT” and “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / IRIG Use” is “ON” , do not set current time manually.

6.2.7. Status

Present status of Switch, fault, diagnostic and Input/Output are displayed.

6.2.8. Metering

Shows metering values. For more details, refer to (see “13. METERING”)



6.3. Using the LCD Menu


6.3.1. Initial Screen

Important information is displayed in the initial screen for user convenience in ETMFC610.

① To move to other initial screen, press [ENT] button .

② Press [FUN] button in initial screen to move to Main menu.

③ “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / LCD DISPLAY”

Through “Init Main Screen” in the MENU, main initial screen can be selected. After initial booting or clearing SLEEP MODE, this initial Screen can be displayed.

Table 6-2. Initial Screen (1/3)

INITIAL SCREEN

MULTI-FUNC CONTROL

ETMFC610

SELF CHECK [ NORMAL]

CONTR.TYPE [ FITYPE]

52 CONTACT [ CLOSE]

ENTEC E&E CO., LTD.

Initial Screen 1

This screen displays status information of ETMFC610

SELF CHECK: It displays self-diagnostic information of ETMFC610.

 NORMAL: It displays normal status of ETMFC610

 ALARM: It displays self-diagnostic alarm of ETMFC610.

 ERROR: It displays self-diagnostic error of ETMFC610. In this status,

ETMFC610 is in significantly abnormal status so, ETMFC610 blocks to

Open/Close switch.

NOTE :

If “ALARM” and “ERROR” in the self-check, ETMFC610 is in abnormal condition. Immediately stop operation and contact Manufacturer.

CONTR.TYPE: It displays the control type of ETMFC610.

 FITYPE: Control type is fault indication type.

 PROTYPE: Control type is protection type.

52 CONTACT: It displays the status of switch(or CB)’s main contact

 CLOSE: Displays main contact is closed.

 OPEN: Displays main contact is opened.

 TROUBLE: It is displayed in case of Contact status is incorrect or cable connection is not completed.




INITIAL SCREEN http://www.entecene.co.kr

CURRENT(A)/VOLT(kV)

IA: 00000 IB: 00000

IC: 00000 IG: 00000

SEF: 00.00

VA: 00.00 VR: 00.00

VB: 00.00 VS: 00.00

VC: 00.00 VT: 00.00

Initial Screen 2

This screen displays current/voltage information on the line.

 Each phase current value is displayed (A,B,C,N,SEF) [A].

 Each phase voltage value is displayed (A,B,C,R,S,T) [kV].

CURRENT(A)/VOLT(kV)

IA: 00000 IB: 00000

IC: 00000 IG: 00000

SEF: 00.00

AB: 00.00 RS: 00.00

BC: 00.00 ST: 00.00

CA: 00.00 TR: 00.00

Initial Screen 3

This screen displays current/voltage information on the line.

 Each phase current value is displayed (A,B,C,N,SEF) [A].

 Each phase-to-phase voltage value is displayed (AB,BC,CA,RS,ST,TR) [kV].

GPS/IRIG MODULE

STATUS[ NOT INSTALL]

G01/01/2017 00:00:00

L01/01/2017 00:00:00

<-: -D -M -S>

<-: -D -M -S>

GPS/IRIG MODULE

STATUS[ NOT INSTALL]

G01/01/2017 00:00:00

L01/01/2017 00:00:00

< ⓐ >

< ⓑ >

Initial Screen 4

This screen displays IRIG/GPS related with time synchronization.

STATUS: This screen displays time synchronization information.

 LINK SUCCESS: Time synchronization device is well installed.

 LINK FAIL: The connection of time synchronization is not normal.

 NOT INSTALL: Time synchronization device is not installed.

G: This screen displays UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.

L: This screen displays Local Time. ⓐ This screen displays latitude received from time synchronization device.

(N: North, S: South). ⓑ This screen displays longitude received from time synchronization device.

(E: East, W: West).

*. NOTE) If time synchronization device is not installed or at link fail, local Information (latitude, longitude) is not displayed.

CONTROLLER INFO

MPU: V1.0.0.0

DSP: V1.0.0.0

CPU: V1.0.0.0

HMI: V1.0.0.0

XML: ST00-1.00

OS : #001 2017-01-01

Initial Screen 5

This screen displays the version of ETMFC610.




INITIAL SCREEN http://www.entecene.co.kr

LOOP CONTROL <SEC>

OPERATE ST [ RESET]

52A CONTACT[ CLOSE]

SOURCE VOLT[ LIVE-L]

LOAD VOLT[ LIVE-L]

O-COUNT SET[ 4]

O-COUNT NO.[ 0]

LOOP CONTROL < ⓐ >

OPERATE ST [ RESET]

52A CONTACT[ CLOSE]


LOAD VOLT[ LIVE-L]

O-COUNT SET[ 4]

O-COUNT NO.[ 0]

Initial Screen 6

This screen displays loop control function. It can only display when control type setting is “Fault Indication Type (FITYPE)”. ⓐ Loop Control function are as below.

 OFF : Loop Control function does not operate.

 SEC : It operates as Auto Sectionalizer.

 TIE : It operates as Tiepoint Switch.

 - : Since control type is selected as “Protection Type (PROTYPE), auto loop control function is not activated.

OPERATE ST: Displays the present operating status.

 RESET : Reset status

 RUNNING : Operation counter is increasing.

 LOCKOUT : When at “SEC”, it displays. When operation counter is up to maximum setting, switch will be at open operating.

 CLOSING : When at “TIE”, it is standby status for close operation order.

 OPENING : When at “TIE”, it is standby status for opening operation order

52 CONTACT: It displays the status of switch(or CB)’s main contact




SOURCE VOLT: Displays the status of source side voltage(LIVE or DEAD

LINE)

LOAD VOLT: Displays the status of load side voltage(LIVE or DEAD LINE)

O-COUNT SET : Displays the set operate count

O-COUNT NO. : Displays the present operate count



6.3.2. Main Menu


In the initial screen, press [FUN] button, it is moved into Main menu. If press [FUN] or [ESC] button in main menu, it is moved to the initial menu. Main menu has sub-menu as below.

MAIN MENU

[MAIN MENU]

>1.GLOBAL SETTING

2.GROUP SETTING

3.EVENT

4.MAINTENANCE

5.TIME

6.STATUS

7.METERING

Main Menu consists of 7 sub-menus.

You can choose any sub-menu by using

Press [ENT]

As above explanation, you can move and select sub-menu.

[

key to select the sub-menu.

▲ ] [ ▼ ] key.

6.3.3. Setting Example

Step to change Phase Pickup current of FAULT INDICATION menu in Group1~6 setting.

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ GROUP #/ BASIC FUNCTION / FI PICKUP

CURRENT” .

A following screen is displayed.

MAIN MENU/ GROUP #/ BASIC FUNCTION / FI PICKUP CURRENT

[FI PICKUP CURRENT]

>Phase: 500

Ground: 250

SEF: OFF

Neg Seq’: OFF

[0(OFF), 10~1600:1A]

Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A

Default 500A Step 1A

FI phase pickup current. This value is primary current.

Primary and secondary current is related CT ratio.

(Primary current) = (Secondary current) × (CT ratio)

As above example screen, to move to Phase, use [ ▲ ] [ ▼ ] key and press [ENT] key to move into value column.

Use [ ▲ ] [ ▼ ] keys and [ ◀ ] [ ▶ ] keys to change a new value.

Press [ENT] key, then you see the changed Phase value.

NOTE : You must save all changed values at ”Setting Save” menu.



6.3.4. Setting Save


To save all changed values, steps are as follows;

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ GROUP #/ *. SAVE SETTING” and follow each step as below ( “Global Setting / General” , “Global Setting / Communication” and “Group

Setting” menu have “*.Setting Save” menu).

MAIN MENU / GROUP SETTING / SAVE SETTING

①

SETTING CHANGED

PRESS <ENT>

TO SAVE (UP/DOWN)

②

③

④

⑤

ENTER PASSCODE 1

0000

[SAVE SETTING]

* SUCCESS *

* NOTHING CHANGED *

SETTING CHANGED

PRESS <ENT>

TO SAVE (UP/DOWN)

① To save a changed set value, press [ENT] button.

② Enter Passcode and press [ENT] button. If Passcode is correct, ③ screen appears; otherwise ② screen appears again.

Passcode 1 is applied when changing General Global settings and

Group Settings, and Passcode 2 is applied when communication setting is changed.

③ If the changed value is set successfully, ③ screen is displayed for short period.

If there is no change value and select “*. SAVE SETTING” , then, screen ④ is displayed.

If you do not want to save changed setting value, please go to ① screen through [ ▲ ] [ ▼ ] button and to ⑤ screen [ENT] button.

NOTE :

Changed set value is applied if the changed set value is saved.

If changed set value saving is cancelled, previous value is remained.



7. GLOBAL SETTING


Place the curser in “GLOBAL SETTING”, press [ENT] button, it is moved to GLOBAL

SETTING. This menu consists of “GENERAL” menu and “COMMUNICATION” menu.

[GLOBAL SETTING]

>1.GENERAL

2.COMMUNICATION

7.1. General Setting

This menu is to set general setting required to operate multi-function control ETMFC610, and Submenu consists of below picture.

[GENERAL]

>1.SYSTEM

2.EVENT RECODER

3.MONITERING

4.LOOP CONTROL

5.PASSCODE

6.PLC

7.DEVICE

*.SAVE SETTING

NOTE : Changed set value must be saved to be applied. When escaping from “*.SAVE

SETTING” menu or moving to high menu, changed set value is saved by ‘Changed set value saved message’.



7.1.1. System


Place the curser on “SYSTEM” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu.

In this menu, elements related with SYSTEM, are set and it has sub-menu as below.

[SYSTEM]

>1.POWER LINE

2.CURRENT SENSING

3.VOLTAGE SENSING

CAUTION : This setting change may influence metering and whole system, precaution is requested.

7.1.1.1. Power Line

Place a cursor on “POWER LINE” in SYSTEM menu, and press [ENT] button, it is moved in this menu. Set the power system information where this control is installed.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / System Frequency

[POWER LINE]

>System Frequency:60

Phase Rotation: ABC

Phase Combina’: abc

[50~60Hz:10Hz]

Range 50, 60 ㎐

Default 60 Step ~

Select the nominal power system frequency. This value is used as a default to set the optimal digital sampling rate.

It is set before product delivery in accordance with spec.

NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to the option type.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / Phase Rotation

[POWER LINE]

System Frequency:60

>Phase Rotation: ABC

Phase Combina’: abc

[ABC/ACB]

Range ABC, ACB

Default ABC Step

Select the phase rotation of the power system.

~



GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / Phase Combina’

[POWER LINE]

System Frequency:60

Phase Rotation: ABC

>Phase Combina’: abc

[Combination of ABC]

Range abc, cab, bca, acb, bac, cba

Default abc Step ~

Put real phase of power system to a bushing or a terminal of a control device. As example, if setting value is cab, it means that bushing A is connected with phase C, bushing B is connected with phase A and bushing C is connected with phase B.

NOTE: In order to get the details relevant to the connection for ETMFC610, refer the following figure and table.

6

7

5

8

Line Feeding Case :

4

9

3

10

2

11

1

12

Install Direction

Install Case: Normal Installed

(Source Side: 1V)

Install Case: Reverse Installed

(Source Side: 2V) a b c c a b

Source Side b c a a c b b a c c b a

+

C

B

A

IC

IB

IA

T

-

S

R

-

R

S

T

IA

IB

IC

A

B

C

+

Load

Side

Figure 7-1.

Phase Connection



Table 7-1. Phase selection according to the reference voltage and phase rotation

Line feeding

Bushing Terminal

Case 1 : abc

ABC

Case 2 : cab

ABC

Case 3 : bca

ABC

Case 4 : acb

ABC

Case 5 : bac

ABC

Case 6 : cba

ABC

Case 7 : abc

RST

Case 8 : cab

RST

Case 9 : bca

RST

Case 10 : acb

RST

Case 11 : bac

RST

Case 12 : cba

RST

Recommend Setting

Phase

Combination

Source Side abc 1V cab bca acb bac cba abc cab bca acb bac cba

2V

Vb(Vs)/Ib

Vc(Vt)/Ic

Va(Vr)/Ia

Vb(Vs)/Ib

Vc(Vt)/Ic

Va(Vr)/Ia

Vb(Vs)/Ib

Vc(Vt)/Ic

Va(Vr)/Ia

Vb(Vs)/Ib

Vc(Vt)/Ic

Va(Vr)/Ia

Vb(Vs)/Ib

Vc(Vt)/Ic

Va(Vr)/Ia

Vb(Vs)/Ib

Vc(Vt)/Ic

Va(Vr)/Ia

Vb(Vs)/Ib

Vc(Vt)/Ic

Phase Mapping Result

LCD/INDEX Display :

Source V(Load V) / Current

Va(Vr)/Ia

Vb(Vs)/Ib

Vc(Vt)/Ic

Va(Vr)/Ia

Vb(Vs)/Ib

Vc(Vt)/Ic

Va(Vr)/Ia

Vb(Vs)/Ib

Vc(Vt)/Ic

Va(Vr)/Ia

Vb(Vs)/Ib

Vc(Vt)/Ic

Va(Vr)/Ia

Vb(Vs)/Ib

Vc(Vt)/Ic

Va(Vr)/Ia

B(S)/IB

A(R)/IA

R(A)/IA

S(B)/IB

T(C)/IC

S(B)/IB

T(C)/IC

R(A)/IA

T(C)/IC

R(A)/IA

S(B)/IB

R(A)/IA

T(C)/IC

S(B)/IB

S(B)/IB

R(A)/IA

T(C)/IC

T(C)/IC

S(B)/IB

R(A)/IA

Bushing/Controller

Terminal

A(R)/IA

B(S)/IB

C(T)/IC

B(S)/IB

C(T)/IC

A(R)/IA

C(T)/IC

A(R)/IA

B(S)/IB

A(R)/IA

C(T)/IC

B(S)/IB

B(S)/IB

A(R)/IA

C(T)/IC

C(T)/IC



*. NOTE ) Setting value for ‘Source Side’ is available from “ GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL /

SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING” in the menu.

.

7.1.1.2. Current Sensing

Place a cursor in “CURRENT SENSING” and press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu.

This Setting group is critical for all over-current protection and fault indication features that have settings specified in multiples of CT rating. When the relay is ordered, the phase, ground, and sensitive ground CT inputs must be specified as 1 Amp.

As the phase CTs are connected in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents

(Ia + Ib + Ic = Neutral Current = 3 I0) is used as the input for protection of the neutral over-current.

In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration, the ground CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive earth input may be used. In this case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered.

GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / PHA CT Ratio

[CURRENT SENSING]

>PHA CT Ratio: 1000

> GND CT Ratio: 1000

> SEF CT Ratio:1000.0

> PHA CT Pol’: FOR

GND CT Pol’: FOR

[1~2000:1]

Range 1 ~ 2000

Default 1000

Set phase CT ratio.

Step 1

GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / GND CT Ratio

[CURRENT SENSING]

> PHA CT Ratio: 1000

>GND CT Ratio: 1000



GND CT Pol’: FOR

[1~2000:1]

Range 1 ~ 2000

Default 1000

Set ground CT ratio.

Step 1

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / SEF CT Ratio

Range 0(OFF), 0.1 ~ 1000.0

[CURRENT SENSING]

PHA CT Ratio: 1000

GND CT Ratio: 1000

>SEF CT Ratio:1000.0


GND CT Pol’ FOR

[0(OFF),0.1~1000.0]

Default 1000.0

Set sensitive earth CT ratio.

Step 0.1



GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / PHA CT Polarity

[CURRENT SENSING]




>PHA CT Pol’: FOR

> GND CT Pol’: FOR

[FOR/REV]

Range Forward, Reverse

Default Forward

Set phase CT pole direction.

Step ~

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / GND CT Polarity

[CURRENT SENSING]





>GND CT Pol’: FOR

[FOR/REV]


Default Forward

Set Ground CT pole direction.

Step ~

GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / SEF CT Polarity


[CURRENT SENSING]




> GND CT Pol’: FOR

>SEF CT Pol’: FOR

[FOR/REV]

Default Forward

Set sensitive earth CT pole direction.

Step ~

7.1.1.3. Voltage Sensing

Place a curser in “VOLTAGE SENSING” and press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu.

ETMFC610 has two voltage connectors. Voltage connectors are receiving Source side and Load side line voltages. With Line VTs installed, ETMFC610 can be used to perform voltage measurements, power calculations, and directional control of over-current elements and so on.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V Connect Type

Range NONE, WYE, DELTA

[VOLTAGE SENSING]

>1V CON-Type: WYE

1V Rated(P-P):22.86

1V Ratio: 3300.0

2V CON-Type: WYE

2V Rated(P-P):22.86

[NONE/WYE/DELTA]

Default

Connector (1V).



WYE

NONE :

Step

VT none installed. Select NON

~

Select the voltage type of system that input to Source Voltage

 WYE : If Voltage Connect Type is Y-Type, Select WYE.

 DELTA : If Voltage Connect Type is Δ-Type, Select DELTA.



GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V Rated(P-P)

[VOLTAGE SENSING]

> 1V CON-Type: WYE

>1V Rated(P-P):22.86

1V Ratio: 3300.0

2V CON-Type: WYE

2V Rated(P-P):22.86

[3.00~38.00:0.01kV]

Range 3.00~38.00kV

Default 22.86 Step 0.01kV

Enter the primary rated voltage (kV) of potential transformer for

Source Voltage Connector (1V).

This setting refers to primary rated voltage in the line voltage (phaseto-phase).

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V Ratio

Range 10.0~6500.0

[VOLTAGE SENSING]

> 1V CON-Type: WYE

> 1V Rated(P-P):22.86

>1V Ratio: 3300.0

2V CON-Type: WYE

2V Rated(P-P):22.86

[10.0~6500.0:0.01]

Default 3300.0

Connector (1V).

Step 0.01

Enter the rated rate of potential transformer for Source Voltage

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Connect Type

[VOLTAGE SENSING]

> 1V CON-Type: WYE

> 1V Rated(P-P):22.86

> 1V Ratio: 3300.0

>2V CON-Type: WYE

> 2V Rated(P-P):22.86

[NONE/WYE/DELTA]

Range NONE, WYE, DELTA

Default WYE Step ~

Select the voltage type of system that input to Load Voltage Connector

(2V).

 NONE : VT none installed. Select NON

 WYE : If Voltage Connect Type is Y-Type, Select WYE.

 DELTA : If Voltage Connect Type is Δ-Type, Select DELTA.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Rated(P-P)

Range 3.00~38.00kV

[VOLTAGE SENSING]

> 1V CON-Type: WYE

> 1V Rated(P-P):22.86

> 1V Ratio: 3300.0

> 2V CON-Type: WYE

>2V Rated(P-P):22.86

[10.0~6500.0:0.01]

Default 22.86

Enter the primary rated voltage (kV) of potential transformer for Load

Voltage Connector (2V).

Step 0.01kV

This setting refers to primary rated voltage in the line voltage (phaseto-phase).



GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Ratio

[VOLTAGE SENSING]

> 1V Rated(P-P):22.86

> 1V Ratio: 3300.0

> 2V CON-Type: WYE

> 2V Rated(P-P):22.86

>2V Ratio: 3300.0

[10.0~6500.0:0.01]

Range 10.0~6500.0

Default 3300.0

Enter the rated rate of potential transformer for Load Voltage Connector

(2V).

Step 0.01

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Installation Type

[VOLTAGE SENSING]

> 2V CON-Type: WYE

> 2V Rated(P-P):22.86

> 2V Ratio: 3300.0

>2V Instal Type: 3P

Source Side: 1V

[3P/1P-R/1P-S/1P-T]

Range 3P, 1P-R, 1P-S, 1P-T

Default 3P Step ~

Insert the type of load side sensing voltage for the switch (or CB) body unit.

3P : The voltage sensor is installed in each of the three phases

1P-R : The voltage sensor is installed only in the R phase of the switch

(or CB) body unit.

1P-S : The voltage sensor is installed only in the S phase of the switch

(or CB) body unit.

1P-T : The voltage sensor is installed only in the T phase of the switch

(or CB) body unit.

NOTE : When the voltage sensor to the load side is installed to only one phase or none of the phase, following functions performed by the voltage measurement are operated incorrectly if this setting is changed.

 Phase Difference

 Interrupt, Sag and Swell Detection – PQM

 Voltage Unbalance Detection – PQM

 Under and Over Voltage Detection – PQM

 Loop Control

 Directional Control

 Under and Over Voltage Protection

 Live Line Detection

 Phase Open/Loss Detection

 Open Phase

 Live Load Blocking



GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / Source Side

[VOLTAGE SENSING]

> 2V CON-Type: WYE

> 2V Rated(P-P):22.86

> 2V Ratio: 3300.0

> 2V Instal Type: 3P

>Source Side: 1V

[1V/2V]

Range 1V, 2V

Default 1V Step ~

Select the Source side of System.

1V : It is selected when Source Voltage Connector (1V) is connected with the Source side of System..

2V : It is selected when Load Voltage Connector (2V) is connected with the opposite Source side of System.

According to the selected value, the indication of “MAIN MENU/

METERING/ VOLTAGE” change. In the VOLTAGE screen, ABC indicates the Source Side, and RST indicates the Load Side.

7.1.2. Event Recorder

Place the curser on “EVENT RECORDER” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Waveform, Event Recorder and its related elements are set in this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / Wave Recorder

Range ON, OFF

[EVENT RECORDER]

>Wave Recorder: ON

> Wave S/R: 64

Wave Pre-Cycle: 5

Wave P/S: P(1ST)

L&E Record: ON

[OFF/ON]

Default ON Step

Set whether to use wave recorder function.

~

When this setting is OFF, fault cycle will not register any information.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / Wave S/R

[EVENT RECORDER]

> Wave Recorder: OFF

>Wave S/R: 64

Wave Pre-Cycle: 5

Wave P/S: P(1ST)

L&E Record: ON

[16/32/64]

Range 16, 32, 64sample

Default 64 sample Step

Select a number of sampling for wave capture.

~

Number of cycle varies on the number of sampling selection. For example, Captured wave cycle is 60 cycles if 64 sampling is applied.



GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / Wave Pre-Cycle

[EVENT RECORDER]


> Wave S/R: 64

>Wave Pre-Cycle: 5

Wave P/S: P(1ST)

L&E Record: ON

[1~20:1cycle]

Range 1 ~ 20 cycle

Default 5 Step 1 cycle

Pre-cycle is to record (capture) a number of wave cycle before trigger occurring. Pre-cycle changes depending on sampling ratio. For instance, if pre-cycle is set for 5 cycle, when sampling number is 64, 5 cycle is applied, the sampling number is 32, pre-cycle is 10, 16 case, 20 pre-cycle is applied.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / Wave P/S

Range P(1ST), S(2ND)

[EVENT RECORDER]


> Wave S/R: 64

> Wave Pre-Cycle: 5

>Wave P/S: P(1ST)

L&E Record: ON

[P(1ST)/S(2ND)]

Default P(1ST) Step ~

Select if analog data value is primary data or secondary data recorded on Wave cycle. Record the current and voltage data applied to setting value ETMFC610 on secondary side (the CT ratio and VT ratio divided by the primary side data).

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / L&E Record

Range OFF, ON

[EVENT RECORDER]

>L&E Record: OFF

L&E Interval: 15

COMTRADE Record:OFF

COMTRADE Rev.: 1999

> COMTRADE P/S:P(1ST)

[OFF/ON]

Default OFF Step ~

Set whether Load&Energy event is recorded or not.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / L&E Interval

Range 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60

[EVENT RECORDER]

> L&E Record: OFF

>L&E Interval: 15

COMTRADE Record:OFF

COMTRADE Rev.: 1999


[5/10/15/20/30/60]

Default 15 Step ~

Set the interval to record Load&Energy events.



GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / COMTRADE Record

[EVENT RECORDER]

> L&E Record: OFF

> L&E Interval: 15

>COMTRADE Record:OFF

COMTRADE Rev.: 1999


[OFF/ON]

Range OFF, ON

Default OFF Step ~

In case of occurring a fault, set COMTRADE (Common Format for

Transient Data Exchange) format file in EVRC2A-NT.

The COMTRADE file recorded in EVRC2A-NT can be downloaded by the file transfer protocol function. For details, refer to “16.2.

COMTRADE” .

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / COMTRADE Rev.

Range 1999, 2013

[EVENT RECORDER]

> L&E Record: OFF

> L&E Interval: 15

> COMTRADE Record:OFF

>COMTRADE Rev.: 1999


[1999/2013]

Default 1999

Select version of COMTRADE file.

Step ~

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / COMTRADE P/S

[EVENT RECORDER]

> L&E Interval: 15


> COMTRADE Rev.: 1999

>COMTRADE P/S:P(1ST)

> COMTRADE Rate: 1

[P(1ST)/S(2ND)]

Range P(1ST), S(2ND)

Default P(1ST)

Select whether the analog data value recorded in the COMTRADE file is primary or secondary data.

Step ~

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / COMTRADE Rate

Range 1 ~ 10

[EVENT RECORDER]

> L&E Interval: 15


> COMTRADE Rev.: 1999


>COMTRADE Rate: 1

[1~10:1]

Default 1 Step 1

Sets the rate of the analog data value recorded to the COMTRADE file.

Record the value divided by the analog data into the COMTRADE file.



7.1.3. Monitoring


Place the curser on “MONITERING” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

[MONITERING]

>1.LIVE LINE

2.OPERATION COUNT

3.CONTACT WEAR

4.BATT LOAD TEST

5.BATT MANAGEMENT

6.POWER QUALITY

7.TD MONITOR

8.SYSTEM POWER

7.1.3.1. Live Line

Place the curser on “LIVE LINE” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

ETMFC610 has line detect element. If one phase voltage among three phase maintains over live detect level during a constant time, live line is detected. Live line detection setting item is same as below.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / LIVE LINE / Live Line Lv

Range 0.10 ~ 1.40 xVT

[LIVE LINE]

>Live Line Lv: 0.30

Live Line Tm: 4.00

[0.10~1.40:0.01xVT]

Default 0.30 Step 0.01 xVT

Set the live line level and this is set in multiple of previous rating.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / LIVE LINE / Live Line Lv

[LIVE LINE]

> Live Line Lv: 0.30

>Live Line Tm: 4.00

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Range 0.00~600.00 sec

Default 4.00 Step

Set the delay time of live detect element.

0.01 sec



7.1.3.2. Operation Count


Place the curser on “OPERATION COUN” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Switch (or CB) operation counter and monitoring elements are set in this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Function

[OPERATION COUNT]

>Function: DISABLE

Alarm Count: 10000

Reset Count: 0

[DISABLE, ENABLE]

Range DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE Step ~

Select whether to use switch operation count monitoring.

If function is activated and operation counter is over “Alarm Count”,

Logic bit DIGOPRC(Diagnostic Operation Count) is set. Logic bit can be used for Output or Alarm through Interface software.

Figure 7-2. DIGOPRC Diagram

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Alarm Count

Range 1 ~ 20000

[OPERATION COUNT]

> Function: DISABLE

>Alarm Count: 10000

Reset Count: 0

[1~20000:1]

Default this set.

10000 Step 1

Set a number to alarm when Switch (or CB) operation number meets



GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Reset Count

[OPERATION COUNT]

> Function: DISABLE

> Alarm Count: 10000

>Reset Count: 0

[0~10000:1]

Range 0 ~ 10000

Default 0 Step 1

It is to set the same operation number of switch. Set value is available after operation count is reset. Count reset refers to “MAIN MENU/

MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET/ OPERATION COUNT or COUNT

ALL” menu.

NOTE :

1.

When entering “MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET” menu to reset operation count, password 3 authentication is required

2.

The current operation count can be checked in the “MENU/

MAINENANCE/ COUNT/ ETMFC610” menu.

7.1.3.3. Contact Wear

Place the curser on “CONTACT WEAR” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Switch contact wear and monitoring elements are set in this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Function


[CONTACT WEAR]

>Function: DISABLE

Alarm Pickup: 20.0

Time Delay: 0.01

Interrupt I1: 1.00

Interrpt Ct1: 10000

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Select whether to use switch (or CB) contact wear monitoring.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Pickup (%)

[CONTACT WEAR]

> Function: DISABLE

>Alarm Pickup: 20.0

Time Delay: 0.01

Interrupt I1: 1.00

Interrpt Ct1: 10000

[0.0~50.0:0.1%]

Range 0.0 ~ 50.0 %

Default 20.0

Set a pickup value to alarm when switch (or CB) contact wear reaches set value.

Step 0.1 %



GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Time Delay

[CONTACT WEAR]

> Function: DISABLE

> Alarm Pickup: 20.0

>Time Delay: 0.01

Interrupt I1: 1.00

Interrpt Ct1: 10000

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Range 0.00 ~ 1.00 sec

Default 1.0 Step 0.1 sec

Set time delay when switch (or CB) contact wear reaches set value.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrupt I1

[CONTACT WEAR]

> Function: DISABLE


> Time Delay: 0.01

>Interrupt I1: 1.00

Interrpt Ct1: 10000

[1.00~600.00:0.01kA]

Range 1.00~600.00 kA

Default 1 Step 0.01 kA

To set operation number of the curve for interruption current to operation number at the point 1(maximum operation number).

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrpt Ct1

Range 1~60000

[CONTACT WEAR]

> Function: DISABLE


> Time Delay: 0.01

> Interrupt I1: 1.00

>Interrpt Ct1: 10000

[1~60000:1]

Default 10000 Step 0.01kA

To set interruption current of the curve for interruption current to operation number at the point 2(maximum operation number).

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrupt I2

Range 1.00~600.00 kA

[CONTACT WEAR]

>Interrupt I2: 20.0

> Interrpt Ct2: 16

> A Wear Set: 100.00

> B Wear Set: 100.00

> C Wear Set: 100.00

[1.00~600.00:0.01kA]

Default 20.00 Step 0.01kA

To set operation number of the curve for interruption current to operation number at the point 2(minimum operation number).

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrpt Ct 2

[CONTACT WEAR]


>Interrpt Ct2: 16

A Wear Set: 100.00

B Wear Set: 100.00

C Wear Set: 100.00

[1~20000:1]

Range 1~60000

Default 16 Step 1

To set operation number of the curve for interruption current to operation number at the point 2(minimum operation number).



GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / A Wear Set

[CONTACT WEAR]


> Interrpt Ct2: 16

>A Wear Set: 100.00


> C Wear Set: 100.00

[0.00~100.00:0.01%]

Range 0.00 ~ 100.00 %

Default 100.00 Step 0.01%

It is to set switch (or CB) phase A contact wear value in ETMFC610.

Set value is available after Contact Wear Reset. Contact wear reset refers to “MAIN MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET/ CONTACT

WEAR or COUNT ALL” menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / B Wear Set

Range 0.00 ~ 100.00 %

[CONTACT WEAR]


> Interrpt Ct2: 16


>B Wear Set: 100.00

C Wear Set: 100.00

[0.00~100.00:0.01%]

Default

It is to set switch (or CB) phase B contact wear value in ETMFC610.

Set value is available after Contact Wear Reset. Contact wear reset refers to

100.00 Step 0.01%

“MAIN MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET/

CONTACT WEAR or COUNT ALL” menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / C Wear Set

Range 0.00 ~ 100.00 %

[CONTACT WEAR]


> Interrpt Ct2: 16



>C Wear Set: 100.00

[0.00~100.00:0.01%]

Default 100.00 Step 0.01%

It is to set switch (or CB) phase C contact wear value in ETMFC610.

Set value is available after Contact Wear Reset. Contact wear reset refers to “MAIN MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET/

CONTACT WEAR or COUNT ALL” menu.

NOTE :

1.

Password 3 authentication is required when entering “MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA

RESET” menu to reset “Phase A Contact Wear”, “Phase B Contact Wear” and “Phase C

Contact Wear”.

2.

Current contact wear of each phase can be checked in “MENU/ MAINENANCE/

CONTACT WEAR” menu.



7.1.3.4. Auto Battery Load Test


Place the curser on “BATT LOAD TEST” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT LOAD TEST / Period

[BATT LOAD TEST]

>Period: 24

[0(OFF),1~720:1hr]

Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 720 hour

Default 24 Step 1 hour

Set a time period for automatic battery load test.

7.1.3.5. Battery Management

Place the curser on “BATT MANAGEMENT” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

The ETMFC610 has a battery management function that calculates and manages the battery capacity using the charge time and discharge time of the set battery. However, for correct battery capacity calculation, charge time and discharge time should be set for the installed battery.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Function

[BATT MANAGEMENT]

>Function: DISABLE

Charge Time: 780

Discharge Time:1440

Alarm Level: 50.00

Capacity Rst:100.00

[0(OFF),1~720:1hr]


Default DISABLE Step

Set whether to monitor battery capacity.

~

If set to ENABLE, if the battery capacity is less than the "Alarm Level" setting value, "BATBAD (Battery Bad)" event occurs.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Charge Time

[BATT MANAGEMENT]

> Function: DISABLE

>Charge Time: 780

Discharge Time:1440

Alarm Level: 50.00

Capacity Rst:100.00

[60~6000:1 m]

Range 60 ~ 6000 min.

Default 780

Sets the time at which the fully discharged battery (0%) will be fully charged.

Step 1 min.



GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Discharge Time

[BATT MANAGEMENT]

> Function: DISABLE

> Charge Time: 780

>Discharge Time:1440

Alarm Level: 50.00

Capacity Rst:100.00

[60~6000:1 m]

Range 60 ~ 6000 min.

Default 1440 Step 1 min.

Sets the time when the fully charged battery (100%) is fully discharged.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Alarm Level

[BATT MANAGEMENT]

> Function: DISABLE

> Charge Time: 780

Discharge Time:1440

>Alarm Level: 50.00

Capacity Rst:100.00

[0.00~100.00:0.01%]

Range 0.00 ~ 100.00 %

Default 50 Step 0.01 %

Set the battery monitoring level.

If battery capacity is less than this set value, "BATBAD (Battery Bad)" event occurs.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Alarm Level

[BATT MANAGEMENT]

> Function: DISABLE

> Charge Time: 780

Discharge Time:1440

> Alarm Level: 50.00

>Capacity Rst:100.00

[0.00~100.00:0.01%]

Range 0.00 ~ 100.00 %

Default 100

Set the battery capacity reset value.

Step 0.01 %

After this setting, it can reset battery capacity using “MAIN MENU /

MAINENANCE / DATA RESET / BATT. CAPACITY or COUNT

ALL” .

When the battery is replaced, it should be reset to the capacity for the replaced battery according to the above procedure.

NOTE :

1.

Password 3 authentication is required when entering “MENU

/ MAINENANCE / DATA RESET” menu to reset the battery capacity.

2.

Current battery capacity can be checked in “MENU /

METERING / CONTROLLERL REF” menu.



7.1.3.6. Power Quality Monitoring


Place the curser on “PQM” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

Power Quality Monitoring elements are set in this menu and sub-menu is as below.

[PQM]

>1.PQM FUNCTION

2.INTERRUPT

3.SAG

4.SWELL

5.HARMONICS

6.CURR UNBALANCE

7.VOLT UNBALANCE

8.UNDER VOLTAGE

9.OVER VOLTAGE

10.UNDER FREQUENCY

11.OVER FREQUENCY

12.ITHD/UBI I LIMIT

The ETMFC610 provides voltage and current measurement signals at a rate of 64 samples / cycle p er cycle, providing instantaneous voltage drop (Sag), instantaneous voltage swell, interrupt, under v oltage, overvoltage, And power quality monitoring functions such as voltage / current imbalance.

The power quality for power grid is classified into several categories according to the voltage magnitude and duration according to the international standard IEEE 1159 "Recommended Practice on Monitoring Electric Power Quality". The power quality categories are listed in “Figure 7-3.

Power Quality Category according to IEEE 1159 (Interrupt, Sag, Swell)” and “Table 7-3. Power

Quality Category according to IEEE 1159 (Interrupt, Sag, Swell)”.

When the power quality monitoring element occurs, record the PQM event, PQM waveform and

PQM counter. In addition, when the related communication point is used, the occurrence event can be transmitted to the master station through the remote communication.

Transient Long duration

Instant

Short duration

Moment

Swell

Temporary

Over voltage

1.1 pu

1.0 pu Normal Range

0.9 pu

Sag Under voltage

0.1 pu

Interruption

0.5cycle

30cycle 3sec

1min

Figure 7-3. Power Quality categories according to IEEE 1159 (Interrupt, Sag, Swell)



Table 7-2. Power Quality categories according to IEEE 1159 (Interrupt, Sag, Swell)

Category

Short-term fluctuation

Time Voltage Value

Instantaneous

Momentary

Sag

Swell

Interruption

Sag

0.5 ~ 30 Cycle

0.5 ~ 30 Cycle

0.5 Cycle ~ 3 sec

30 Cycle ~ 3 sec

0.1~0.9 xVT of rating


Rated below 0.1 xVT

Rated below 0.1~0.9 xVT

Temporary

Swell

Interruption

Sag

Swell

Long-term fluctuation

30 Cycle ~ 3 sec

3 sec ~ 1 min

3 sec ~ 1 min

3 sec ~ 1 min

Rated below 1.1~1.8 xVT

Rated below 0.1 xVT



Sustained Interruption 1 min above Rated below 0.1 xVT

1) PQM Function

Place the curser on “PQM FUNCTION” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / PQM FUNCTION / Function


[PQM FUNCTION]

>Function: DISABLE

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

Default DISABLE

Select whether to use PQM function.

Step ~

If the function is disabled, all PQM monitor function is disabled.

2) Interrupt

Place the curser on “INTERRUPT” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / INTERRUPT / Level

[INTERRUPT]

>Level: OFF

> Time: 2.0

0(OFF),0.10~0.49xVT

Range 0(OFF), 0.10~ 0.49 xVT

Default OFF Step 0.01 xVT

It is to set Interrupt detect level for Power Quality.



GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / INTERRUPT / Time

Range 0.5 ~ 10.0 cycle

Default 2.0 Step 0.5 cycle

[INTERRUPT]

> Level: OFF

>Time: 2.0

[0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]

3) Sag

Set a interrupt detecting time.

Place the curser on “ SAG” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / SAG / Level

Range 0(OFF), 0.50~ 0.99 xVT

[SAG]

>Level: OFF

> Time: 2.0

0(OFF),0.50~0.99xVT

Default OFF Step 0.01 xVT

Set a voltage sag (low voltage) for Power Quality.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / SAG / Time

[SAG]

> Level: OFF

>Time: 2.0

[0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]

4) Swell



Set a detect time for voltage sag (voltage low).

Place the curser on “SWELL” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / SWELL / Level

Range 0(OFF), 1.01~ 1.50 xVT

[SWELL]

>Level: OFF

> Time: 2.0

0(OFF),1.01~1.50xVT

Default 0 Step 0.01 xVT

Set a detect level of Voltage swell(high voltage) for Power Quality.



GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / SWELL / Time



[SWELL]

> Level: OFF

>Time: 2.0

[0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]

5) Harmonics

Set a time to detect voltage swell.

Place the curser on “HARMONIC” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / VTHD Pickup

Range 0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %

[HARMONICS]

>VTHD Pickup: OFF

> VTHD Delay: 1.00

> ITHD Pickup: OFF

> ITHD Delay: 1.00

[0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]

Default OFF Step 0.1%

Set a detect level of voltage total harmonic distortion.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / VTHD Delay

[HARMONICS]

> VTHD Pickup: OFF

>VTHD Delay: 1.00

> ITHD Pickup: OFF

> ITHD Delay: 1.00

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec


Set a detect time to detect voltage total harmonic distortion.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / ITHD Pickup

[HARMONICS]

> VTHD Pickup: OFF

> VTHD Delay: 1.00

>ITHD Pickup: OFF

> ITHD Delay: 1.00

[0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]

Range 0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %

Default OFF Step 0.1%

Set a detect level of current total harmonic distortion.



GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / ITHD Delay

[HARMONICS]

> VTHD Pickup: OFF

> VTHD Delay: 1.00

> ITHD Pickup: OFF

>ITHD Delay: 1.00

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

6) Current Unbalance

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec


Set a detect time to detect current total harmonic distortion.

Place the curser on “CURR UNBALANCE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / CURR UNBALANCE / Pickup

Range 0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %

[CURR UNBALANCE]

>Pickup: 30.0

> Time Delay: 4.00

[0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]

Default 30.0 Step 0.1 %

Set a detect level of Current Unbalance for Power Quality.

Unbalance current is calculated by following formula.

UI rate



I

2

I

1



100

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / CURR UNBALANCE / Time delay

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

[CURR UNBALANCE]

> Pickup: 30.0

>Time Delay: 4.00

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Default 4.00 Step

Set the time delay of current unbalance.

0.01 sec



7) Voltage Unbalance http://www.entecene.co.kr

Place the curser on “VOLTAGE UNBALANCE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / VOLT UNBALANCE / Pickup

Range 0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %

[VOLT UNBALANCE]

>Pickup: 30.0

> Time Delay: 4.00

[0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]

Default 30 Step 0.1 %

Set a detect level of Voltage Unbalance for Power Quality.

Unbalance voltage is calculated by following formula.

UV rate



V

2

V

1



100

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / VOLT UNBALANCE / Time delay

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

[VOLT UNBALANCE]

> Pickup: 30.0

>Time Delay: 4.00

[0.00~600.0:0.01s]

8) Under Voltage

Default 4.00 Step

Set the time delay of voltage unbalance.

0.01 sec

Place the curser on “UNDER VOLTAGE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE / Pickup

[UNDER VOLTAGE]

>Pickup: 0.80

> Time Delay: 4.00

0(OFF),0.10~1.40xVT

Range 0(OFF), 0.10~ 1.40 xVT


Set pickup voltage level to detect for under voltage element of power quality.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE / Time

Range 0.00 ~600.00 sec

[UNDER VOLTAGE]

> Pickup: 0.00

>Time Delay: 4.00

[0.0~600.0:0.1s]


Set detecting time for under voltage element of power quality.



9) Over Voltage http://www.entecene.co.kr

Place the curser on “OVER VOLTAGE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE / Pickup

Range 0(OFF), 0.10~ 1.40 xVT

[OVER VOLTAGE]

>Pickup: 1.20

> Time Delay: 4.00

0(OFF),0.10~1.40xVT

Default

Set pickup voltage level to detect for over voltage element of power quality.

1.20 Step 0.01 xVT

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE / Time

Range 0.00 ~600.00 sec

[OVER VOLTAGE]

> Pickup: 1.20

>Time Delay: 4.00

[0.0~600.0:0.1s]


Set detecting time for over voltage element of power quality.

10) Under Frequency

Place the curser on “UNDER FRQUENCY” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER FREQUENCY / Pickup

Range 0(OFF), 45.00 ~ 65.00 Hz

[UNDER FREQUENCY]

>Pickup: 1.20

Time Delay: 4.00

0(OFF),45.00~65.00Hz

Default 59.50 Step 0.01 Hz

Set an under frequency detect level for power quality.


GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER FREQUENCY / Time Delay

[UNDER FREQUENCY]

Pickup: 1.20

>Time Delay: 4.00

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec




Set an under frequency detecting time. http://www.entecene.co.kr

11) Over Frequency

Place the curser on “OVER FRQUENCY” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / OVER FREQUENCY / Level

Range 0(OFF), 45.00 ~ 65.00 Hz

[OVER FREQUENCY]

>Pickup: 60.50

Time Delay: 4.00

0(OFF),45.00~65.00Hz

Default 60.50

Set an under frequency detect level for power quality.

NOTE :

Step 0.01 Hz

The default value of this setting can vary according to the option type.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / OVER FREQUENCY / Time Delay

[UNDER FREQUENCY]

Pickup: 60.50

>Time Delay: 4.00

[0.03~10.00:0.01s]

Range

Default

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

4.00

12) Current Unbalance/THD Detect Limit

Step

Set an under frequency detecting time.

0.01 sec

Place the cursor on “ITHD/UBI I LIMIT” menu, press [ENT] key and move to this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / ITHD/UBI I LIMIT / Limit Current

[ITHD/UBI I LIMIT]

>Limit Current: 60

[0~630:1A]

Range 0 ~ 630 A

Default 60 Step 1A

Set the minimum current value to detect the current unbalance element and current harmonic distortion element.

If load current is smaller this level, then current unbalance and current

THD status point does not operated.



7.1.3.7. System Power


Place the curser on “SYSTEM POWER” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. System power monitoring elements are set in this menu. If there is a problem with system power, it does not perform the correct measurement and functions.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / Function

[SYSTEM POWER]

>Function: ON

+12V Pickup: 1.0

Time Delay: 1.00

-12V Pickup: 1.0

Time Delay: 1.00

Ref. V Pickup: OFF

Time Delay: 1.00

[OFF/ON]

Range OFF, ON

Default ON Step ~

Select whether to use System Power monitoring.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / +12V Pickup

[SYSTEM POWER]

Function: ON

>+12V Pickup: 1.0

Time Delay: 1.00

-12V Pickup: 1.0

Time Delay: 1.00

Ref. V Pickup: OFF

Time Delay: 1.00

[0(OFF),0.1~10.0V]

Range 0(OFF), 0.1 ~ 10.0 V

Default 1.0 V

Set a pickup value for +12V system power alarm.

If the error of the system power measurement value deviates more than this setting, an alarm is generated.

Step 0.1 V

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / Time Delay

Range 0.01 ~ 10.00 sec

[SYSTEM POWER]

Function: ON

+12V Pickup: 1.0

>Time Delay: 1.00

-12V Pickup: 1.0

Time Delay: 1.00

Ref. V Pickup: OFF

Time Delay: 1.00

[ 0.01~10.00:0.01 s]

Default 1.00 Step

Set delay time of +12V system power alarm.

0.01 sec

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / -12V Pickup

Range 0(OFF), 0.1 ~ 10.0 V

[SYSTEM POWER]

Function: ON

+12V Pickup: 1.0

Time Delay: 1.00

>-12V Pickup: 1.0

Time Delay: 1.00

Ref. V Pickup: OFF

Time Delay: 1.00

[0(OFF),0.1~10.0V]

Default 1.0 V this setting, an alarm is generated.

Step 0.1 V

Set a pickup value for -12V system power alarm.

If the error of the system power measurement value deviates more than




Range 0.01 ~ 10.00 sec


[SYSTEM POWER]

Function: ON

+12V Pickup: 1.0

Time Delay: 1.00

-12V Pickup: 1.0

>Time Delay: 1.00

Ref. V Pickup: OFF

Time Delay: 1.00

[0.01~10.00:0.01 s]

Set delay time of -12V system power alarm.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / Ref. V Pickup

[SYSTEM POWER]

Function: ON

+12V Pickup: 1.0

Time Delay: 1.00

>Ref. V Pickup: OFF

Time Delay: 1.00

-12V Pickup: 1.0

Time Delay: 1.00

[0(OFF),0.1~10.0V]

Range 0(OFF), 0.1 ~ 10.0 V

Default OFF Step

Set a pickup value for reference voltage alarm.

If the error of the reference voltage measurement value deviates more than this setting, an alarm is generated.

0.01 V


Range 0.01 ~ 10.00 sec

[SYSTEM POWER]

Function: ON

+12V Pickup: 1.0

Time Delay: 1.00

Ref. V Pickup: OFF

>Time Delay: 1.00

-12V Pickup: 1.0

Time Delay: 1.00

[0.01~10.00:0.01 s]

Default 1.00 Step

Set delay time of reference voltage alarm.

0.01 sec



7.1.4. Loop Control


The ETMFC610 supports the LOOP CONTROL function when the controller type is set to “Fault

Indication Type(FITYPE)”.

The purpose of using Loop Control is to keep the normal operation by isolating Fault Area as to cooperate with Recloser or C/B when a fault has occurred.

 Auto Sectionalizer(AS)

 AS trips due to Fault current and Line Voltage.

 When a fault has occurred in the load side of AS, C/B trips and High Voltage line becomes

Dead line Voltage(DV). Due to the number of Count, AS trips(is opened).

NOTE : The FI Type setting must be "IV" for correct Auto Sectionalizer operation (The

FI Type setting is located in the "Group Setting / Fault Indication / FI Type" menu.).

 Tie point Switch(TS)

 TS is located at Open point and is used for bi-directional(reversed line direction) operation.

 TS is operated due to Line Voltage.

 Either Source side or Load side of TS, becomes Dead line Voltage(DV), TS operates(is closed) depending upon the number of count.

 When the source side and Load side become Dead line Voltage(DV), TS is automatically opened.

 TS must be cooperated with ENTEC Sectionalizing Recloser.

 To prevent further fault, TS shall be operated after ENTEC Sectionalizing Recloser trips and disconnects a fault area.

 ETNEC Sectionalizing Recloser is automatically opened when Source side and Load side become Dead line Voltage(DV) and it has the automatic closing function called Looping control function When High Voltage line becomes Live line Voltage(LV).

Please refer to “7.1.4.3. Loop Control Application” for more detail information of loop control function.



LCD Initial Screen http://www.entecene.co.kr

Press [ENT] button to check operation status on the Initial Screen to see loop control mode.

Table 7-3. Initial Screen for Loop Control

INITIAL SCREEN

LOOP CONTROL <SEC>

OPERATE ST [ RESET]

52A CONTACT[ CLOSE]


LOAD VOLT[ LIVE-L]

O-COUNT SET[ 4]

O-COUNT NO.[ 0]

LOOP CONTROL < ⓐ >

OPERATE ST [ RESET]

52A CONTACT[ CLOSE]


LOAD VOLT[ LIVE-L]

O-COUNT SET[ 4]

O-COUNT NO.[ 0] ⓐ Loop Control function are as below.

 OFF : Loop Control function does not operate.

 SEC : It operates as Auto Sectionalizer.

 TIE : It operates as Tiepoint Switch.

OPERATE ST: Displays the present operating status.

 RESET : Reset status

 RUNNING : Operation counter is increasing.

 LOCKOUT : When at “SEC”, it displays. When operation coutner is up to maximum setting, recloesr will be at open operating.

 CLOSING : When at “TIE”, it is standby status for close operation order.

 OPENING : When at “TIE”, it is standby status for opening operation order

52 CONTACT: It displays the status of Switch main contact




SOURCE VOLT: Displays the status of of source side voltage(LIVE or

DEAD LINE)

LOAD VOLT: Displays the status of load side voltage(LIVE or DEAD LINE)

O-COUNT SET : Displays the set operate count

O-COUNT NO. : Displays the present operate count



LOOP CONTROL Button http://www.entecene.co.kr

Use LOOP CONTROL button to use Loop control on User interface Panel.

Figure 7-4. Loop Control Button

LOOP CONTROL ENABLED

When “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED is ON, loop control function is enabled.

7.1.4.1. Setting

Place the curser on “LOOP CONTROL” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Function

[LOOP CONTROL]

>Function: DISABLE

Type Select : NONE

> SEC Operate Cnt: 1

SEC Oper’ TD: 0.00

SEC Reset TD: 10.00

[DISABLE/ENABLE]



Set whether to use loop control function.

~

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Type Select

[LOOP CONTROL]

> Function: DISABLE

>Type Select : OFF

> SEC Operate Cnt: 1


SEC Reset TD: 10.00

[OFF/SEC/TIE]

Range OFF, SEC, TIE

Default OFF Step ~

Set whether to use switch type and loop control function.

After setting this, press [LOOP CONTROL ENABLED] button (lamp

ON) to operate this function.

 OFF : Loop control is not in use.

 SEC : Select for Auto Sectionalizer.

The FI Type setting must be "IV" for correct Auto Sectionalizer operation (The FI Type setting is located in the "Group Setting /

Fault Indication / FI Type" menu.).

 TIE : Select for Tie point Switch.



GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / SEC Operate Cnt

[LOOP CONTROL]

> Type Select: OFF

>SEC Operate Cnt: 1


SEC Reset TD: 10.00

TIE Operate Cnt: 2

[1~5:1]

Range 1 ~ 5 shot

Default 1 Step ~

Set the operation count of the Auto Sectionalizer.

 After sensing a fault current, Live line becomes Dead line

Voltage(DV), 1 is counted and sense another fault, the count accumulate as 2.

 When the count reaches a set value, “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer is operated.

 When the count is over the set value, “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer is reset and not operated.

 Counter is reset by “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer or by manual closing.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / SEC Oper’ TD

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

[AUTO SECTION]

> Type Select: OFF

SEC Operate Cnt: 1

>SEC Oper’ TD: 0.00

SEC Reset TD: 10.00

TIE VRS: VS

[0.00~600.00:0.01]

Default 0.00

Set the open operation time delay of the Auto Sectionalizer.

 The timer is operated by

Auto Sectionalizer is opened.

Step 0.01

“SEC Operate Cnt” , and after a set time,

 The timer is reset if Live Line becomes LV during counting Time, and it is also reset when the counter is over “SEC Operate Cnt” set value.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / SEC Reset TD

Range 1.00 ~ 600.00 sec

[AUTO SECTION]

> Type Select: OFF

SEC Operate Cnt: 1


>SEC Reset TD: 10.00

TIE VRS: VS

[1.00~600.00:0.01 s]

Default 10.00

Set the reset time delay of the Auto Sectionalizer.

 It is the Timer to reset a count value in “SEC Operate Cnt” .

 When Auto Sectionalizer is closed, if Source side or Load side becomes Live Voltage (LV), Timer reset “Sec Oper’ Cnt”.

Step 0.01



GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / TIE VRS

[AUTO SECTION]

>TIE VRS: VS

TIE Operate Cnt: 2

TIE Close TD: 30.00

TIE Open TD: 10.00

TIE Reset TD: 10.00

[VS/VL/VS&VL]

Range VS, VL, VS&VL

Default VS Step 1

Tie VRS (Tie Point Switch Voltage Response Side) : Setting menu for

Tie Point Switch.

“Tie Operate Cnt” is operated due to Dead line voltage in selected direction.

 VS : Switch’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage

 VL : Switch’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage

 VS&VL : Loop control operates one of either Source side or load side voltage becomes dead line voltage

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / TIE Operate Cnt

Range 1~5

[AUTO SECTION]

> TIE VRS: VS

>TIE Operate Cnt: 2

> TIE Close TD: 30.00

TIE Open TD: 10.00

TIE Reset TD: 10.00

[1~5:1]

Default 2 Step 1

Set the close operation count of Tie Point Switch.

 Source and Load side are Live Voltage status. When one of the sides becomes Dead line Voltage, it counts 1, and it repeats once again, it accumulates the count for 2.

 The counter reaches a set value, “TIE Close TD” Timer is operated.

 The counter is over the set value, “TIE Close TD” Timer is reset and not operated.

 The counter is reset by “TIE Reset TD” Timer or manual trip.

 Dead line Voltage can be determined after “TIE DL-VS TD” or

“TIE DL-VL TD” Timer is finished.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / TIE Close TD

Range 0.00~600.00

[AUTO SECTION]

>TIE Close TD: 30.00

TIE Open TD: 10.00

TIE Reset TD: 10.00

TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00

TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00

[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]

Default 30.00 Step 0.01

Set the close time delay of the Tie Point Switch.

 The timer is operated due to “TIE Operate Cnt” time, Tie Point Switch is closed.

, and after a set

 During the counting, if Source and Load side become Live line

Voltage or Dead line Voltage, the timer is reset. And when the counter is over a set value of “TIE Operate Cnt” , the timer is reset.

 DV is determined after “TIE DL-VS TD” or “TIE DL-VL TD”

Timer is finished.



GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / TIE Open TD

[AUTO SECTION]


>TIE Open TD: 10.00

TIE Reset TD: 10.00

TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00

TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00

[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]

Range 0.00~600.00

Default 10.00 Step

Set the open time delay of Tie Point Switch.

0.01

 The timer is operated when Source and Load sides become Dead line

Voltage, and after a set time, Tie Point Switch is opened.

 DV is determined after “TIE DL-VS TD” or “TIE DL-VL TD”

Timer is finished.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / TIE Reset TD

Range 1.00~600.00

[AUTO SECTION]


> TIE Open TD: 10.00

>TIE Reset TD: 10.00

TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00

TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00

[1.00~600.00:0.01 s]

Default 10.00 Step

Set the reset time delay of Tie Point Switch.





It is the timer to reset a count value in

0.01

“TIE Operate Cnt” .

Timer is operated when Source side and Load side are all Live line

Voltage with Tie Point Switch opened, and it reset “TIE Operate

Cnt” .

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / TIE DL-VS TD

[AUTO SECTION]



TIE Reset TD: 10.00

>TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00

TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00

[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]

Range 0.00~600.00


Set deadline detection delay time of source side voltage.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / TIE DL-VL TD

[AUTO SECTION]



TIE Reset TD: 10.00

TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00

>TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00

[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]

Range 0.00~600.00


Set deadline detection delay time of load side voltage.



7.1.4.2. Loop Control Algorithm


Figure 7-5. Auto Sectionalizer Algorithm



Figure 7-6. Tie Algorithm



7.1.4.3. Loop Control Application


1) Auto Sectionalizer Loop Control

Table 7-4. Auto Sectionalizer loop control

SETTING

SECTIONALIZER

Type Select

Sec Oper’ Cnt

Sec RS Delay

Sec op Delay

CB AND RECLOSER

Operate count

CB1

-

-

-

2 Trip

Lockout

RC1

-

-

-

-

4 Trip

Lockout

AS1

SEC

3

10.00

0.00

-

-

*.NOTE ) CB(Circuit breaker), RC(Recloser), AS(Auto Sectionalizer)

AS2

SEC

2

10.00

0.00

-

-

AS3

SEC

3

10.00

0.00

-

-

Figure 7-7. Auto Sectionalizer loop control

PRECAUTIN 1 for SETTING

1) AS is an automatic opening equipment when Dead Line Voltage. When “SEC Oper’ TD” time is provided, the opening time of AS shall be faster than RC1 or CB1 minimum 0.3 sec .

2) “SEC Oper’ TD” time of AS is better to set 0 second for Instantaneous Trip(Open).

3) Auto Sectionalizer Instantaneous Opening time : <80 ㎳

4) Entec Recloser reclose time : Minimum 0.5

sec

PRECAUTION 2 for SETTING

1) “SEC Operate Cnt” setting of AS1 shall be higher than AS2 when AS1 and AS2 are in series connection as Auto Sectionalizer.



Loop control with F1 Fault http://www.entecene.co.kr

Figure 7-8. Loop Control with F1 Fault

Step1 : At F1 location, when Permanent Fault occurs, RC1 conducts reclosing cycle.

AS1 counts “SEC Operate Cnt” when Dead line Voltage after sensing a Fault.

When RC1 trips three times, it reaches “SEC Operate Cnt” set value (3). Then F1 location is disconnected after “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer is finished.

AS2, AS3 is not operated because they did not sense the fault.

Step2 : AS1 is opened and RC1 is closed after Reclosing 3 times.

RC1 is closed after AS1 disconnect F1 location, and keep the rest of line normal.

Step3 : After removing the Fault, manually (local or remote) close AS1 and recover Live line.







When RC1 trips two times, it reaches “SEC Operate Cnt” set value (2).

Then F2 location is disconnected after “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer is finished.

AS1 is not operating because that “SEC Operate Cnt” is set for 3

AS3 is not operated because AS3 did not sense the fault.

Step2 : AS2 is opened and RC1 is closed after two times of reclosing.


Step3 : After removing the Fault, manually (local or remote) close AS2 and recover live line.







When RC1 trips three times, it reaches “SEC Operate Cnt” set value (3). Then F3 location is disconnected after “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer is finished.

AS1, AS2 are not operating because that they did not sense the fault.

Step2 : AS3 is opened and RC1 is closed after three times of reclosing.


Step3 : After removing the Fault, manually (local or remote) close AS3 and recover the live line.



2) Tie Point Switch Loop Control

Table 7-5. Tie Point Switch Loop Control

SETTING

SECTIONALIZER

Function

Sec Oper’ Cnt

Sec RS Delay

Sec op Delay

Tie VRS -

-

-

-

-

CB1,2

-

-

Tie Oper’ Cnt

Tie CL Delay

Tie OP Delay

Tie DV1 Dly

Tie DV1 Dly

CB AND RECLOSER

Recloser Operate count

-

-

-

2 Trip Lockout

-

-

-

-

-

SR1,2

-

-

-

-

-

4 Trip Lockout http://www.entecene.co.kr

AS1,2

SEC

3

10.00s

0.00s

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

TS1

TIE

-

-

-

SV1 & SV2

2

30.00s

5.00s

1.00

1.00

-

Figure 7-11. Tie Point Switch Loop Control

*.NOTE ) CB(Circuit breaker), RC(Recloser), AS(Auto Sectionalizer), TS(Tie Point Switch)



PRECAUTION for SETTING http://www.entecene.co.kr

1) TS1 must cooperate with ENTEC Sectionalizing Recloser.

2) TS1 shall be operated when F1 is occurred in the Source side of SR, and shall be set for not operating when F2, F3 occur in Load side.

3) To prevent further fault, TS1 shall be operated after ENTEC Sectionalizing Recloser trips and disconnects a fault area.

4) ENTEC Sectionalizing Recloser is automatically opened when Source and Load side become Dead line Voltage (DV), and automatically closed when Source side and Load side become Live line Voltage (LV).

5) The count number of SR1 and AS1 shall be larger than the count number of TS1.

6) “TIE Operate Cnt” of TS1 is set 2, AS1 shall be set 3, and SR1 shall be set 4 to cooperate with AS1.

7) TS shall not be closed when a fault occurs between SR1 and TS1. If “TIE Operate Cnt” of TS1 is set to 2, Close delay time shall be set to longer than 5 seconds which is 2 times of SR1 reclosing time.




Figure 7-12.

Loop Control with F1 Fault

Step1 : At F1 location, when Permanent Fault occurs, CB1 locked out after conducting reclosing cycle.

Step2 : SR1 counts Dead line Voltage time till a set time, then automatically opens (disconnects)

F1 location.

“TIE Operate Cnt” is set 2. When CB1 trips two times, “TIE Close TD” is run and after

30 seconds, TS1 is closed.

F1 is disconnected and the rest of live line shall be operated to the opposite direction.

Step3 : After removing the fault, close CB1 manually (local or remote), SR1 is automatically closed after a setting time.

Step4 : Open TS1 manually (local or remote) and recover live line.




Figure 7-13.


Step1 : At F1 location, when Permanent Fault occurs, CB1 locked out after conducting reclosing cycle.

If SR1 trips two times, TS1 counts 2 and Close delay time is ran.

While Close delay time of TS1 is operating, SR1 becomes Live line Voltage by reclosing, and Close delay time is reset.

If SR1 trips three times, TS1 counts 3, it is more than “TIE Operate Cnt” 2, so that Close delay time doesn’t run.

When SR1 trips 4 times and locked out, TS1 counts 4. Close delay time doesn’t run.

Step2 : Open SR1 manually (local or remote) and recover live line.




Figure 7-14.


Step1 : At F3 location, when Permanent Fault occurs, SR1 trips 4 times and locked out after conducting reclosing cycle.

If SR1 trips two times, TS1 counts 2 and Close delay time runs.

While Close delay time of TS1 is operating, SR1 becomes Live line Voltage by reclosing, and Close delay time is reset.

If SR1 trips three times, AS1 is automatically opened, TS1 counts 3, and it is more than

“TIE Operate Cnt” 2, so that Close delay time doesn’t run.

Step2 : After AS1 disconnects with F3, SR1 is reclosed and keeps the rest of live line normal.

Step3 : After removing the fault, close AS1 manually (local or remote) and recover live line.



7.1.5. Passcode


Place the curser on “PASSCODE” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

When entering to “PASSCODE” menu, Passcode 3 certification is necessary.

ETMFC610 has 3 (three) Passcode, Passcode can be changed in this menu.

Passcode 1 is applied when changing General Global settings and Group Settings, and Passcode 2 is applied when communication setting is changed. Passcode 3 is applied when clearing or resetting registered data such as event logs, counter logs, energy data, etc.

The setting range and the procedure for changing the three passcode are the same.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PASSCORD\ PASSCORD1 ~3

[PASSCODE 1]

>PASSCODE 1: 0000

[0000~9999:1]

Range 0000 ~ 9999

Default 0000

Put Passcode 1.

Step 1



7.1.6. PLC


Place the curser on “PLC” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

[PLC]

>1.LOGIC TIMER

2.PULS TIMER

3.PULS COUNT

4.INPUT PORTS

5.OUTPUT PORTS

6.LATCH LOGIG

7.1.6.1. LOGIC TIMER

Place the curser on “LOGIC TIMER”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

 PLC has 8 logic timer.

 If Input A is occurred in logic timer, X time later, output B becomes 1. If input A is disappeared, Y time later, output B becomes 0. Please refer to “Figure 7-15. Logic Timer symbol” .

 X is Pick-up timer, Y is Dropout timer.

 In PLC, A shall be input at the user logic ITM □ .

 In PLC, B is output for TM □ .

TM□

X

A B

Y

0s/0s

Figure 7-15.

Logic Timer Symbol

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / LOGIC TIMER / TM1-PU

Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec

[LOGIC TIMER]

>TM01-Pickup: 0.05

TM01-Dropout: 0.05

TM02-Pickup: 0.05

TM02-Dropout: 0.05

TM03-Pickup: 0.05

[0.01~600.00:0.01s]

Default 0.05

Set a pickup time of Logic timer 1.

Step 0.01 sec



GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / LOGIC TIMER / TM1-DO

[LOGIC TIMER]

TM01-Pickup: 0.05

>TM01-Dropout: 0.05

TM02-Pickup: 0.05

TM02-Dropout: 0.05

TM03-Pickup: 0.05

[0.01~600.00:0.01s]

Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 0.05 Step

Set a Dropout Time of Logic timer 1.

0.01 sec

*. NOTE ) TM02~TM08 are same as TM01 above.

7.1.6.2. PULSE TIMER

Place the curser on “PULSE TIMER”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

 PLC has 8 pulse timer.

 When Input A becomes 1 in pulse timer, output B becomes 1, this output comes for Y time.

Please refer to “Figure 7-16. Pulse Timer Symbol”

 In PLC, A shall be input at the user logic IPTM □ .

 In PLC, B is output for PTM □ .

PTM□

A

0s

Y

Figure 7-16. Pulse Timer Symbol

B

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / PULSE TIMER / PTM1

[PULSE TIMER]

>PTM01 Output: 0.01

PTM02 Output: 0.01

PTM03 Output: 0.01

PTM04 Output: 0.01

PTM05 Output: 0.01

[0.01~600.00:0.01s]

Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 0.01

Set an output time of pulse timer 1.

Step 0.01 sec

*. NOTE ) P TM02~PTM08 are same as PTM01 above.



7.1.6.3. PULSE COUNTER


Place the curser on “PULSE COUNTER”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

 PLC has 8 pulse counters.

 Whenever Input B becomes 0 and Input A becomes 1, the pulse counter increases and, it reaches to set number X, output C becomes 1. If Input B becomes 1, Output C becomes 0 and increased count becomes 0. Please refer to “Figure 7-17. Pulse Counter Symbol” .

 It can be checked counter value about Input A on “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/

COUNT/ USER COUNT” menu.

 In PLC, A shall be input at user logic CLSET □ .

 In PLC, B shall be input at user logic CLRST □ .

 In PLC, C is output for CLT □

Figure 7-17. Pulse Counter Symbol

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / PULSE COUNTER / PTL01 Count

[PULSE TIMER]

>CTL01 Count: 1000

CTL02 Count: 1000

CTL03 Count: 1000

CTL04 Count: 1000

CTL05 Count: 1000

Range

Default

1 ~ 60000

1 Step 1

Set output count value of Pulse counter 1(PC1).

[1~60000:1]

*. NOTE ) P TL02 Count~PTL08 Count are same as PTL01 Count above.



7.1.6.4. INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS


Place the curser on “INPUT PORTS” or “OUTPUT PORTS” in PLC menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

[INPUT PORTS]

>1.INPUT DEBOUNCE

[OUTPUT PORTS]

>1.OUTPUT PULSETIME

1) INPUT DEBOUNCE

Place the curser on “INPUT DEBOUNCE” in INPUT PORTS menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

 Input debounce timer is individually prepared in Control Input.

 Input debounce timer sets a time to remove Chattering of INPUT signal.

 In Input debounce timer, if Input A becomes 1, X time later, Output B becomes 1. If Input A is disappeared, X time later, Output B becomes 0. Please refer to “Figure 7-18. Input Debounce

Timer Symbol” .

 In PLC, A is IN101~IN □ of Control Input, B is output for IN □ .

A

IN□

X

0s

X

B

Figure 7-18. Input Debounce Timer Symbol

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / INPUT PORTS / INPUT DEBOUNCE / IN101

Range 0.005 ~ 300.000 sec

[INPUT DEBOUNCE]

>IN101 : 0.020

IN102 : 0.020

IN103 : 0.020

IN104 : 0.020

IN105 : 0.020

0.005~300.000:0.001s

Default 0.020 Step

Set an Input Debounce Time of IN101.

0.001 sec

*. NOTE ) ① IN102 ~ IN112 and IN201 ~ IN214 are the same as IN101 above.

② IN101 ~ IN112 are the SCADA input ports of the side panel, so the IN101 ~ IN112


Multi-Function Control ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr settings do not apply unless the Scada I/O board is installed (‘SCADA I / O Use’ setting in “GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/ DEVICE/ H/W OPTION” menu is ON)

2) Output Pulse Timer

Place the curser on “OUTPUT PULSE TIME” in OUTPUT PORTS menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

 Output Pulse Timer has Control Output individually.

 In output pulse timer, Input B is 0 and, depending on Input A, Output C becomes 1. When

Input A becomes 1, Output C becomes 1 for Y time. However, if Y time is set for 0, depending on Input A, corresponding coincidently and if A is 1, C becomes 1, and if A becomes 0 then, C becomes 0 as buffer. Please refer to “Figure 7-19. Output Pulse Timer Symbol’ .

 In PLC, A shall be input at user logic IOUT □ .

 In PLC, B shall be input at user logic BOUT □ .

 In PLC, C is output for OUT □ and this output operates RELAY.

OUT□

A

Y C

B R

0s

Figure 7-19. Output Pulse Timer Symbol

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / OUTPUT PULSE TIME / OUT101

Range 0(BUFF), 0.01 ~ 100.00 sec

[OUTPUT PULSE TIME]

>OUT101 : 0.50

OUT102 : 0.50

OUT103 : 0.50

OUT104 : 0.50

OUT105 : 0.50

0(BUFF),0.01~100.00s

Default 0.50 Step

Set an Output pulse time of OUT101.

0.01 sec

*. NOTE ) ① OUT102 ~ OUT108 and OUT201 ~ OUT206 are the same as OUT101 above.

② OUT101 ~ OUT108 is the scada output port of the side panel. Therefore, OUT101 ~

OUT108 settings are not applied unless the Scada I/O board is installed (‘SCADA

I/O Use’ setting in “GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/ DEVICE/ H/W OPTION” menu is ON)



7.1.6.5. Latch Logic


Place the curser on “LATCH LOGIC”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

 PLC has 8 latch logics.

 When input B is 0 and input A is 1 then output C is 1 and even when input A becomes 0, output C does not become 0. When input B is 1 then output C becomes 0.

 A is input into user logic “ LSET □” .

 B is input into user logic “ LRST □” .

 C is output as “ LT □” .

 It can be checked latch logic status on “MAIN MENU/ STATUS/ LATCH LOGIG” menu.

A

B

LT□

S

Q

R

C

Figure 7-20. Latch Logic Symbol

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / LATCH LOGIG / NV Function

[LATCH LOGIG]

Range

>NV Function: OFF

Default

OFF, ON

OFF Step

Sets the non-volatility of the latch logic.

~

[OFF/ON]

If set to ON, latch logic will remain set(‘1’) status by restarting

ETMFC610.

But, when set to OFF, the set(‘1’) status of the latch logic is cleared(‘0’) when ETMFC610 restarts.



7.1.6.6. Oneshot Logic


 PLC has 8 oneshot logics.

 Each time input A is 1, output B outputs 1 Pulse. Even when input A is 1 continuously, output

B does not output.

 A is input into user logic “ IOS □” .

 B is output as “ OS □” .

OS□

A B

Figure 7-21. Oneshot Logic Symbol

7.1.6.7. PLC Setting Example

The user can use the inner timer and counter used for PLC setting and the EVENTs that occur within to logically map out for easier control of input/output. For operators used in logical mapping, refer to “Table 7-6. Operator Symbols” .

Table 7-6. Operator Symbols

OPERATOR DESCRIPTION

*

“AND” - when all the inputs are 1, the output is 1.

+

“OR” – when one of the inputs is 1, the output is 1..

!

( )

1

0

-

-

-

-

“NOT” – when the input is 1, the output is 0.

This operation is performed first.

When outputting directly, the output is 1.

When outputting directly, the output is 0.

Buffer output.



PLC logic setting example is as follows; http://www.entecene.co.kr

If user wants pulse signal output at OUT205 port when Phase fault indication occurrence, set the

PLC logic as the formula below.

Example: Logical Expression

1) ITM01 = FIA+FIB+FIC

When any one of following : Phase fault occurs, Logic Timer 01(TM01) is outputted. The

Pickup Time and Dropout Time of Logic Timer 01 is set in “GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/

PLC/ LOGIC TIMER” menu.

*. NOTE ) Phase Fault Indication Element related Logic Bit designation

① FIA : Fault Indication – Phase A

② FIB : Fault Indication – Phase B

③ FIC : Fault Indication – Phase C

2) IOUT205 = TM01

Map the output of Logic Timer 01 into the input of Output205 Pulse Timer. When the Pulse

Timer input signal is 1, pulse signal is outputted. Output pulse time is set in “GLOBAL

SETTING/ GENERAL/ PLC/ OUTPUT PULSE TIME” menu.

3) BOUT205 = 0

The logic diagram for the logical expression example above is as “Figure 7-22. OUT205 Output

Signal Logic Diagram” .

As there is no block condition for Output205 port, 0 is always inputted.

Figure 7-22. OUT205 Output Signal Logic Diagram



PLC Editing Example


As shown in “Figure 7-23. PLC Edit Screen” , input the logical expression in the PLC edit screen operating program then upload PLC data to ETMFC610. For more info, consult “ETMFC610

ETIMS Interface Software User Manual” .

Figure 7-23. PLC Edit Screen

NOTE : 1. When editing PLC logic, there must not be any blank space.

2. When editing PLC logic, you can see the list of logic that can be input to the equation by pressing the ‘F1’ key.



7.1.7. Device


Place the curser on “DEVICE” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

[DEVICE]

>1.CONTROL TYPE

> 2.OPERATION TIME

3.H/W OPTION

4.MANUAL CLOSE

5.LCD DISPLAY

6.PANEL SLEEP

7.TIME ZONE

8.OTHERS

9.FACTORY DEBUG

7.1.7.1. Control Type

Place the curser on “CONTROL TYPE” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / CONTROL TYPE / Type

Range FITYPE, PROTYPE

[CONTROL TYPE]

>Type: FITYPE

[FITYPE/PROTYPE]

Default FITYPE Step ~

Set the control type according to the installed body.

ETMFC610 has two control types (Fault Indication type(FITYPE) and

Protection type(PROTYPE)). The control type must be selected according to the installed body. If the selected control type and the body type do not match, erroneous operation or non-operating occurs.

The menu of the group setting to be applied depends on the control type. When set to FITYPE, “GROUP SETTING/ FAULT

INDICATION” menu is applied. In case of fault, only fault indication is performed and trip operation is not performed.

When set to PROTYPE, "“GROUP SETTING/ PROTECTION” menu is applied and trip operation is performed in case of fault.

For detailed application function according to control type, refer to

"“3. APPLICATION” .

NOTE : Be sure to set the control type according to the characteristics of the main body. Otherwise, the ETMFC610 will not only operate normally, but it will also cause demage to the mainframe.



7.1.7.2. CB Operation Time


Place the curser on “OPERATION TIME” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. In this menu, the operation time of the tank is set. The time set in this menu is used to compensate the T-C curve time.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / OPERATION TIME/ Open Time

[OPERATION TIME]

>Open Time: 0.026

Close Time: 0.050

OP Fail Time: 1.00

CL Fail Time: 1.00

[0.000~1.000:0.001s]

Range 0.000 ~ 1.000 sec


Set actual switch or circuit breaker’s opening time.

Circuit breaker’s complete opening time is calculated as follows.

Total CB Clearing Time = Relay Release Time

+ CB Trip Time

(CB Opening Time + Arcing Time)

* . EXEMPLE) In case that TCC value applied to ETMFC610 is

1.00sec and CB Trip Time is 30msec + 10msec, actual circuit breaker’s

Clearing Time is 1.00 + 30msec + 10msec = 1.04sec. The difference between TCC value and actual Clearing Time, 40msec needs to be set for CB Trip Time(40msec). This setting time compensates CB Trip

Time.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / OPERATION TIME/ Close Time

Range 0.000 ~ 10.000 sec

[OPERATION TIME]

> Open Time: 0.026

>Close Time: 0.050

OP Fail Time: 1.00

CL Fail Time: 1.00

[0~10.000:0.001s]


Set actual switch or circuit breaker’s closing time.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / OPERATION TIME/ OP Fail Time

[OPERATION TIME]

Open Time: 0.026

Close Time: 0.050

>OP Fail Time: 1.00

CL Fail Time: 1.00

[0.05~100.00:0.01 s]

Range 0.05~100.00 sec

Default 1.00

Set fail time for decision switch or circuit breaker’s opening operation fail.

Step 0.01 sec



GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / OPERATION TIME/ CL Fail Time

Range 0.05~100.00 sec


[OPERATION TIME]

Open Time: 0.026

Close Time: 0.050

OP Fail Time: 1.00

>CL Fail Time: 1.00

[0.000~1.000:0.001s]

7.1.7.3. H/W Option

Set fail time for decision switch or circuit breaker’s closing operation fail.

Place the curser on “H/W OPTION” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

In this menu, set the H / W option of ETMFC610. Unlike the actual options, if set, the item may behave incorrectly.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / SCADA I/O Use

[H/W OPTION]

>SCADA I/O Use: ON

> IRIG Use: OFF

> Wifi Use: OFF

EXT.Temper’ Use: ON

[OFF/ON]]

Range OFF, ON

Default ON Step ~

Select whether the SCADA I/O board is installed.

When set to OFF, input / output control of IN101 ~ IN112 and OUT101

~ OUT108 ports is disabled and port status is always “OFF”.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / IRIG Use

Range OFF, ON

[H/W OPTION]

> SCADA I/O Use: ON

>IRIG Use: OFF

> Wifi Use: OFF


[OFF/ON]]

Default installed.

OFF Step ~

Select whether the time synchronization module(GPS or IRIG) is

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / Wifi Use

Range OFF, ON

[H/W OPTION]

> SCADA I/O Use: ON

> IRIG Use: OFF

>Wifi Use: OFF


[OFF/ON]]

Default OFF

Select whether the wifi is installed.

Step ~



GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / EXT. Temper’ Use

[H/W OPTION]

> SCADA I/O Use: ON

> IRIG Use: OFF

> Wifi Use: OFF

>EXT.Temper’ Use: ON

[OFF/ON]]

Range OFF, ON

Default OFF Step ~

Select whether the external temperature is installed.

7.1.7.4. Manual Close

Place the curser on “MANUAL CLOSE” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / MANUAL CLOSE / Time Delay

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

[MANUAL CLOSE]

>Time Delay: 0.00

[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]

Default the field.

0.00 Step 0.01 sec

Using the CLOSE button on the front panel, set the closing delay time to be applied to the main body when the close control is performed in

When OPEN button is pressed during close delay time, the delay timer will stop and close operation will not be performed.

If the CLOSE button is pressed again during the close delay time, the close operation is immediately done even if the delay time remains.



7.1.7.5. LCD Display


Place the curser on “LCD Display” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

In this menu, items related to the LCD screen display method of the front panel are set.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / LCD DISPLAY / Date Disp’ Type

[LCD DISPLAY]

>Date Disp’type: MDY

Init Main Screen: 2

Flt Pop-up Msg: OFF

[YMD/MDY]

Range YMD, MDY

Default MDY Step ~

Set the display type of the date displayed on the LCD screen such as the event menu.

 YMD : it displays in turn Year / Month / Date

 MDY : it displays in turn Month / Date / Year

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / LCD DISPLAY / Init Main Screen

Range 1 ~ 8

[LCD DISPLAY]

> Date Disp’type: MDY

>Init Main Screen: 2

Flt Pop-up Msg: OFF

[1~8:1]

Default 2 Step 2

The ETMFC610 has 8 initial screens. Set the main screen of 8 initial screens. The set screen is displayed for the first time after booting or deviating from main menu, when sleep mode is released.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / LCD DISPLAY / Flt Pop-up Msg

Range OFF, ON

[LCD DISPLAY]

> Date Disp’type: MDY

> Init Main Screen: 2

>Flt Pop-up Msg: OFF

[OFF/ON]

Default

Screen” .

OFF Step

Set whether to display the fault pop-up screen when a fault occurs.

The fault pop-up screen is shown in

~

"“Table 7-6. Fault Pop-up



Table 7-7. Fault Pop-up Screen

FAULT POP-UP SCREEN http://www.entecene.co.kr

[ALERT] FAULT INFO

TYPE :FAULT DIR:F

TARGET:ABCNSQ SEQ:1

A: 00000A B: 00000A

C: 00000A G: 00000A

Q: 00000A S: 00.00A

2017/01/01 00:00:00

[ALERT] FAULT INFO

TYPE : ① DIR: ②

TARGET: ③ SEQ: ④

A: ⑤ A B: ⑤ A

C: ⑤ A N: ⑤ A

Q: ⑤ A S: ⑤ A

⑥

① Fault type is indicated

 FAULT : Fault event before the final fault(Permanent fault or

Temporary fault)

 P-FI : Permanent fault

 T-FI : Temporary fault

 51 : Time Overcurrent Trip

 50 : Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip

② Fault Direction

 F : Forward fault

 R : Reverse fault

 - : If it is the final fault event or cannot determine the fault direction , fault direction is not indicated.

③ Indicate fault target

 A, B, C : each phase fault (Phase fault)

 G : Ground fault

 Q : Negative Sequence fault

 S : Sensitive Earth Fault

④ Fault sequence (shot count) is indicated

⑤ Indicate each phase and negative sequence, S.E.F fault current

⑥ Indicate fault current occurring time

*. Whenever fault is occurred, fault pop-up screen is accumulated, the latest fault screen is displayed at first.

*. Using [ENT] button, accumulated fault pop-up screen is checked.

*. Using [ESC] button, you can clear the pop-up screen without checking all fault pop-up screens.



7.1.7.6. Others


Place the curser on “OTHERS” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / OTHERS / 16bit Count Use

[OTHERS]

>16bit Count Use:OFF

16bit Ener’ Use:OFF

[OFF/ON]

Range OFF, ON

Default ON Step ~

Set the count data format that ETMFC610 registered.

 OFF : Use 32bit format Count Data. Each count data is rolled over to 0 if the counter value exceeds 1,000,000.

 ON : Use 16bit format Count Data. Each count data is rolled over to 0 if the counter value exceeds 65,534.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / OTHERS / 16bit Ener’ Use

Range OFF, ON

[OTHERS]

>16bit Count Use:OFF

16bit Ener’ Use:OFF

[OFF/ON]

Default

Set the energy data format that the ETMFC610 registered.

 OFF :

ON Step ~

Use 32bit format Energy Data. Each energy data is rolled over to 0 if the counter value exceeds 999,999,999.

 ON : Use 16bit format Energy Data. Each energy data is rolled over to 0 if the counter value exceeds 60,000.



7.1.7.7. Panel Sleep Time


Place the curser on “PANEL SLEEP” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Menu to set the interval time that User interface panel turns into sleep mode.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / PANEL SLEEP / Sleep Time

[PANEL SLEEP]

>Sleep Time: OFF

Awake Method: BOTH

[0(OFF),1~100:1m]

Range OFF, 1 ~ 100 min

Default 5 Step 1 min

Set a time for sleep mode delay. Within this set time, if there is no key operation on interface panel, ETMFC610 goes into sleep mode.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / PANEL SLEEP / Awake Method

[PANEL SLEEP]

Sleep Time: OFF

>Awake Method: BOTH

[KEY/DOOR/BOTH]

Range KEY, DOOR, BOTH

Default BOTH Step -

This setting value is affected to display wake-up method

 DOOR : Using door pin attached on the control door, when the door is open, the control panel is awaken from sleep mode.

 KEY : When “AWAKE” key button on the front panel is pushed, the control panel is awaken from sleep mode.

 BOTH : DOOR and KEY are all used.



7.1.7.8. Time Zone


Place the curser on “TIME ZONE” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu.

This setting is used to calculate out local time by using received time information from Time

Synchronization Module(GPS or IRIG). This menu is used when Time Synchronization Module option is installed.

Select standard time zone for user county. Sync time(sec) is used periodic time synchronization by

Time Synchronization module when Time Synchronization module is installed.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / GMT Offset-Sign

[TIME ZONE]

>GMT Offset-Sign: +

GMT Offset-Hour: 9

GMT Offset-Min: 0

Time SyncType: GMT

[+/-]

Range +, -

Default + Step -

Display the receive UTC time and the local time off-set direction.

Local time is faster than UTC time, select “+”, otherwise, select “-“.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / GMT Offset-Hour

[TIME ZONE]

GMT Offset-Sign: +

>GMT Offset-Hour: 9

GMT Offset-Min: 0

Time SyncType: GMT

[0~23:1hr]

Range 0~23 hour(s)

Default 9 Step 1 hour

Set the difference of “Hour” between UTC time and Local time.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / GMT Offset-Min

Range 0~59 min

[TIME ZONE]

GMT Offset-Sign: +

GMT Offset-Hour: 9

>GMT Offset-Min: 0

Time SyncType: GMT

[0~59:1min]

Default 0 Step 1 min

Set the difference of “Minute” between UTC and Local time.

NOTE : Korea Local time is 9 hour faster than UTC time, set it as follows (+9:00);

Sing : +, Hour : 9, Min : 0

The default value of above settings can vary according to the option type.



NOTE : http://www.entecene.co.kr

If the setting values associated with GMT are set up incorrectly, the problems can be happened as follows.

If the "Time Sync Type" is set to be GMT, the time of the internal clock in ETMFC610 can be changed incorrectly at time synchronization.

If the time type of the DNP communication event is set to be GMT, the time of event transmitted is not correct.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / Time Syn’ Type

Range LOCAL, GMT

[TIME ZONE]

GMT Offset-Sign: +

GMT Offset-Hour: 9

GMT Offset-Min: 0

>Time SyncType: GMT

[LOCAL/GMT]

Default GMT with Time Synchronization module.

Step ~

Set Reference Time Type when time need in a device is synchronized

NOTE :

In fact, even though time synchronization module is installed, if “IRIG Use” setting is set with "NO" in “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION” menu, the time synchronization module is not able to be used.

7.1.7.9. Factory Debug

This menu is for Manufacturer’s maintenance purpose.

7.1.8. Save Setting

From this menu, you can save the changed setting values of the GENERAL menu. The procedure for storing the set value is described in “6.3.4. Setting Save” .



7.2. Communication


Place the curser on “COMMUNIATION” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Communication and its related elements are sent in this menu and it has submenu as below.

[COMMUNICATION]

>1.PROTOCOLS

2.PORTS

3.DIALUP MODEM

4.FTP-SSL

5.WIFI

6.EVENT&ETC

*.SAVE SETTINGS



7.2.1. Protocol Setup

Place the curser on “PROTOCOL SETUP” in COMMUNICATION menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Communication protocol of ETMFC610 is set and it has sub-menus as below.

[PROTOCOLS]

>1.DNP3

2.IEC60870-5

3.MODBUS

4.IEC61850

5.SNTP

6.SNMP

7.ETIMS

8.MULTI-BIT

ETMFC610 supports DNP3, IEC60870-5-101, IEC60870-5-104, MODBOUS, IEC61850, SNTP,

SNMP, ETIMS and Multi-Bit Communication protocol. This menu may be changed depending on

User’s request. Each protocol setting details are as below.



7.2.1.1. DNP3 Protocol Setup


1) DNP3 Slave 1 and DNP3 Slave 2

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/

DNP3 SLAVE1 or DNP3 SLAVE2” to select setting for DNP3 Protocol.

Setting items of “DNP3 SLAVE 1” and “DNP3 SLAVE 2” menu are same as following;

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Function


[DNP3 SLAVE1]

>Function: DISABLE

Port Select:RS232-1

D/L Confirm: SOME

D/L FrameDly: 100

D/L Retries: 0

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


To select DNP3 Slave1 or Slave2, set ENABLE.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / COM Port

Range RS232-1, RS232-2, RS485, ETHERNET

[DNP3 SLAVE1]

Function: DISABLE

>Port Select:RS232-1

D/L Confirm: SOME

D/L FrameDly: 100

D/L Retries: 0

[PORT1~PORT5]

Default RS232-1

Select DNP3 communication port.

Step ~

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / D/L Confirm

[DNP3 SLAVE1]

Function: DISABLE

Port Select:RS232-1

>D/L Confirm: SOME

D/L FrameDly: 100

D/L Retries: 0

[NO/YES/SOME]

Range NO, YES, SOME

Default SOME Step ~

Choose whether Data Link Confirm is used or not.

 NO : Data Link Confirm is not used.

 YES : Data Link Confirm is used.

 SOME : Data Link Confirm is used in case of Multi-frame.

When Data Link Confirm is used, it shall be set same as the Host setting. If the setting is different from Host setting, the communication may be failed due to Data Link Reset.



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / D/L FrameDly

[DNP3 SLAVE1]

Function: DISABLE

Port Select:RS232-1

D/L Confirm: SOME

>D/L FrameDly: 100

D/L Retries: 0

[0~5000:10ms]

Range 0 ~ 5000 msec

Default 100 Step 10 msec

Set Data Link frame Delay Time.

In case that D/L Confirm setting is OFF, it means Frame Interval time when multi-frame occurs.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / D/L Retries

Range 0~ 2

[DNP3 SLAVE1]

Function: DISABLE

Port Select:RS232-1

D/L Confirm: SOME

D/L FrameDly: 100

>D/L Retries: 0

[0~2:1]

Default layer.

0 Step 1

Enter the number of retries that will be issued for a given data link

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / D/L Timeout

[DNP3 SLAVE1]

Port Select:RS232-1

D/L Confirm: SOME

D/L FrameDly: 100

D/L Retries: 0

>D/L Timeout: 10

[1~255:1s]

Range 1 ~ 255 sec

Default 10 Step 1 sec

Set a waiting time between Data Link Frame transfer till to receive

Data Link Confirm(ACK) of Master. If there is no Data Link Confirm receiving and Data Link retry is available, ETMFC610 will send Data

Link Frame again.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / A/L Retries

Range 0 ~ 255

[DNP3 SLAVE1]

>A/L Retries: 0

A/L Timeout: 30

Master Addr: 60000

Slave Address: 1

SBO Timeout: 15

[1~255:1s]

Default 0 Step 1

Enter the number of retries of retransmission of unsol message

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / A/L Timeout

Range 1~ 255 sec

[DNP3 SLAVE1]

> A/L Retries: 0

>A/L Timeout: 30

> Master Addr: 60000

> Slave Address: 1

> SBO Timeout: 15

[1~255:1s]


Set a waiting time for Slave Application to receive Application layer

Confirm(ACK) from Master Application, in case that Confirm is requested during Data transfer from Slave Application to Master

Application.



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Master Address

[DNP3 SLAVE1]

A/L Retries: 15

A/L Timeout: 30

>Master Addr: 60000

Slave Address: 1

SBO Timeout: 15

[0~65534:1]

Range 0 ~ 65534

Default 60000

Enter the master station address.

Step 1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Slave Address

Range 0 ~ 65534

[DNP3 SLAVE1]

> A/L Retries: 15

> A/L Timeout: 30

Master Addr: 60000

>Slave Address: 15

> SBO Timeout: 15

[0~65534:1]

Default 1 Step

Enter the slave(ETMFC610) address.

1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / SBO Timeout

Range 1 ~ 255 sec

[DNP3 SLAVE1]

> A/L Retries: 15

> A/L Timeout: 30

> Master Addr: 60000

> Slave Address: 15

>SBO Timeout: 15

[1~255:1s]

Default 15 cancelled.

Step 1 sec

Set a time interval between Select Function and Operate Function. If there is no operation command during set time, Select command is

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Init Unsol


[DNP3 SLAVE1]

>Init Unsol: ENABLE

Unsol Time: 5

Unsol Type: NOTRIG

Class1: ENABLE

Class2: ENABLE

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

Default



ENABLE not transferred.

Step ~

Select a use of re-start Initial Unsolicited Response.

 ENABLE : On Power Up, Initial Unsolicited Response Message is transferred.

DISABLE : On Power Up, Initial Unsolicited Response Message is

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Unsol Time

Range 0 ~ 60 sec

[DNP3 SLAVE1]

> Init Unsol: ENABLE

>Unsol Time: 5

> Unsol Type: NOTRIG

> Class1: ENABLE

> Class2: ENABLE

[0~60:1s]

Default the time.

5 Step 1 sec

Set a delay time of reporting, in case Unsolicited mode event is occurred. Reporting is conducted if no new Event is occurred within



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 /Unsol Type

[DNP3 SLAVE1]


> Unsol Time: 5

>Unsol Type: NOTRIG

Class1: ENABLE

Class2: ENABLE

[NOTRIG/PERIOD]

Range NOTRIG, PERIOD

Default NOTRIG Step -

Set the method to Unsolicited Message.

 NOTRG: If there is no event occurrence during setting unsolicited time after the last event occurs, the event data is transmitted.

 PERIOD: Unsolicited message is sent to a master with whole event data occurring after setting unsolicited time starting and elapsing when the first event occurs.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Class 1


[DNP3 SLAVE1]


> Unsol Time: 5


>Class1: ENABLE

Class2: ENABLE

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

Default ENABLE that Class 1 event is occurred.

Step ~

Select whether to send Unsolicited Response or not to master in case


[DNP3 SLAVE1]


> Unsol Time: 5


> Class1: ENABLE

>Class2: ENABLE

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Default ENABLE

Select whether to send Unsolicited Response or not to master in case that Class 2 event is occurred.

Step ~



[DNP3 SLAVE1]

>Class3: ENABLE

TCP/UDP Select: TCP

TCP Port: 20000

UDP Port : 20001

Master IP Oct1: 0

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

Default ENABLE

Select whether to send Unsolicited Response or not to master in case that Class 3 event is occurred.

Step ~



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / TCP/UDP Select

[DNP3 SLAVE1]

> Class3: ENABLE

>TCP/UDP Select: TCP

TCP Port: 20000

UDP Port : 20001

Master IP Oct1: 0

[TCP/UDP]

Range TCP, UDP

Default TCP Step ~

Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Ethernet port.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / TCP Port

[DNP3 SLAVE1]

> Class3: ENABLE

TCP/UDP Select: TCP

>TCP Port: 20000

UDP Port : 20001

Master IP Oct1: 0

[1~65535:1]

Range 1 ~ 65535

Default 20000 Step 1

Set the TCP/IP Port number of ETMFC610 for TCP communication.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / UDP Port

Range 0 ~ 65535

[DNP3 SLAVE1]

> Class3: ENABLE

TCP/UDP Select: TCP

TCP Port: 20000

>UDP Port : 20001

Master IP Oct1: 0

[1~65535:1]


Set the TCP/IP Port number of ETMFC610 for UDP communication.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Master IP Oct 1~4

[DNP3 SLAVE1]

>Master IP Oct1: 0

Master IP Oct2: 0

Master IP Oct3: 0

Master IP Oct4: 0

[0~255:1]

Range 0 ~ 255

Default 0*

Select the IP Address for DNP3 Communication.

IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx

① ② ③ ④

Step 1

Master IP Oct1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④




GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / K-Alv Check Tm

>

[DNP3 SLAVE1]

Master IP Oct4: 0

>K-Alv Check Tm: 4

Fragment Size: 2048

Time Req(m): OFF

Retry Type: REGEN

[O(OFF),1~600:1s]

Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 600 sec

Default 4

Set the time period that checks the communication connecting status during the idle status.

Step 1sec

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Fragment Size

>

[DNP3 SLAVE1]

Master IP Oct4: 0

> K-Alv Check Tm: 4

>Fragment Size: 2048

Time Req(m): OFF

Retry Type: REGEN

[64~2048:1]

Range 64 ~ 2048

Default 2048

Set the size of DNP fragment.

Step 1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Time Req(m)

>

[DNP3 SLAVE1]

Master IP Oct4: 0

K-Alv Check Tm: 4

Fragment Size: 2048

>Time Req(m): OFF

Retry Type: REGEN

[0(OFF),1~30000:1]

Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 30000 min

Default OFF received from master station.

Step 1

Set Time Sync in order to synchronize internal system clock with time

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Retry Type

>

[DNP3 SLAVE1]

Master IP Oct4: 0

K-Alv Check Tm: 4

Fragment Size: 2048

Time Req(m): OFF

>Retry Type: REGEN

[REGEN/IDENT]

Range IDENT, REGEN

Default REGEN Step

Set the Retry Type(Identical, Regenerated).

~

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / SA Func

Range DISABLE, SAv2, SAv5

[DNP3 SLAVE1]

>SA Func: DISABLE

TCP/IP TLS: DISABLE

Unsol off TO: OFF

[DISABLE/SAv2/SAv5]


Set whether DNP Secure Authentication is used i.e., SAv2, SAv5 or not



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / TCP/IP TLS


[DNP3 SLAVE1]

SA Func: DISABLE

>TCP/IP TLS: DISABLE

Unsol off TO: OFF

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Set the DNP TCP/IP Transport Layer Security is used or not.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Unsol off TO

Range 0(OFF), 0~65535sec

[DNP3 SLAVE1]

SA Func: DISABLE

TCP/IP TLS: DISABLE

>Unsol off TO: OFF

[0(OFF),0~65535:1s]

Default OFF Step

Set final confirmation timeout period.

1sec

When unsolicited message transmit is failed, the transmission retries repeat. After final retry is done, it waits during this set time and then another unsolicited response series will be started.

2) DNP3 Protocol Common

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/

COMMON” menu. This setting is applied to the DNP3 Save 1 and DNP3 Save 2 protocols.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ COMMON/ BI Obj1 Var

Range 0 (NONE), 0~2

[COMMON]

>BI Obj1 Var : 1

BO Obj10 Var : 2

CI Obj20 Var : 4

FRZ Obj21 Var: 6

AI Obj30 Var : 2

AO Obj40 Var : 2

[0(NONE), 0~2:1]

Default 1 Step

Select Variation of Binary Input Object 02

1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ COMMON/ BO Obj10 Var

Range 0 (NONE), 0 ~ 2

[COMMON]

BI Obj1 Var : 1

>BO Obj10 Var : 2

CI Obj20 Var : 4

FRZ Obj21 Var: 6

AI Obj30 Var : 2

AO Obj40 Var : 2

[0(NONE), 0~2:1]

Default 2 Step

Select Variation of Binary Output Object 10

1



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ COMMON/ CI Obj20 Var


[COMMON]

BI Obj1 Var : 1

BO Obj10 Var : 2

>CI Obj20 Var : 4

FRZ Obj21 Var: 6

AI Obj30 Var : 2

AO Obj40 Var : 2

[NONE/1/2/5/6]

Default 4

Select Variation of Countr Object 20

Step -

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/COMMON/FRZ Obj21 Var

Range 0 (NONE), 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10

[COMMON]

BI Obj1 Var : 1

BO Obj10 Var : 2

CI Obj20 Var : 4

>FRZ Obj21 Var: 6

AI Obj30 Var : 2

AO Obj40 Var : 2

[NONE/1/2/5/6/9/10]

Default 6 Step

Select Variation of Frozen Countr Object 21

-

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ COMMON/ AI Obj30 Var


[COMMON]

BI Obj1 Var : 1

BO Obj10 Var : 2

CI Obj20 Var : 4

FRZ Obj21 Var: 6

>AI Obj30 Var : 2

AO Obj40 Var : 2

[0(NONE), 0~4:1]

Default 2 Step

Select Variation of Analog Input Object 30

-

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ COMMON/ AO Obj40 Var


[COMMON]

BI Obj1 Var : 1

BO Obj10 Var : 2

CI Obj20 Var : 4

FRZ Obj21 Var: 6

AI Obj30 Var : 2

>AO Obj40 Var : 2

[0(NONE), 0~2:1]

Default 2 Step

Select Variation of Analog Output Object 40

-



7.2.1.2. IEC60870-5 Protocol Setup


1) IEC60870-5-101

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL/ IEC60870-

5/ IEC60870-5-101” to select setting for IEC60870-5-101.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Function


[IEC870-5-101]

>Function: DISABLE

Port Select:RS232-1

Link Address 1

ASDU Address 0

Cyclic Period 60

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Set whether IEC60870-5-101 protocol is used for communication.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ COM Port

Range RS232-1, RS232-2, RS485

[IEC870-5-101]

> Function: DISABLE


Link Address: 1

ASDU Address: 0

Cyclic Period: 60

[PORT1-PORT3]

Default RS232-1 Step ~

Select a port to use IEC60870-5-101 communication.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Link Address

[IEC870-5-101]

> Function: DISABLE

> Port Select:RS232-1

>Link Address: 1

ASDU Address: 0

Cyclic Period: 60

[1~65535:1]

Range 1 ~ 65535

Default 1

Enter the slave(ETMFC610) address for IEC60870-5-101 communication.

Step 1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ ASDU Addr

[IEC60870-5-101]

Function: DISABLE

Port Select:RS232-1

Link Address: 1

>ASDU Address: 0

Cyclic Period: 60

[1~65535:1]

Range 0~65535

Default 0 Step 1

Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Cyclic Period

[IEC60870-5-101]

Function: DISABLE

Port Select:RS232-1

Link Address: 1

ASDU Address: 0

>Cyclic Period: 60

[0(OFF),1~60000:1s]

Range 0(OFF), 1~60000 sec

Default 60

Select the Cyclic Period.

Step 1 sec

It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Event Period

[IEC60870-5-101] >

>Event Period: 15

D/L Retries: 0

Conf.Timeout: 10

Max Poll Time: 10

ASDU Addr Size: 2

[0~255:1s]

Range 0~255 sec

Default 15 Step 1sec

Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ D/L Retries

Range 0 ~ 255

[IEC60870-5-101] >

> Event Period: 15

>D/L Retries: 0

Conf.Timeout: 10

Max Poll Time: 10

ASDU Addr Size: 2

[0~255:1]

Default 0

Set the number of Data retry.

Step 1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/Conf. Timeout

Range 1 ~ 255 sec

[IEC60870-5-101] >

> Event Period: 15

D/L Retries: 0

>Conf.Timeout: 10

Max Poll Time: 10

ASDU Addr Size: 2

[1~255:1s]


Set the wait time till receive the Data Confirm (ACK) of master after transfer the Data. If there isn’t the Confirm during this setting time and

Data retries is available, ETMFC610 transfers the Data again.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Max Poll Tim

[IEC60870-5-101] >

> Event Period: 15

D/L Retries: 0

Conf.Timeout: 10

>Max Poll Time: 10

ASDU Addr Size: 2

[1~255:1s]

Range 1 ~ 255 sec

Default 10

Set the Data Polling period time.

Step 1 sec



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ ADSU Addr Size

[IEC60870-5-101] >

Event Period: 15

D/L Retries: 0

Conf.Timeout: 10

Max Poll Time: 10

>ASDU Addr Size: 2

[1~2:1]

Range 1 ~ 2

Default 2 Step

Enter the size of cause of transmission.

1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Link Confirm

[IEC60870-5-101]

>Link Confirm:ALWAYS

Link Addr Size: 1

Rx Frame Size: 261

Rx Frame TO: 15

Tx Frame Size: 261

[NEVER/ALWAYS]

Range NEVER, ALWAYS

Default ALWAYS

Enter the Link layer confirm mode.

Step ~

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Link Addr Size

Range 1 ~ 2

[IEC60870-5-101]

Link Confirm:ALWAYS

>Link Addr Size: 1

Rx Frame Size: 261

Rx Frame TO: 15

Tx Frame Size: 261

[1~2:1]

Default 1

Enter the size of link address.

Step 1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Rx Frame Size

Range 0 ~ 261

[IEC60870-5-101]

Link Confirm:ALWAYS

Link Addr Size: 1

>Rx Frame Size: 261

Rx Frame TO: 15

Tx Frame Size: 261

[0~261:1]

Default 261 Step

Enter the maximum size of received frame.

1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Rx Frame TO

[IEC60870-5-101]

Link Confirm:ALWAYS

Link Addr Size: 1

Rx Frame Size: 261

>Rx Frame TO: 15

Tx Frame Size: 261

[0(OFF),0~255:1s]


Default 15

Enter the maximum amount of time to wait for a complete frame after receiving the frame sync.

Step 1 sec



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Tx Frame Size

[IEC60870-5-101]

Link Confirm:ALWAYS

Link Addr Size: 1

Rx Frame Size: 261

Rx Frame TO: 15

>Tx Frame Size: 261

[0~261:1]

Range 0 ~ 261

Default 261 Step

Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.

1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ COT Size

[IEC60870-5-101]

>COT Size : 1

> IOA Size : 2

One Ch Response: NO

Frame Repet’ TO: 30

Select Timeout: 5

[1~2:1]

Range 1 ~ 2

Default 1 Step

Enter the size of cause of transmission.

1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ IOA Size

Range 1 ~ 3

[IEC60870-5-101]

> COT Size : 1

>IOA Size : 2

One Ch Response: NO


Select Timeout: 5

[1~3:1]

Default 2 Step

Enter the size of information object address.

1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ One Ch Response

Range NO, YES

[IEC60870-5-101]

> COT Size : 1

> IOA Size : 2

>One Ch Response: NO


Select Timeout: 5

[NO/YES]

Default NO Step

NACK when no response data available.

~

This allows to send one character response instead of a fixed length

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Fram Repet’ TO

[IEC60870-5-101]

> COT Size : 1

> IOA Size : 2

One Ch Response: NO

>Frame Repet’ TO: 30

Select Timeout: 5

[0(OFF),0~255:1s]

Range 0(OFF), 0~255sec

Default 30

Enter the time out for repetition of frames(or incremental application layer timeout).

Step 1 sec



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Select Timeout

[IEC60870-5-101]

> COT Size : 1

> IOA Size : 2

One Ch Response: NO


>Select Timeout: 5

[0(OFF),0~255:1]

Range 0(OFF), 0~255


Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ CMD Termination

Range NO, YES

[IEC60870-5-101]

>CMD Termination:YES

CSE Termination:YES

Clock Sync’ Evt:YES

MSP Time-Tag: CP56

MIT Time-Tag: CP56

[NO/YES]

Default YES Step commands other than set point commands.

~

Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ CSE Termination

Range NO, YES

[IEC60870-5-101]

CMD Termination:YES

>CSE Termination:YES


MSP Time-Tag: CP56

MIT Time-Tag: CP56

[NO/YES]

Default YES point commands.

Step ~

Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Clock Sync’ Evt

Range NO, YES

[IEC60870-5-101]

CMD Termination:YES

CSE Termination:YES

>Clock Sync’ Evt:YES

MSPTime-Tag: CP56

MIT Time-Tag: CP56

[NO/YES]

Default YES Step ~

Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ MSP Time-Tag

[IEC60870-5-101]

CMD Termination:YES

CSE Termination:YES


>MSP Time-Tag: CP56

MIT Time-Tag: CP56

[CP56/CP24]

Range CP56, CP24

Default CP56 Step ~

Select whether a time tag format for single-point.

 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.




GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ MIT Time-Tag

[IEC60870-5-101]

CMD Termination:YES

CSE Termination:YES


MSP Time-Tag: CP56

>MIT Time-Tag: CP56

[CP56/CP24]

Range CP56, CP24

Default CP56 Step ~

Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals.



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ MME Time-Tag

[IEC60870-5-101]

>MME Time-Tag: CP56

> Flt Time-Tag: CP56

[CP56/CP24]

Range CP56, CP24

Default

Select whether a time tag format for measured value and normalized value for general event except for fault current event.

 CP56 :

CP56 Step ~

The time tag format is CP56Time2a.


GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Flt Time-Tag

Range CP56, CP24

[IEC60870-5-101]

> MME Time-Tag: CP56

>Flt Time-Tag: CP56

[CP56/CP24]

Default






CP56 :

CP24 :

CP56 Step


~


2) IEC60870-5-104


5/ IEC60870-5-104” to select setting for IEC60870-5-104.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Function


[IEC870-5-104]

>Function: DISABLE

ASDU Address: 0

Cyclic Period: 60

Timeout(t0): 120

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Set whether IEC60870-5-104 protocol is used for communication.



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ ASDU Addr

[IEC60870-5-104]

Function: DISABLE

>ASDU Address: 0

Cyclic Period: 60

Timeout(t0): 120

[1~65535:1]

Range 0~65535

Default 0 Step 1

Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Cyclic Period

[IEC60870-5-104]

Function: DISABLE

ASDU Address: 0

>Cyclic Period: 60

Timeout(t0): 120

[0(OFF),1~60000:1s]

Range 0(OFF), 1~60000 sec

Default 60

Select the Cyclic Period.

Step 1 sec

It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Time Out(t0)

Range 1~255 sec

[IEC60870-5-104]

Function: DISABLE

ASDU Address: 0

Cyclic Period: 60

>Timeout(t0): 120

[1~255:1s]

Default 120 Step 1

Select the Timeout for connection establishment.


[IEC60870-5-104]

>Time Out(t1): 15

> Time Out(t2): 10

Time Out(t2): 20

Event Perioid: 15

TCP Port No: 2404

[1~255:1s]

Range 1~255 sec

Default 15 Step

Select the Timeout for send or test APDUs.

1


[IEC60870-5-104]

Time Out(t1): 15

>Time Out(t2): 10

Time Out(t2): 20

Event Perioid: 15

TCP Port No: 2404

[1~255:1s]

Range 1~255 sec

Default 10

Select the Timeout for acknowledgements in case of no data message

( t2<t1).

Step 1




[IEC60870-5-104]

Time Out(t1): 15

Time Out(t2): 10

>Time Out(t2): 20

Event Perioid: 15

TCP Port No: 2404

[1~255:1s]

Range 1~255 sec

Default 20 Step 1

Select the Timeout for sending test frame in case of a long idle state.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Event Period

[IEC60870-5-104]

Time Out(t1): 15

> Time Out(t2): 10

Time Out(t2): 20

>Event Perioid: 15

TCP Port No: 2404

[0~255:1s]

Range 0~255 sec

Default 15 Step 1sec

Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ TCP Port

Range 1~65535

[IEC60870-5-104]

Time Out(t1): 15

> Time Out(t2): 10

Time Out(t2): 20

Event Perioid: 15

>TCP Port: 2404

[1~65535:1]

Default 2404 communication.

Step 1

Set the TCP/IP Port of ETR300 for IEC60870-5-104 Protocol

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Rx Frame Size

Range 0 ~ 255

[IEC60870-5-104]

>Rx Frame Size: 255

Tx Frame Size: 255

SBO Timeout: 5

CMD Termination:YES

CSE Termination:YES

[0~255:1]

Default 255 Step

Enter the maximum size of received frame.

1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Tx Frame Size

[IEC60870-5-104]

> Rx Frame Size: 255

>Tx Frame Size: 255

SBO Timeout: 5

CMD Termination:YES

CSE Termination:YES

[0~255:1]

Range 0 ~ 255

Default 255 Step

Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.

1



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ SBO Timeout

[IEC60870-5-104]

Rx Frame Size: 255

Tx Frame Size: 255

>SBO Timeout: 5

CMD Termination:YES

CSE Termination:YES

[0(OFF),0~255:1]

Range 0(OFF), 0~255

Default 5 Step 1sec

Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ MD Termination

[IEC60870-5-104]

Rx Frame Size: 255

Tx Frame Size: 255

SBO Timeout: 5

>CMD Termination:YES

CSE Termination:YES

[NO/YES]

Range NO, YES

Default YES Step

Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of commands other than set point commands.

~

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ CSE Termination

[IEC60870-5-104]

Rx Frame Size: 255

Tx Frame Size: 255

SBO Timeout: 5

CMD Termination:YES

>CSE Termination:YES

[NO/YES]

Range NO, YES

Default YES point commands.

Step ~

Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Clock Sync’ Evt

Range NO, YES

[IEC60870-5-104]

> CSE Termination:YES

>Clock Sync’ Evt:YES

MSP Time-Tag: CP56

> MIT Time-Tag: CP56

MME Time-Tag: CP56

[NO/YES]

Default YES Step ~

Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ MSP Time-Tag

[IEC60870-5-104]

> CMD Termination:YES

CSE Termination:YES


>MSP Time-Tag: CP56

MIT Time-Tag: CP56

[CP56/CP24]

Range CP56, CP24

Default CP56 Step ~

Select whether a time tag format for single-point.





GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ MIT Time-Tag

[IEC60870-5-104]

CMD Termination:YES

CSE Termination:YES


MSP Time-Tag: CP56

>MIT Time-Tag: CP56

[CP56/CP24]

Range CP56, CP24

Default CP56 Step ~




GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ MME Time-Tag

[IEC60870-5-104]

>MME Time-Tag: CP56


[CP56/CP24]

Range CP56, CP24

Default

Select whether a time tag format for measured value and normalized value for general event except for fault current event.

 CP56 :

CP56 Step ~



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Flt Time-Tag

Range CP56, CP24

[IEC60870-5-104]


>Flt Time-Tag: CP56

[CP56/CP24]

Default






CP56 :

CP24 :

CP56 Step


~


GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ k(Max Tx)

[IEC60870-5-104]



>k(Max Tx): 12

> w(Max Rx): 8

[ 1~32767:1 ]

Range 1 ~ 32767

Default 12

Set the maximum difference receive sequence number to send state variable.

Step 1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ w(Max Rx)

Range 1 ~ 32767

[IEC60870-5-104]



> k(Max Tx): 12

>w(Max Rx): 8

[ 1~32767:1 ]

Default 8 Step 1

Set the atest acknowledge after receiving w I format APDUs.



3) IEC60870-5-101 and IEC60870-5-104 Common http://www.entecene.co.kr


5/ COMMON” to select setting for common requirement of IEC60870-5-101 and IEC60870-5-

104.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ COMMON/ MPS Start

Range 0 ~ 65535

[COMMON]

>MSP Start: 1000

MDP Start: 1500

MMENA Start: 2000

MMENB Start: 2500

MMENC Start: 8000

[0~65535:1]

Default 1000

101/104 protocol.

Step 1

Set the start address of Single-point Information for IEC60870-5-

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ COMMON/ MDP Start

Range 0 ~ 65535

[COMMON]

> MSP Start: 1000

>MDP Start: 1500

MMENA Start: 2000

MMENB Start: 2500

MMENC Start: 8000

[0~65535:1]

Default 1500

101/104 protocol.

Step 1

Set the start address of Double-point Information for IEC60870-5-

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON/ MMENA Start

[COMMON]

> MSP Start: 1000

MDP Start: 1500

>MMENA Start: 2000

MMENB Start: 2500

MMENC Start: 8000

[0~65535:1]

Range 0 ~ 65535

Default 2000

Set the start address of Measured Value, Normalized Value for

IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

Step 1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON/ MMENB Start

[COMMON]

> MSP Start: 1000

> MDP Start: 1500

MMENA Start: 2000

>MMENB Start: 2500

MMENC Start: 8000

[0~65535:1]

Range 0 ~ 65535

Default 2500

Set the start address of Measured Value, Scaled Value for IEC60870-5-

101/104 protocol.

Step 1



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON/ MMENC Start

[COMMON]

> MSP Start: 1000

MDP Start: 1500

MMENA Start: 2000

MMENB Start: 2500

>MMENC Start: 8000

[0~65535:1]

Range 0 ~ 65535

Default 8000

Set the start address of Measured Value, Short Floating Point Number for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

Step 1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON/ MMEND Start

[COMMON]

>MMEND Start: 6000

MIT Start: 3000

CSC Start: 21000

CDC Start: 32000

CSEMA Start: 26000

[0~65535:1]

Range 0 ~ 65535

Default 6000 Step 1

Set the start address of Measured value, Normalized Value without

Quality Descriptor for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON / MIT Start

Range 0 ~ 65535

[COMMON]

> MMEND Start: 6000

>MIT Start: 3000

CSC Start: 21000

CDC Start: 32000

CSEMA Start: 26000

[0~65535:1]

Default protocol.

3000 Step 1

Set the start address of Integrated Totals for IEC60870-5-101/104

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON / CSC Start

Range 0 ~ 65535

[COMMON]

> MMEND Start: 6000

MIT Start: 3000

>CSC Start: 21000

CDC Start: 32000

CSEMA Start: 26000

[0~65535:1]

Default protocol.

21000 Step 1

Set the start address of Single Command for IEC60870-5-101/104

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ CDC Start

[COMMON]

> MMEND Start: 6000

MIT Start: 3000

CSC Start: 21000

>CDC Start: 32000

CSEMA Start: 26000

[0~65535:1]

Range 0 ~ 65535

Default 32000

Set the start address of Double Command for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

Step 1



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON / CSEMA Start

[COMMON]

> MIT Start: 3000

CSC Start: 21000

CDC Start: 32000

>CSEMA Start: 26000

[0~65535:1]

Range 0 ~ 65535

Default 26000

Set the start address of Set-point Command, Normalized Value for

IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

Step 1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ CSEMB Start

[COMMON]

>CSEMB Start: 27000

> PMENA Start: 10000

> PMENB Start: 12000

> PMENC Start: 14000

[0~65535:1]

Range 0 ~ 65535

Default 27000

Set the start address of Set-point Command, Scaled Value for

IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

Step 1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ PMENA Start

[COMMON]

> CSEMB Start: 27000

>PMENA Start: 10000



[0~65535:1]

Range 0 ~ 65535


Set the start address of Set-point Parameter of Measured Values,

Normalized Value for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ PMENB Start

[COMMON]



>PMENB Start: 12000


[0~65535:1]

Range

Default

0 ~ 65535

12000 Step

Set the start address of Set-point Parameter of Measured Values, Scaled

Value for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ PMENC Start

[COMMON]




>PMENC Start: 14000

[0~65535:1]

Range 0 ~ 65535


Set the start address of Parameter of Measured Values, Short Floating

Point Number for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ MIT MODE

[COMMON]

PMENA Start: 10000

PMENB Start: 12000

PMENC Start: 14000

>MIT Mode : MODE B

[MODE B/MODE D]

Range MODE B , MODE D

Default MODE B Step -

Set the start address of Parameter of Measured Values, Short Floating

Point Number for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

7.2.1.3. MODBUS Protocol Setup

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/

MODBUS” to select setting for MODBUS Protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MODBUS/ Function

[MODBUS]

>Function: DISABLE

Port Select: RS485

Slave Address: 1

TX Delay: 0.05

TCP/UDP Select: TCP

[DISABLE/ENABLE]



Set whether to use MODBUS communication or not.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS/ Port Select

Range RS232-1, RS232-2, RS485, ETHERNET

[MODBUS]

Function: DISABLE

>Port Select: RS485

Slave Address: 1

TX Delay: 0.05

TCP/UDP Select: TCP

[PORT1 – PORT5]

Default RS485 Step

Select MODBUS communication port.

~

GLOBAL SETTING/COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS/ Slave Address

Range 1 ~ 254

[MODBUS]

Function: DISABLE

Port Select: RS485

>Slave Address: 1

TX Delay: 0.05

TCP/UDP Select: TCP

[1~254:1]

Default 1

Enter the slave(ETMFC610) address

Step 1



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS / TX Delay

[MODBUS]

Function: DISABLE

Port Select: RS485

Slave Address: 1

>TX Delay: 0.05

TCP/UDP Select: TCP

[0(OFF),0.00~300s]

Range 0.00(OFF), 0.01 ~ 300.00 sec

Default 0.05 sec Step 0.01

Set TCP port number of ETMFC610.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS /TCP/UDP select

[MODBUS]

Function: DISABLE

Port Select: RS485

Slave Address: 1

TX Delay: 0.05


[TCP/UDP]

Range TCP, UDP

Default TCP Step

Select to use between TCP and UDP.

1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS/ TCP Port

Range 1 ~ 65535

[MODBUS]

>TCP Port: 502

> UDP Port: 503

[1~65535:1]

Default 502 Step

Enter the Modbus address for TCP Port.

1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS/ UDP Port

Range 1~65535

[MODBUS]

TCP Port: 502

>UDP Port: 503

[1~65535:1]

Default 503 Step

Enter the Modbus address for UDP Port.

1



7.2.1.4. IEC61850 Protocol Setup


ETMFC610 can be programmed for communication using the IEC61850 through Ethernet ports(Eth1 or Eth2).

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/

IEC61850” to select setting for IEC61850 Protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC61850/ Function


[IEC61850]

>Function: DISABLE

Goose Msg’: DISABLE

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Select whether to use IEC 61850 Protocol.

~

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC61850/ Goose Msg’

[IEC61850]

> Function: DISABLE

>Goose Msg’: DISABLE

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Default DISABLE

Select whether to use GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation

Event).

Step ~

7.2.1.5. SNTP Protocol Setup

ETMFC610 can be programmed for communication using the SNTP through Ethernet ports.

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ SNTP” to select setting for SNTP Protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNTP/ Function


[SNTP]

>Function: DISABLE

T-S Period: 3600

SNTP IP 1: 0

SNTP IP 2: 0

SNTP IP 3: 0

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Select whether to use SNTP Protocol for Time Synchronization.



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNTP / T-S Period

[SNTP]

Function: DISABLE

>T-S Period: 3600

SNTP IP 1: 0

SNTP IP 2: 0

SNTP IP 3: 0

[0~60000:1s]

Range 1~60000

Default 3600 Step 1

Enter the time period for requesting time synchronization with the time server.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNTP / SNTP IP 1 ~4

[SNTP]

Function: DISABLE

T-S Period: 3600

>SNTP IP 1: 0

SNTP IP 2: 0

SNTP IP 3: 0

[0~255:1]

Range 0~255

Default 0 Step 1

Enter the IP Address 1 for SNTP server.

7.2.1.6. SNMP Protocol Setup

ETMFC610 can be programmed for communication using the SNMP through Ethernet ports.

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ SNMP” to select setting for SNMP Protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNMP/ Function

Range DISABLE / ENABLE

[SNMP]

>Function: DISABLE

Accept PW: 00000000

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Set whether SNMP Protoctol Function is used or not.

This setting supports SNMPv2c, SNMPv3.

~

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNMP/ Accept PW

Range 0~z

[SNMP]

Function: DISABLE

>Accept PW: 00000000

[0~Z]

Default 0 Step ~

Set the accept password of SNMP Protoctol for SNMPv3, only.



7.2.1.7. ETIMS Protocol Setup


ETMFC610 can be setup for communication with interface software ETIMS through Serial ports(RS232-1 or RS232-2) or Ethernet ports.

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ ETIMS” .

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ ETIMS/ TCP Port No

Range 30000 ~ 40000

[ETIMS]

>TCP Port No: 30000

Serial Func: OFF

Serial Port:RS232-1

[30000~40000:1]


Set the number of TCP Port for ETIMS Interface Software.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ ETIMS/ Serial Func

Range OFF, ON

[ETIMS]

TCP Port No: 30000

>Serial Func: OFF

Serial Port:RS232-1

[OFF/ON]

Default ON Step

Set whether to use ETIMS through serial port.

~

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ ETIMS/ Serial port

Range RS232-1, RS232-2

[ETIMS]

TCP Port No: 30000

Serial Func: OFF

>Serial Port:RS232-1

[RS232-1/RS232-2]

Default RS232-1 Step

Select Serial Communication Port for ETIMS

~



7.2.1.8. Multi-Bit Protocol


Multi-Bit communication protocol is a protocol used for Peer-to-Peer communication between the

ETMFC610. The exchange of digital information between the ETMFC610 (Fault event information and interlock information, Open/Close status information, etc.) makes it possible in real time to apply an advanced protection coordination such as isolation of the fault section and self-healing.

ETMFC610 has two Multi-Bit Protocol (Multi-Bit A and Multi-Bit-B) in order to transmit and receive individually with Upstream and Downstream device.

Multi-Bit communication protocol is transmitted and received continuously in real-time messages in each predetermined period, and transmits the message according to a communication transmission period setting.

Features of the Multi-Bit communication protocol

 CRC checking, ID checking, status checking and debounce check of each bit through step-bystep to increase accuracy.

 It makes distinguish communication error types and configure the corresponding methods and procedures of the respective error.

 It can be checked correctly communication status through communication status test which uses communication data frame.

1) Communication Connection

The ETMFC610 can accept Multi-Bit Protocol Communication with the maximum two

ETMFC610 through two Multi-Bit Protocol(Multi-Bit A and Multi-Bit B).

Each Multi-Bit Protocol is exchanging in real time Receiving Date 8 bit and Transmitting Date 8 bit with connected ETMFC610. Each Multi-Bit Protocol can select transmitted ID(Tx ID) and the received ID(Rx ID). Tx ID must be same to the peer Rx ID, Rx ID must be same to the peer Tx ID.

It will be detected correct communication connection through Tx ID and Rx ID.

*. Rx : Receiving Data (8 bit), Tx : Transmitting Data (8 bit)

Figure 7-24. Multi-Bit Communication Protocol Communication Connection



For example, in Figure 7-24, ETMFC610 #2 can communicate with ETMFC610 #1 using Multi-Bit

A protocol, and can communicate with ETMFC610 #3 using Multi-Bit B protocol. (ETMFC610 #1 can communicate using Multi-Bit A protocol, ETMFC610 #3 uses Mult-Bit B protocol)

It means that, Mult-Bit A protocol’s Rx ID on ETMFC610 #1 and Mult-Bit A protocol’s Tx ID on

ETMFC610 #2 must be same, Tx ID and Rx ID have to be equal. Rx ID and Tx ID of Multi-Bit B protocol on ETMFC610 #2 have to be same to the peer things.

The Multi-Bit Protocol checks whether there is communication error by checking error such as

CRC error, ID error and reception error on received data. If a communication error is detected, the received data is ignored. If the received data is recovered to normal, data transmission / reception proceeds normally. When occurring CRC error, ID error and reception error, ETMFC610 records the event and supports the corresponding BI point, so that the master station can monitor the information by remote communication.

2) PLC Configuration Example

The logic names for 8 bits of reception data and 8 bits of transmit data of Multi-Bit Protocol are as follows. Each bit of data is recorded as an event when set ('1') and clear ('0'), and BI point is supported for each data bit, so that information about each bit state can be transmitted to the master station by remote communication.

 Multi-Bit A Protocol

 Reception bit name : RMBA01 ~ RMBA08

 Transmission bit name : TMBA01 ~ TMBA08

 Multi-Bit B Protocol

 Reception bit name : RMBB01 ~ RMBB08

 Transmission bit name : TMBB01 ~ TMBB08

Reception Data PLC Configuration

All the reception data logic can be used as input elements of PLC equation. Please configure reception data logic on PLC equation which will be applied by user.

For example, when Multi-Bit A Protocol’s reception bit 01(RMBA01) is set(‘1’), if open operation is required, please put ‘RMBA01’ logic on External Trip Command(EOPEXT) logic.

EOPEXT = RMBA01



Transmission Data PLC Configuration http://www.entecene.co.kr

All transmission data has PLC equation logic, so the user can configure the data state to send.

For example, if recloser closing status(CLST) wants to be sent to Multi-Bit A Protocol’s transmission bit 01(TMBA01), please put ‘CLST’ on TMBA01 logic. When Recloser is on closing status, transmission bit 01 is set(‘1’) and sent.

TMBA01 = CLST

Figure 7-25. PLC Edit Screen



3) Multi-Bit Protocol Setup http://www.entecene.co.kr

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-

BIT /MULTI-BIT A or MULTI-BIT B” to select setting for Multi-Bit Protocol.

Setting items of “MULT-BIT A” and “MULTI-BIT B” menu are same as following;

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Function


[MULTI-BIT A]

>Function: DISABLE

Port Select:RS232-1

TX ID: 1

RX ID: 2

Comm.Period: 50

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


To use Multi-Bit protocol, set ENABLE.

~

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Port Select

Range RS232-1, RS232-2, RS485, ETH1, ETH2

[MULTI-BIT A]

> Function: DISABLE


TX ID: 1

RX ID: 2

Comm.Period: 50

[RS232/RS485/ETH]

Default RS232-1 Step

Select Multi-Bit procotol communication port.

~

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Tx ID

Range 1 ~ 8

[MULTI-BIT A]

> Function: DISABLE


>TX ID: 1

RX ID: 2

Comm.Period: 50

[1~8 : 1]

Default 1 Step ~

Set the transmission ID. It should be the same as reception ID of the other party.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Rx ID

Range 1 ~ 8

[MULTI-BIT A]

> Function: DISABLE


> TX ID: 1

>RX ID: 2

Comm.Period: 50

[1~8 : 1]

Default 1 Step ~

Set the reception ID. It should be the same as the transmission ID of the other party.



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Comm.Period

Range 10 ~ 60000 msec

[MULTI-BIT A]

> Function: DISABLE


> TX ID: 1

> RX ID: 2

>Comm.Period: 50

[ 10~60000: 1 ms]


Set Multi-Bit protocol communication cycle(period). It should be the same as the other party communication cycle(period).

When the serial communication port is used, the communication cycle is restricted according to the communication baud rate as follows.

 For 1200 bps, the communication cycle must be at least 100 ms.



 For 9600 bps, the communication cycle must be at least 12.5 ms.

 For 19200~115200 bps, no restrictions.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / TCP/UDP Select

Range TCP, UDP

[MULTI-BIT A]


TCP Port: 21000

UDP Port: 21001

> M/S Mode: SLAVE

> Link IP Oct1: 0

[TCP/UDP]

Default TCP Step ~

Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Ethernet port.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / TCP Port

Range 1 ~ 65535

[MULTI-BIT A]

> TCP/UDP Select: TCP

>TCP Port: 21000

UDP Port: 21001

> M/S Mode: SLAVE

> Link IP Oct1: 0

[ 1~65535:1 ]

Default 2100 Step 1

Set the TCP/IP Port number at the use of TCP communication.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / UDP Port

Range 1 ~ 65535

[MULTI-BIT A]


> TCP Port: 21000

>UDP Port: 21001

> M/S Mode: SLAVE

> Link IP Oct1: 0

[ 1~65535:1]

Default 2101 Step 1

Set the UDP Port number at the use of UDP communication.



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / M/S Mode

Range SLAVE, MASTER

[MULTI-BIT A]


> TCP Port: 21000

> UDP Port: 21001

>M/S Mode: SLAVE

> Link IP Oct1: 0

[ SLAVE/MASTER ]

Default SLAVE Step ~

When using TCP or RS485 communication, select Slave or Master mode.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Link IP Oct 1~4

Range 0 ~ 255

[MULTI-BIT A]

>Link IP Oct1: 0

> Link IP Oct2: 0

> Link IP Oct3: 0

> Link IP Oct4: 0

> Link Timeout: 15

[ 0~255: 1 ]

Default 0

IP Address : xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

① ② ③ ④

Step 1

Set other party IP address at the use of Ethernet port.

Link IP Oct 1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Link Timeout


[MULTI-BIT A]

> Link IP Oct1: 0

> Link IP Oct2: 0

> Link IP Oct3: 0

> Link IP Oct4: 0

>Link Timeout: 15

[ 1~60000: 1 ms ]


On Ethernet communication, set the communication link timout time.

If communication link is not established during the set time, it is determined that the communication is disconnected.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / RMB Debounce

Range 1 ~ 100

[MULTI-BIT A]

> Link Timeout: 15

>RMB Debounce: 10

> ID Error Cnt: 10

> CRC Error Cnt: 10

> Rx Error Cnt: 10

[ 1~100: 1 ]

Default 10 Step 1

Set pickup and dropout debounce count of the reception bit.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / ID Error Cnt

Range 1 ~ 100

[MULTI-BIT A]

> Link Timeout: 15

> RMB Debounce: 10

>ID Error Cnt: 10

> CRC Error Cnt: 10

> Rx Error Cnt: 10

[ 1~100: 1 ]

Default

ID Error.

10 Step 1

Set the ID Error Count. If ID is received by this count, it is detected as



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / CRC Error Cnt

Range 1 ~ 100

[MULTI-BIT A]

> Link Timeout: 15

> RMB Debounce: 10

> ID Error Cnt: 10

>CRC Error Cnt: 10

> Rx Error Cnt: 10

[ 1~100: 1 ]

Default 10

Set the CRC Error Count. If CRC error is received by this count, it is detected as CRC error.

Step 1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Rx Error Cnt

Range 1 ~ 100

[MULTI-BIT A]

> Link Timeout: 15

> RMB Debounce: 10

> ID Error Cnt: 10

> CRC Error Cnt: 10

>Rx Error Cnt: 10

[ 1~100: 1 ]

Default 10 Step

Set the Reception Error Count. If the received data is equal to this count, it is detected as reception error.

1



7.2.2. Port Setup


Place the curser on “PORT SETUP” in COMMUNICATIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. ETMFC610 communication port and related elements are set in this menu and it has sub-menu as below.

[PORT SETUP]

>1.RS232-1

2.RS232-2

3.RS485

4.ETHERNET

7.2.2.1. RS232-1 and RS232-2 Ports Setup

ETMFC610 side panel RS232-1 and RS232-2 ports and related elements are set.

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS/ RS232-1” to select setting for RS232-1 port. Also, settings for RS232-2 port are same as below.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS/ RS232-1/ Baud Rate

Range 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps

[RS232-1]

>Baud Rate: 9600

Parity Bit: NONE

Data Bit: 8

Stop Bit: 1

Modem Sel: 4W

[1200 ~ 115200 bps]

Default 9600 Step

Select the baud rate for RS232-1 port.

~

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ Parity Bit

[RS232-1]

> Baud Rate: 9600

>Parity Bit: NONE

Data Bit: 8

Stop Bit: 1

Modem Sel: 4W

[NONE/ODD/EVEN]

Range NONE, ODD, EVEN

Default NONE

Select whether to use Parity Bit.

Step ~



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ Data Bit

[RS232-1]

> Baud Rate: 9600

Parity Bit: NONE

>Data Bit: 8

Stop Bit: 1

Modem Sel: 4W

[7~8:1]

Range 7, 8

Default 8

Select the Data Bit.

Step 1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ Stop Bit

[RS232-1]

> Baud Rate: 9600

Parity Bit: NONE

Data Bit: 8

>Stop Bit: 1

Modem Sel: 4W

[1~2:1]

Range 1, 2

Default 1

Select the Stop Bit.

Step 1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ Modem Sel

Range 2W, 4W, DIAL, NONE

[RS232-1]

> Baud Rate: 9600

Parity Bit: NONE

Data Bit: 8

> Stop Bit: 1

>Modem Sel: 4W

[2W/4W/DIAL/NONE]

Default

Select a modem for communication.

 2W :

4W Step ~

2 wire private line is used and continuously Carrier is monitored to control data flow by DCD(Data Carrier Detect).

 4W : 4 wire private line is used and RTS(Request To Send) and

CTS(clear to Send) signal are used to control data flow.

 DIAL : Dial-Up1 modem is used.

 NONE : Not used.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ CTS Usage


[RS232-1]

>CTS Usage: ENABLE

> DCD Usage: DISABLE

> RTS Usage: AUTO

> CTS CheckOut: 2

> DCD CheckOut: 5000

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

Default



ENABLE

ENABLE :

Asserted.

Step

Select whether to use CTS signal or not.

~

Data is transferred after confirming CTS signal is

 DISABLE : Data is transferred regardless of CTS signal.



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ DCD Usage

[RS232-1]

> CTS Usage: ENABLE

>DCD Usage: DISABLE

> RTS Usage: AUTO

> CTS CheckOut: 2


[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Default DISABLE

Set whether to use DCD signal.

Step ~

 ENABLE : Data is transferred after confirming DCD signal is

Deasserted.

 DISABLE : Data is transferred regardless of DCD signal

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ RTS Usage

Range OFF, ON, AUTO

[RS232-1]

> CTS Usage: ENABLE


>RTS Usage: AUTO

> CTS CheckOut: 2


[OFF/ON/AUTO]

Default







ON :

AUTO Step ~

RTS signal of ETMFC610 is always ON(Assert).

OFF : RTS signal of ETMFC610 is always OFF(Deassert).

AUTO : On requesting data transfer to Modem, after RTS signal of

ETMFC610 is on and after data transfer completion, RTS signal of

ETMFC610 is off.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ CTS CheckOut

Range 1 ~ 255 sec

[RS232-1]

> CTS Usage: ENABLE


> RTS Usage: AUTO

>CTS CheckOut: 2


[1~255:1s]


Set a waiting time that waits Modems confirmation on RTS signal which informs that ETMFC610 is ready to transfer a data. If there is no

CTS response within a set time, RTU confirms CTS Fail and does not transfer the data.

It is available if ‘CTS Usage’ setting is ON.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ DCD BackOffDly

[RS232-1]

> CTS Usage: ENABLE


> RTS Usage: AUTO

> CTS CheckOut: 2

>DCD BackOffDly:5000

[10~30000:10ms]



Set a delay time of DCD signal checks which determine modem status before sending RTS signal in 2 wire communication type. After a set time, if DCD signal is ON, ETMFC610 does not transfer the data and treat it as DCD Fail. It is available if ‘DCD Usage’ setting is ON.



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ TX PreDelay


[RS232-1]

>TX PreDelay: 50

> TX PostDelay: 10

> BackOffRandom: OFF

[0~20000:1ms]


Set a tx post-delay time. It delayed RTS off after TX finished.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ TX PostDelay


[RS232-1]

> TX PreDelay: 50

>TX PostDelay: 10

> BackOffRandom: OFF

[0~20000:1ms]


Set a tx post-delay time. It delayed RTS off after TX finished.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ BackOffRandom

Range 0(OFF) 1~ 65535 msec

[RS232-1]

TX PreDelay: 10

TX PostDelay: 50

>BackOffRandom: OFF

[0(OFF),1~65535:1ms]

Default OFF

Set random back off time.

Step 1 msec

7.2.2.2. RS485 Port Setup

Related elements with RS485 port in side panel of ETMFC610 are set. Move to “MAIN MENU/

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS/ RS485” to select setting for RS485 port.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS485/ Baud Rate

Range 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps

[RS485]

>Baud Rate: 9600

Parity Bit: NONE

Data Bit: 8

Stop Bit: 1

CA Delay: 1.00

[1200 ~ 115200 bps]

Default 9600

Select the baud rate for RS485 port.

Step ~



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS485/ Parity Bit

[RS485]

> Baud Rate: 9600

>Parity Bit: NONE

Data Bit: 8

Stop Bit: 1

CA Delay: 1.00

[NONE/ODD/EVEN]

Range NONE, ODD, EVEN

Default NONE Step

Set whether to use Parity Bit, and set a type.

~

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS485/ Data Bit

[RS485]

> Baud Rate: 9600

Parity Bit: NONE

>Data Bit: 8

Stop Bit: 1

CA Delay: 1.00

[7~8:1]

Range 7, 8

Default 8

Select the Data Bit.

Step 1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS485/ Stop Bit

Range 1, 2

[RS485]

> Baud Rate: 9600

Parity Bit: NONE

Data Bit: 8

>Stop Bit: 1

CA Delay: 1.00

[1~2:1]

Default 1

Select the Stop Bit.

Step 1

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS485/ CA Delay

Range 0.00 ~ 240.00

[RS485]

> Baud Rate: 9600

> Parity Bit: NONE

Data Bit: 8

Stop Bit: 1

>CA Delay: 1.00

[0.00~240.00:0.01]


Set a delay time from data received till transferring a reply data.



7.2.2.3. EHTERNET Port Setup


Related elements with Eth1 and Eth2 ports in side panel of ETMFC610 are set Move to “MAIN

MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS/ ETHERNET” to select setting.

Eth1 and Eth2 ports are applied with the same settings as below.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET/ IP Addr Oct1 ~ 4

[ETHERNET]

>IP Addr Oct1: 0

IP Addr Oct2: 0

IP Addr Oct3: 0

> IP Addr Oct4: 0

> Gateway Oct1: 0

[0~255:1]

Range 0 ~ 255

Default 0* Step 1

Select the IP Address for ETMFC610 ethernet port.

IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx

② ② ③ ④

IP Addr ´ 1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④


GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET/ Gateway Oct1 ~ 4

Range 0 ~ 255

[ETHERNET]

>Gateway Oct1: 0

Gateway Oct2: 0

Gateway Oct3: 0

> Gateway Oct4: 0

[0~255:1]

Default 0*

Select the Gateway Address.

Gateway Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx

① ② ③ ④

Step 1

Gateway Addr ´ 1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④


GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET/ Subnet Mask Oct1 ~ 4

Range 0 ~ 255

[ETHERNET]

>SubnetMask Oct1: 0

SubnetMask Oct2: 0

> SubnetMask Oct3: 0

> SubnetMask Oct4: 0

[0~255:1]

Default 0* Step

Subnet Mask Address : 255.xxx.xxx.xxx

① ② ③ ④

1

Select the Subnet Mask Address for ETMFC610 ethernet port.

Subnet Mask Addr ´ 1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④




GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET/ K-Alv Function

[ETHERNET]

>K-Alv Func: ENABLE

> K-Alv Idle T: 4.00

K-Alv Interval: 2

> K-Alv Retry: 3

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Default ENABLE

Select whether to use or not the Ethernet communication connecting status check function.

Step ~

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET/ K-Alv Idle Time

[ETHERNET]

> K-Alv Func: ENABLE

>K-Alv Idle T: 4.00

K-Alv Interval: 2

> K-Alv Retry: 3

[0(OFF),1~600:1s]


Default 4 Step 1sec

If Idle status is maintained during the setting time, check the communication connecting maintainance status.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET/ K-Alv Interval


[ETHERNET]



>K-Alv Interval: 2

> K-Alv Retry: 3

[0(OFF),1~600:1s]

Default 2 Step 1sec

After checking the communication connecting status, if there isn’t any reply during the setting time, check again the status.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET/ K-Alv Retry

Range 0~255

[ETHERNET]



K-Alv Interval: 2

>K-Alv Retry: 3

[0~255:1]

Default 3 Step and close the communication connection.

1

Check the communication connecting maintainance status as much as the setting number. If there isn’t a respond, take as communication fail



7.2.3. RTU Communication (Dialup Modem) Setup

ETMFC610 can support dial-up modem communication, Hayes-compatible, through RS232-1 port and RS232-2 when their port types are both RS232.

7.2.3.1. Configure modem with AT commands

Before using Modem connected with ETMFC610, following setting shall be confirmed.

Configure port speed(must be done)

Set DNP communication speed the same as the speed between ETMFC610 and Modem, and set

DNP communication speed slower than the speed between modems.

Configure answer mode(frequently)

The modem will answer an incoming call on the second ring using the command ATS0=2 .

Configure Data Carrier Detect(must be done)

Data Carrier Detect should follow the presence or absence of a calling modem.

The AT command is AT&C1 .

Configure Data Terminal Ready(must be done)

Data Terminal Ready should control the modem. If DTR is high, the modem is ready to receive calls. If DTR is low, the modem should not receive any more calls and should hang up any existing call.

The AT command is AT&D2 .

Configure Data Set Ready(must be done)

Data Set Ready should verify the modem. DSR is always ON.

The AT command is AT&S0 .

Configure no CONNECT messages(must be done)

A Hayes AT-style modem usually outputs a message when a call is received. For example:

CONNECT 9600

The modem has a "quiet mode" that disables these messages.

The AT command is ATQ1 . There will be no OK printed in response to this command.



Configure no echo of commands(must be done) http://www.entecene.co.kr

Echoing commands can confuse the console, so turn off command echoing.

The AT command is ATE0 .

Configure silent connection(must be done)

Most modems have a speaker. By default this is connected whilst a modem is connecting and negotiating a common protocol and speed. This is very useful for a dialing modem, as it prevents a human being accidentally repeatedly called. The speaker can be annoying on answering modems.

The AT command is ATM1 .

7.2.3.2. Operation functions when to use Dialing Modem

Transmitting a Communication Packet

 Checks DCD is asserted(Check Online)

 The Communication packet is transmitted

※ . Dial when DCD is Deassert

Receiving a Communication Packet

 Checks DCD is asserted(Check Online)

 The Communication packet is received

※ . if DCD is Deassert, receiving is not working.

Dialing

 The user should insert an order for Reset.

 Wait 0.5 second

 Make a phone call by using Dialing String and Dialing Number.

 Checks DCD is Asserted

※ . Dial connection waiting time is depending on “ Data Link Timeout” set by the user.



Hang up

 DTR Line is deasserted

 Wait 2 second

 DTR Line is asserted

 Wait 2 second http://www.entecene.co.kr

※ . ETMFC610 will hang up the modem after a delay of 30 seconds with no valid packet received or transmitted.

7.2.3.3. Dialup Modem Setup

Place the curser on “DIALUP MODEM” in COMMUNICATION menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

[DIALUP MODEM]

>1.DIALUP MODEM 1

2.DIALUP MODEM 2

[DIALUP MODEM 1]

>1.CALLING STRING

2.CALLING NUMBER

3.INITIAL STRING

4.CONNECTION

The settings for the dialup modem are shown below;

1) Calling String

In order to set “Calling String”, move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/

COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ DIALUP MODEM 1/ CALLING STRING”

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CALLING STRING

Range ATD, ATDT, ATDP

[CALLING STRING]

>CS: ATD

[! ~ z]

Default

Set to use Dial-Up modem use. Select a dial string one among them.

 ATD

ATD Step ~

: Default Dial Type(Already set in modem(Default Dial type)

 ATDT : Tone Dial

 ATDP : Pulse Dial



2) Calling Number http://www.entecene.co.kr

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIAL MODEM/ DIALUP

MODEM 1/ CALLING NUMBER”

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CALLING NUMBER

Range ~

[CALLING NUMBER]

>CN:0123456789XXXXXX

[! ~ z]

Default ~ shall be filled up by ‘X’.

Step ~

Insert call number to call to. [Modem(Master station) phone number].

Total 16 digits shall be used from the first digit space and empty space

3) Initial String

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/

DIALUP MODEM 1/ INITIAL STRING”

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ INITIAL STRING

Range ~

[INITIAL STRING]

>IS: AT&C1 Q1 E0 M0

&D2 +CRM=129

[space ~ z]

Default

AT&C1 Q1 E0 M0

&D2 +CRM=129 character, space or special character.

Step ~

Modem can be initialized by inserting total 30 figures of number,

ETMFC610 should be reset before making a phone call(connection).

NOTE : Continuous double Space or ‘/’ shall ignore next String.



4) Connection http://www.entecene.co.kr

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/

DIALUP MODEM 1/ CONNECTION”

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Cmd Res’ TO

Range 0 ~ 255 sec

[CONNECTION]

>Cmd Res’ TO: 2

Connect TO: 30

Idle Time: 60

[0~255:1s]

Default 2 Step

Setting the Command response waiting time.

1 sec

If there is no response from a modem during setting time, it is considered as a communication failure after the setting time and the status of modem failure is maintained.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Connect TO

Range 0 ~ 255 sec

[CONNECTION]

> Cmd Res’ TO: 2

>Connect TO: 30

Idle Time: 60

[0~255:1s]

Default 30

If there is no connection during setting time, it is considered as a connection failure as the status of modem failure is maintained for the setting time

Step

Setting the Modem connection waiting time.

1 sec

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Idle Time

Range 0 ~ 255 sec

[CONNECTION]

Cmd Res’ TO: 2

Connect TO: 30

>Idle Time: 60

[0~255:1s]

Default 60 Step

Setting the Command response waiting time.

1 sec

If there is no response from a modem during setting time, it is considered as a communication failure after the setting time and the status of modem failure is maintained.



7.2.4. FTP-SSL


Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP-SSL to file transfer in order to configure protocol SSL.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP-SSL / Function

[FTP-SSL]

>Function: DISABLE

Admin PW: 00000000

User1 PW: 00000000

[0~255:1s]

Range DISABLE / ENABLE


Set whether FTP-SSL Function is used or not.

-

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/FTP-SSL/Admin PW

[FTP-SSL]

Function: DISABLE

>Admin PW: 00000000

User1 PW: 00000000

[0~z]

Range 0 ~ z

Default 0 Step ~

Set the administer password for FTP-SSL.

Administer’s log-in account name is ‘entec_admin’ with read and write authority.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP-SSL/User1 PW

[FTP-SSL]

Function: DISABLE

Admin PW: 00000000

>User1 PW: 00000000

[0~z]

Range 0 ~ z

Default 0

Set the user password for FTP-SSL.

Step ~

User 1’s log-in account name is ‘entec_user1’with read-only authority.



7.2.5. Wifi

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI” to set related Wifi.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/WiFi SSID

[WIFI]

>WiFi SSID:00000000

WiFi P/W: 00000000

SSID Hidden: ON

[0~z]

Range 0 ~ z

Default Lower 8 digits of Serial

Number

Step ~

Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wifi for Wifi access.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/ WiFi P/W

Range 0 ~ z

[WIFI]

WiFi SSID:00000000

>WiFi P/W: 00000000

SSID Hidden: ON

[0~z]

Default ab3456dc

For wifi access, set WIFI password.

Step ~

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/ SSID Hidden

Range OFF, ON

[WIFI]

WiFi SSID:00000000

WiFi P/W: 00000000

>SSID Hidden: ON

[0~z]

Default ON Step ~

For selecting whether WIFI SSID is visible or not



7.2.6. Event & Etc Setup


Place the curser on “EVENT&ETC” in COMMUNICATIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. In this menu, sets the items used in common among ETMFC610 communication protocol setting items.

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC SETUP” to select setting for EVENT&ETC SETUP.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AEvt Method

[EVENT&ETC SETUP]

>AEvt Method: OFF

AEvt Skip at Ft: NO

Daily Max I:DISABLE

Flt ‘I’ Evt: 1SHOT

BI EvtBuff Size:256

[OFF/TH/DB/BOTH]

Range OFF, TH, DB, BOTH

Default OFF Step ~

This setting value is applied only to the AI point with vitalized “Event

Active: in DNP point map.

 OFF : AI point event is not occurred.

 TH : Event is occurred when the AI point data is over or less than

Threshold value.

 DB : AEvent is occurred when the AI data change value is over the

Deadband value

 BOTH : TH and DB all used.

 Use ETMFC610 interface program to setting the “Event Active” activation or desactivation of AI point, the Threshold value and

Deadband value.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AEvt Skip at Ft

Range NO, YES

[EVENT&ETC SETUP]

> AEvt Method: OFF

>AEvt Skip at Ft: NO

Daily Max I:DISABLE


BI EvtBuff Size:256

[NO/YES]

Default NO

Determine whether Threshold during Fault pickup. and

Step ~

Deadband AI event is generated



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Daily Max I

[EVENT&ETC SETUP]

> AEvt Method: OFF

AEvt Skip at Ft: NO

>Daily Max I:DISABLE


BI EvtBuff Size:256

[DISABLE/ENABLE]



Select the [DISABLE/ENABLE] of Daily Maximum Load Current transmission.

 DISABLE : Do not process Daily Maximum Load Current Event..

 ENABLE : Process Daily Maximum Load Current.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Flt ‘I’ Evt

Range NO, YES, 1SHOT

[EVENT&ETC SETUP]

> AEvt Method: OFF

AEvt Skip at Ft: NO

> Daily Max I:DISABLE

>Flt ‘I’ Evt: 1SHOT

BI EvtBuff Size:256

[NO/YES/1SHOT]

Default 1SHOT Step related with fault such as fault current.

~

When occurring fault, set whether or not record AI point which is

 NO : Do not send the all Fault Current Sequence to Event.

 YES : Send all Fault Current Sequence to Event.

 1SHOT : Send the first Sequence Fault Current of Fault Sequence to Event.

NOTE :

The Fault Current occurrence time of each Sequence is when it becomes no voltage after experience the Fault Current.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / BI EvtBuff Size

Range 32, 64, 128, 256

[EVENT&ETC SETUP]

> AEvt Method: OFF

AEvt Skip at Ft: NO

Daily Max I:DISABLE

> Flt ‘I’ Evt: 1SHOT

>BI EvtBuff Size:256

[32/64/128/256]

Default 256

Set the Binary Queue Size

Step ~



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI EvtBuff Size

[EVENT&ETC SETUP]

>AI EvtBuff Size:256

CI EvtBuff Size:256

BI Evt Method: ALL

AI Evt Method: ALL

> CI Evt Method: ALL

> [32/64/128/256]

Range 32, 64, 128, 256

Default 256

Set the Binary Queue Size

Step ~

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/EVENT&ETC/ CI EvtBuff Size

[EVENT&ETC SETUP]

> AI EvtBuff Size:256

>CI EvtBuff Size:256

BI Evt Method: ALL

AI Evt Method: ALL

CI Evt Method: ALL

[32/64/128/256]

Range 32, 64, 128, 256

Default 256

Set the binary event mode.

Step ~

 ALL : all status is buffed for same point.

 LAST : Only last event is buffed for same point.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION / EVENT&ETC / BI Evt Method

[EVENT&ETC SETUP]


CI EvtBuff Size:256

>BI Evt Method: ALL

AI Evt Method: ALL

CI Evt Method: ALL

[ALL/LAST]

Range ALL, LAST

Default ALL

Set the analog event mode.

Step ~

 ALL : all analog is buffed for same point.


GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ AI Evt Method

Range ALL, LAST

[EVENT&ETC SETUP]


CI EvtBuff Size:256

BI Evt Method: ALL

>AI Evt Method: ALL

CI Evt Method: ALL

[ALL/LAST]

Default

Set the analog event mode.

 ALL :

ALL Step all analog is buffed for same point.

~




GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / CI Evt Method

[EVENT&ETC SETUP]


CI EvtBuff Size:256

> BI Evt Method: ALL

AI Evt Method: ALL

>CI Evt Method: ALL

[ALL/LAST]

Range ALL, LAST

Default ALL

Set the counter event mode.

Step ~

 ALL : all counter is buffed for same point.


GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / DO Cmd at Local

[EVENT&ETC SETUP]

> AI Evt Method: ALL


>DO Cmd at Local:OFF

> Time Syn’ Ref:LOCAL

> Time Tag Type:LOCAL

[ALL/LAST]

Range OFF,ON

Default OFF Step ~

Set whether or not to control DO command on local control status.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Time Syn’ Ref

[EVENT&ETC SETUP]



> DO Cmd at Local:OFF

>Time Syn’ Ref:LOCAL

> Time Tag Type:LOCAL

[LOCAL/GMT]

Range LOCAL,GMT

Default LOCAL Step ~

Set Reference Time Type. It signifies the time data type when Time

Synching with the master station.

NOTE :

This setting is set to be GMT and the setting values associated with UTC(in “TIME ZONE” menu) are set up incorrectly, the time internal clock in ETMFC610 can be changed incorrectly at time synchronization.



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Time Tag Type

[EVENT&ETC SETUP]



> DO Cmd at Local:OFF

> Time Syn’ Ref:LOCAL

>Time Tag Type:LOCAL

[LOCAL/GMT]

Range LOCAL,GMT

Default LOCAL Step ~

Set the time type for occurred events in Communication.

NOTE :

This setting is set to be UTC and the setting values associated with GMT(in “TIME ZONE” menu) are set up incorrectly, the time of event transmitted is not correct.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / CI Frz Period

Range 0(OFF), 0~60000m

[COMMON]

CI Evt Method: ALL

DO Cmd at Local:OFF

Time Syn’ Ref:LOCAL

Time Tag Type:LOCAL

>CI Frz Period: OFF

[0(OFF),0~60000:1m]

Default OFF

Set freeze period of CI points.

Step 1minute

7.2.7. Save Setting

This menu allows you to save the changed settings of the GENERAL menu. The procedure for storing the set value is described in “6.3.4. Setting Save” .



8. GROUP SETTING


Place the curser on “GROUP SETTING” in MAIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

[GROUP SETTING]

>1.GROUP 1

2.GROUP 2

3.GROUP 3

4.GROUP 4

5.GROUP 5

6.GROUP 6

The GROUP SETTING menu has six identical subgroup settings. The setting group which is turned on "SET GROUP" LED is applied to the ETMFC610. The [GROUP SELECT] button is used to select a set group applied to present ETMFC610. Please refer to the explanation of

“ GROUP SELECT ” button in “6.1.2. Local Control Section” for procedure of changing the set group locally.

[GROUP 1]

>1.FAULT INDICATION

2.PROTECTION

3.DIRECTION

4.COLD LOAD PICKUP

5.MONITORING

*.SAVE SETTING



All set groups have the same submenus. Each set group is classified into FAULT INDICATION,

PROTECTION, DIRECTION, COLD LOAD PICKUP and MONITORING sub menus.

When set to “Fault Indication type(FITYPE” type in “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING /

GENERAL / DEVICE / CONTROL TYPE” , “PROTECTION” menu is not operated.

But, when set to “Protection type(PROTYPE) ” type, “FAULT INDICATION” menu is not operated.



8.1. Fault Indication


Place the curser on “FAULT INDICATION” in GROUP# menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. This menu sets the fault indication element that operate when the fault indication control type(FITYPE) is set.

[FAULT INDICATION]

>1.FI TYPE

> 2.FI PICKUP CURRENT

3.FI SETTING TIME

4.INRUSH RESTRAINT

8.1.1. FI Type

This menu sets the detection type of fault indication(FI). According to this setting, the fault indication detection method is applied differently.

GROUP # / FAULT INDICTION / FI TYPE / Type Select

Range IV, I

[FI TYPE]

>Type Select: IV

[IV/I]

Default IV Step

Select the type of FI(fault indicator) detection.

~

 IV : If dead line state after experiencing a fault current, FI is detected.

When using the Autop Sectionalizer (SEC) function in the Loop

Control menu, the FI Type setting must be "IV" for correct Auto

Sectionalizer operation.

 I : If fault current maintains during the fault delay time(Type I delay), FI is detected.

*. NOTE ) See “8.1.3.

FI Setting Time” for details on FI Types.



8.1.2. FI Pickup Current


This menu sets fault pickup current for fault indication (FI). Fault pickup current is individually set for Phase, Ground, Sensitive Earth Fault and Negative sequence current.

GROUP # / FAULT INDICTION / PICKUP CURRENT / Phase

[PICKUP CURRENT]

>Phase: 500

Ground: 250

SEF: OFF

NEG Seq’: OFF

[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]

Range 0(OFF), 10~1600A

Default 500 Step 1

Set the minimum pickup current to detect phase fault indication.

The 'PROTECTION ENABLED' LED on the front panel must be ON for a phase fault indication(FI).

GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / PICKUP CURRENT / Ground


[PICKUP CURRENT]

> Phase: 500

>Ground: 250

SEF: OFF

NEG Seq’: OFF

[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]

Default 250 Step 1

Set the minimum pickup current to detect ground fault indication.

The 'PROTECTION ENABLED' and 'GROUND ENABLED' LEDs on the front panel must be ON for a ground fault indication (FI).

GROUP # / FAULT INDICTION / PICKUP CURRENT / SEF

Range 0(OFF), 0.1~160.0A

[PICKUP CURRENT]

> Phase: 600

Ground: 250

>SEF: OFF

> NEG Seq’: OFF

[0(OFF),0.1~160.0A]

Default OFF

Set the minimum pickup current to detect sensitive earth fault indication.

Step 1

The 'PROTECTION ENABLED', 'GROUND ENABLED' and 'SEF

ENABLED' LEDs on the front panel must be ON for a sensitive earth fault indication (FI).

GROUP # / FAULT INDICTION / PICKUP CURRENT / NEG Seq’

[PICKUP CURRENT]

> Phase: 600

Ground: 250

SEF: OFF

>NEG Seq’: OFF

[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]


Default OFF Step 1

Set the minimum pickup current to detect negative sequence fault indication.

The 'PROTECTION ENABLED' LED on the front panel must be ON for a negative sequential fault indication (FI).



Phase Fault Direction

= Phase Direction Set

(None, For. or Rev.)

FLTPA

CURRENT INPUT

Phase A

≥ Phase Pickup Set

Dropout delay

Temporary FI Time

Dropout delay

Temporary FI Time

FLTPB

CURRENT INPUT

Phase B


Dropout delay

Temporary FI Time

FLTPC

CURRENT INPUT

Phase C


≥ Neg Seq

＇

Pickup Set

Dropout delay

Temporary FI Time

FLTPQ

NEQ Fault Direction

= NEQ Direction Set


CURRENT INPUT

Ground

≥ Ground Pickup Set

Dropout delay

Temporary FI Time

FLTPG

Ground Fault Direction

= Ground Direction Set


CURRENT INPUT

SEF

≥ SEF Pickup Set

Dropout delay

Temporary FI Time

FLTPS

SEF Fault Direction

= SEF Direction Set


Figure 8-1.

Fault Pickup Logic Diagram

8.1.3. FI Setting Time

This menu sets the delay times for fault indication(FI) detection.

GROUP # / FAULT INDICTION / FI SETTING TIME / Permanent

Range 1~180 sec

[FI SETTING TIME]

>Permanent: 20

Temporary: 2

Type I delay: 0.03

[1~180:1sec]

Default 20 sec 1

Set delay time for Permanent Fault Detection. In case FI Type is ‘IV’

Type, this setting is applied.

Step

GROUP # / FAULT INDICTION / FI SETTING TIME / Temporary

Range 1~180 sec

[FI SETTING TIME]

> Permanent: 20

>Temporary: 2

Type I delay: 0.03

[1~180:1sec]

Default 2 sec

Type, this setting is applied.

Step 1

Set delay time for Temporary Fault Detection. In case FI Type is ‘IV’


27BL1

27BL2

FLTPA

FLTPB

FLTPC

FLTPG

FLTPS

FLTPQ


GROUP # / FAULT INDICTION / FI SETTING TIME / Type I delay

[FI SETTING TIME]

> Permanent: 20

Temporary: 2

>Type I delay: 0.03

[0.03~180:0.01sec]

Range

Default

0.01~180.00 sec

0.03 sec Step 1

Set delay time for Fault Detection in ‘I’ FI Type.

There are ‘VI’ Type and ‘I’ Type of FI Detect Mode. The description for each type follows;

1) ‘IV’ FI Type

Fault Indicator has PERMANENT mode and TEMPORARY mode, it operates depending upon a fault of Current and Voltage.

After a Line fault(C/B Trip), Fault Indicator is ready to operate. After C/B connection, if the fault disappears, Temporary FI operates after a certain time and Permanent FI is RESET.

After C/B connection, if the fault remains(C/B TRIP), after a certain time, it is figured as permanent fault, Permanent FI operates and Temporary FI is reset.

PERMANENT mode shall have enough Permanent Set Time considering cycle of C/B reclosing.

FLTPA

FLTPB

FLTPC

FLTPG

FLTPS

FLTPQ

LATCH

RESET

FLTA

FLTB

FLTC

FLTG

FLTS

FLTQ

A LAMP

B LAMP

C LAMP

G LAMP

SEF LAMP

FI RESET

COMMAND

RESET

LATCH

27BD1

27BD2

27BL1

27BL2

RDYSP

PERMANENT

SETTING TIME

TEMPORARY

SETTING TIME

PFIS

TFIS

Figure 8-2. Fault Indication Logic Diagram(FI type : VI)



Figure 8-3. Fault Indication Algorithm(FI type : VI)



2) ‘I’ FI Type http://www.entecene.co.kr

Fault Indicator operates depending upon a fault Current and fault duration. If fault current maintains during ‘Type I delay’ time, FI operates.

Figure 8-4. Fault Indication Logic Diagram(FI type : I)

Figure 8-5. Fault Indication Algorithm(FI type : I)



8.1.4. Inrush Restraint


ETMFC610 has inrush restraint function to prevent the malfunction by inrush current produced at the restoration of load supply. Inrush restraint function setting can be set separately in phase, ground, sensitive earth fault and negative sequence during the inrush time after the restoration of load supply, FI(fault indicator) about phase, ground, sensitive earth fault and negative sequence is not detected.

According to setting of “Make use ‘I’” , the condition to decide the restoration of load supply will be changed. If “YES” is set, the decision is made when the load current becomes over 0.2% of the rated current. If “NO” is set, the decision is made when the switch is closed (52A) and live line status.

8.1.4.1. Inrush Restraint Setup

‘INRUSH RESTRAINT’ menu is sub-divided as follow;

[INRUSH RESTRAINT]

>1.INRUSH DURATION T

2.OTHERS

1) Inrush Duration Time

GROUP # / FAULT INDICTION / INRUSH RESTRAINT / INRUSH DURATION T / Phase

Range 0.00~600.00 sec

[INRUSH DURATION T]

>Phase: 2.00

Ground: 2.00

SEF: 2.00

Neg Seq’: 2.00

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Default 2.00 of load supply.

Step

Set the block time for inrush current of phase.

0.01sec

Phase fault is not detected during this setting time after the restoration

*. NOTE ) Setting for Ground, SEF and Neg Seq’ are same as Phase setting above.



2) Other Setup http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / FAULT INDICTION / INRUSH RESTRAINT / INRUSH DURATION T / OTHERS / Make Use ‘I’

Range NO, YES

[OTHERS]

>Make Use ‘I’: NO

[NO/YES]

Default

Set whether or not to use current as decision condition for operating function.



NO Step ~

When it sets to NO, the inrush current restraint interval becomes active the switch is closed (52A) and live line status.

 When it set to YES, when the current increases above 2A, the inrush current restraint interval is active.

8.1.5. FI Auto Reset

ETMFC610 has a function to automatically reset fault indicator target (front panel lamp y communication BI points, etc.) after detecting fault current and when line is restored normally. The configuration as like below;

GROUP # / FAULT INDICTION / FI Auto Reset / Reset Mode

Range OFF/TEMP/PERM/ALL

[FI AUTO RESET]

>Reset Mode: OFF

ResetTime: 10.00

[OFF/TEMP/PERM/ALL]

Default





OFF

OFF

TEMP

Step

: FI Auto Reset is not used.

~

It configures if FI Auto Reset will be used or no.

: Auto Reset is applied when Temporary fault is detected on

‘IV’ FI Type.

 PERM : Auto Reset is applied when Permanent fault is detected on ‘IV’ FI Type.

 ALL : Auto Reset is applied when all the types of fault current are detected on ‘IV’ FI Type and ‘I’ FI Type.

GROUP # / FAULT INDICTION / FI Auto Reset / Reset Time

Range 0.01~600.00:0.01s

[FI AUTO RESET]

> Reset Mode: OFF

>Reset Time: 10.00

[0.01~600.00:0.01s]

Default 10.00 Step

Reset time is applied about FI Auto Reset.

0.01s

After voltage comes back to live line, when the setting value is maintained during setting time, FI will be reset automatically.



8.2. Protection


Place the curser on “PROTECTION” in GROUP# menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. This menu sets the protection elements that operate when the protection control type(PROTYPE) is set.

[RECLOSER]

>1.TIME OC-PHA

2.TIME OC-GND

3.TIME OC-NEQ

4.INST OC-PHA

5.INST OC-GND

6.INST OC-SEF

7.INST OC-NEQ

> 8.INRUSH RESTRAINT

9.USER CURVE

Protection Elements - ANSI Designations

In case of Protection control type, the protection elements are as follows;

Table 8-1. Protection Elements -ANSI Designations

Protective Elements

Phase time overcurrent

ANSI

Designations

51P

LCD Menu

GROUP SETTING / ... / PROTECTION / TIME OC-PHA

Ground time overcurrent

Negative sequence time overcurrent

Phase instantaneous overcurrent

Ground instantaneous overcurrent

Sensitive Earth Fault protection

Negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent

Inrush restraint

Cold load pickup

Phase directional time control

Ground directional time control

Sensitive Earth Fault directional time control

Negative sequence directional time control

51G

51Q(46)

50P

50G

50SG

GROUP SETTING / ... / PROTECTION / TIME OC-GND

GROUP SETTING / ... / PROTECTION / TIME OC-NEQ

GROUP SETTING / ... / PROTECTION / INST OC-PHA

GROUP SETTING / ... / PROTECTION / INST OC-GND

GROUP SETTING / ... / PROTECTION / INST OC-SEF

50Q(46)-1 GROUP SETTING / ... / PROTECTION / INST OC -NEQ

CLPU-1 GROUP SETTING / ... / PROTECTION / INRUSH RESTRAINT

CLPU-2

67P

67G

67SG

67Q

GROUP SETTING / ... / COLD LOAD PICKUP

GROUP SETTING / ... / DIRECTION / PHASE

GROUP SETTING / ... / DIRECTION / GROUND

GROUP SETTING / ... / DIRECTION / SEF

GROUP SETTING / ... / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ



Protection Elements Block Diagram - ANSI Designations

Figure 8-6.

Protection Elements Block Diagram

All overcurrent protection function consist of dual-elements ((+) and (-)) of individual operations.

It can be operated in several ways depending on the configuration of the line system and the user's request. Several application example of dual overcurrent protection elements are as follows;

1) Ring Line System Application

By using directional elements and dual overccurent protection elements ((+) and (-)), it is possible to protect simultaneously both sides of the source line on ring line system operation. After setting the directional type as forward, when using the dual-elements (function is set to ENABLE), The (+) element does fault protection about the forward direction and the (-) element does the fault protection about the reverse direction.



The (+) element operates as the setting type of the directional element, and the (-) element operates as the opposite direction to the setting type of the directional element. If the type of the directional element is set as NONE, the (+) and (-) elements operate simultaneously regardless of the direction of the fault.

Figure 8-7.

Ring Line System Application

2) Radial Line System Application

When working in a radial line system, the directional element does not work and only one of the

(+) or (-) elements is used. ((+) element is recommended)

Figure 8-8.

Radial Line System Application

3) Overcurrent Alarm elements Application

In the case of time overcurrent function, each element can be used for trip or alarm purposes. Thus, one of the dual overcurrent protection elements can be operated as the trip element and another one is operated as the alarm element.



8.2.1. Phase Time Overcurrent (51P)


The ETMFC610 has a phase time overcurrent element that decides whether it is overcurrent or not using the phase current of CT second. The phase time overcurrent element offers the trip lag time that accords to the fault current due to the set value applied inverse time curve such as pickup current, applied T-C curve, applied T-C curve's time dial, applied T-C curve's time adder, minimum response time(M.R.T), fault reset method and low set definite time. Due to the inverse characteristic of this applied T-C characteristics, the trip operates slowly if the fault current is low and the trip operates faster as the fault current gets bigger(only, the current should be higher than the phase pickup current setting value in to operate the trip). The phase time overcurrent element is enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel.

The phase time overcurrent element can do smooth protection cooperation with other protection elements of ETMFC610 and external devices of the power supply system each, due to various T-C curves, time dial and time adder. The ETMFC610 provides ANSI curve, IEC curve, ES curve and non-standardized T-C curve.

There are two types of overcurrent fault reinstation(reset) methods: instantaneous and linear mode.

The reinstation method for the linear mode is applied with operating the ANSI, IEC, ES and USER curve. The reinstation method for the instantaneous mode is used for the cooperation with devices that do instantaneous reinstation such as the CB inside the power supplying system or other protection element. In the instantaneous reinstation method, the phase time overcurrent element is immediately reset when the current measured for one cycle drops below the phase pickup current setting value. In the linear reinstation method, the CB is used for the cooperation with the protection devices that demand lag time for reinstation like the mechanical relays.

Figure 8-9. Phase Time Overcurrent(51P) Logic Diagram



At the restoration of load supply, the phase time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a period specified the inrush restraint function.

‘Time OC-PHASE’ menu is sub-divided as follow:

[TIME OC-PHA]

>1.(+)TIME OC-PHA

2.(-)TIME OC-PHA

Following setting is used to program the Time Overcurrent - PHASE element.

1) (+) TIME OC-PHA Setup

(+) TIME OC-PHA setting menu is available for setting (+) Phase time overcurrent protection

Curve.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-PHA / (+)TIME OC-PHA / Function

Range DISABLE, TRIP, TR&AL, ALARM

[(+)TIME OC-PHA]

>Function: TRIP

Pickup: 500

Curve: [US-VI]

> Time Dial: 1.00

Time Add.: 0.00

[DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]

Default TRIP

Set the function of

Step -

(+) Phase time overcurrent

If function = DISABLE,

If function = Trip(TR), as enable or disable.

the feature is not operational.

the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip condition, the device trips.

If function = Alarm(AL), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts an alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.

If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives the alarm..

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-PHA / (+)TIME OC-PHA / Pickup

Range 10 ~ 1600A

[(+)TIME OC-PHA]

Function: ENABLE

>Pickup: 500

Curve: [US-VI]

> Time Dial: 1.00

Time Add.: 0.00

[10~1600:1A]

Default 500A

Set pickup current of

Step 1A

(+) Phase time overcurrent element.



GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-PHA / (+)TIME OC-PHA / Curve

[(+)TIME OC-PHA]

Function: ENABLE

Pickup: 500

>Curve: [US-VI]

> Time Dial: 1.00

Time Add.: 0.00

[Curves : total 62]

Range A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)

Default US-VI

Select desired curve type for (+) Phase time overcurrent element.

The T-C curves supported by the ETMFC610 are as follows;

 US

US-NI : US Normally Inverse

US-VI : US Very Inverse

US-EI : US Extremely Inverse

US-STI : US Short Time Inverse

US-STVI : US Short Time Very Inverse

 ANSI /IEEE

IEEE-NI : ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse

IEEE-VI : ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse

IEEE-EI : ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse

 IEC

IEC-NI : IEC Normally Inverse

IEC-VI : IEC Very Inverse

IEC-EI : IEC Extremely Inverse

IEC-STI : IEC Short Time Inverse

IEC-LTI : IEC Long Time Inverse

 ES

ES-NI : KEPCO ESB Normally Inverse

ES-VI : KEPCO ESB Very Inverse

ES-EI : KEPCO ESB Extremely Inverse

ES-LTVI : KEPCO ESB Long Time Very Inverse

 Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s

 KERI Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4

 User curves : USER-1,USER-2,USER-3,USER-4

 McGraw-Edison : Non Standard Curves 32

 Fuse curves : RI, HR, FR

For more details, refer to “Table 8-2.

CB t ime-current operation characteristic setting range” .



Table 8-2. CB time-current operation characteristic setting range http://www.entecene.co.kr

Setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Curve A(101) B(117) C(133) D(116) E(132) IEC-EI K(162) L(107) M(118) N(104)

16 17

IEC-VI W(138)

18

Y(120)

19

Z(134)

20

1(102)

Setting 11

Curve IEC-NI

Setting

Curve

21

2(135)

12

P(115)

22

3(140)

13

R(105)

23

4(106)

14

T(161)

24

5(114)

15

V(137)

25

6(136)

Setting 31 32 33 34 35

Curve 13(142) 14(119) 15(112) 16(139) 18(151)

26

7(152)

36

N1

27

8(113)

37

N2

28

8*(111)

38

N3

29

9(131)

39

N4

30

11(141)

40

US-NI

Setting 41

Curve US-VI

42

US-EI

43

ES-NI

44

ES-VI

45 46 47 48 49

Setting 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

Curve IEEE-NI IEEE-VI IEEE-EI US-STI US-STVI IEC-LTI IEC-STI ES-LTVI ES-EI

50

USER-1 USER-2 USER-3 USER-4 DEF-1S DEF-10S

60

RI

Setting 61 62

Curve HR FR

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-PHA / (+)TIME OC-PHA / Time Dial

Range 0.01 ~ 15.00

[(+)TIME OC-PHA]

Function: ENABLE

Pickup: 500

Curve: [US-VI]

>Time Dial: 1.00

Time Add.: 0.00

[0.05~15.00:0.01]

Default 1.00 time add application.

Step 0.01

Set time dial, multiplying this value to selected T-C curve. Multiplying this value changes the slope of the curve. Time dial is conducted after

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-PHA / (+)TIME OC-PHA / Time Add

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

[(+)TIME OC-PHA]

Function: ENABLE

Pickup: 500

Curve: [US-VI]

Time Dial: 1.00

>Time Add.: 0.00

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]


Set Time adder to add set value on selected T-C curve.



GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-PHA / (+)TIME OC-PHA / M.R.T

[(+)TIME OC-PHA]

Curve: [US-VI]

Time Dial: 1.00

Time Add.: 0.00

>M.R.T: 0.00

Reset Method: INST

[0.00~10.00:0.01s]

Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec


T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is added to T-C curve for more delay. This function can be useful for other protective device and line fuse coordination.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-PHA / (+)TIME OC-PHA / Reset Method

Range INST, LINEAR

[(+)TIME OC-PHA]

Curve: [US-VI]

Time Dial: 1.00

Time Add.: 0.00

M.R.T: 0.00

>Reset Method: INST

[INST/LINEAR]

Default time overcurrent

 INST :

INST

After 1 cycle, Reset.

Step

protection is reset.

~

In case that a fault current is decreased under pickup level, (+) Phase

 LINEAR: When the fault value is reached at selected curve’s RT

(Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-PHA / PHASE FAST / Low Set Definite Time

Range 0(OFF), 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec

[(+)TIME OC-PHA]

Curve: [US-VI]

Time Add.: 0.00

M.R.T: 0.00

Reset Method: INST

>Low Set DT: OFF

[0(OFF),0.01~600.00]

Default 0(OFF), Step 0.01 sec

Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is greater than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied for operation.

2) (-)TIME OC-PHA Setup

‘(-)TIME OC-PHA’ settings are very similar ‘(+)TIME OC-PHA’ time overcurrent setting.



8.2.2. Ground Time Overcurrent (51G)


The ETMFC610 has a residual ground time overcurrent element that decides whether it is overcurrent or not using the residual ground current of CT second. The ground time overcurrent element offers the trip lag time that accords to the fault current due to the set value applied inverse time curve such as pickup current, applied T-C curve, applied T-C curve's time dial, applied T-C curve's time adder, minimum response time(M.R.T), fault reset method and low set definite time.

Due to the inverse characteristic of this applied T-C characteristics, the trip operates slowly if the fault current is low and the trip operates faster as the fault current gets bigger(only, the current should be higher than the residual ground pickup current setting value in to operate the trip). The ground time overcurrent element is enabled in the group setting and both PROTECTION

ENABLED and GROUND ENABLED in user interface panel.

The residual ground time overcurrent element can do smooth protection cooperation with other protection elements of ETMFC610 and external devices of the power supply system each, due to various T-C curves, time dial and time adder. The ETMFC610 provides ANSI curve, IEC curve, ES curve and non-standardized T-C curve.

There are two types of overcurrent fault reinstation(reset) methods: instantaneous and linear mode.

The reinstation method for the linear mode is applied with operating the ANSI, IEC, ES and USER curve. The reinstation method for the instantaneous mode is used for the cooperation with devices that do instantaneous reinstation such as the CB inside the power supplying system or other protection element. In the instantaneous reinstation method, the residual ground time overcurrent element is immediately reset when the current measured for one cycle drops below the residual ground pickup current setting value. In the linear reinstation method, the CB is used for the cooperation with the protection devices that demand lag time for reinstation like the mechanical relays.

Figure 8-10. Ground Time Overcurrent(51G) Logic Diagram



At the restoration of load supply, the residual ground time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a period specified the inrush restraint function.

‘Time OC-GROUND’ menu is sub-divided as follow:

[TIME OC-GND]

>1.(+)TIME OC-GND

2.(-)TIME OC-GND

Following setting is used to program the Time Overcurrent - GROUND element.

1) (+) TIME OC-GND Setup

(+) TIME OC-GND setting menu is available for setting (+) Ground time overcurrent protection Curve.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-GND / (+)TIME OC-GND / Function

Range DISABLE, TRIP, TR&AL, ALARM,

[(+)TIME OC-GND]

>Function: TRIP

Pickup: 250

Curve: [US-VI]

Time Dial: 1.00

Time Add.: 0.00

[DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]

Default TRIP

Set the function of

Step -

(+) Ground time overcurrent


If function = Trip(TR),

as enable or disable.


the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip condition, the device trips.


If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-GND / (+)TIME OC-GND / Pickup

Range 10 ~ 1600A

[(+)TIME OC-GND]

Function: TRIP

>Pickup: 250

Curve: [US-VI]

Time Dial: 1.00

Time Add.: 0.00

[10~1600:1A]

Default 250A


Step 1A

(+) Ground time overcurrent element.



GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-GND / (+)TIME OC-GND / Curve

[(+)TIME OC-GND]

Function: TRIP

Pickup: 250

>Curve: [US-VI]

Time Dial: 1.00

Time Add.: 0.00

[10~1600:1A]


Default US-VI

Select desired curve type for (+) Ground time overcurrent element.

For more details, refer to “Table 8-2.

CB time-current operation characteristic setting range” .

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-GND / (+)TIME OC-GND / Time Dial

Range 0.05 ~ 15.00

[(+)TIME OC-GND]

Function: TRIP

Pickup: 250

Curve: [US-VI]

>Time Dial: 1.00

Time Add.: 0.00

[0.05~15.00:0.01]


Step 0.01


GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-GND / (+)TIME OC-GND / Time Add

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

[(+)TIME OC-GND]

Function: TRIP

Pickup: 250

Curve: [US-VI]

Time Dial: 1.00

>Time Add.: 0.00

[0.00~15.00:0.01s]


Set time adder to add set value on selected T-C curve.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-GND / (+)TIME OC-GND / M.R.T

Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec

[(+)TIME OC-GND]

Curve: [US-VI]

Time Dial: 1.00

Time Add.: 0.00

>M.R.T: 0.00

Reset Method: INST

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Default 0.00 Step protective device and line fuse coordination.

0.01 sec

T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is added to T-C curve for more delay. This function can be useful for other

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-GND / (+)TIME OC-GND / Reset Method

Range INST, LINEAR

[(+)TIME OC-GND]

Curve: [US-VI]

Time Dial: 1.00

Time Add.: 0.00

M.R.T: 0.00

>Reset Method: INST

[INST/LINEAR]

Default INST

In case that a fault current is decreased under pickup level, time overcurrent

 INST :

Step

protection is reset.

After 1 cycle, Reset.

~

(+) Ground





GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-GND / (+)TIME OC-GND / Low Set DT

[(+)TIME OC-GND]

Curve: [US-VI]

Time Add.: 0.00

M.R.T: 0.00

Reset Method: INST

>Low Set DT: OFF

[0(OFF),0.01~600.00]

Range 0(OFF), 0.01 ~ 600.00sec

Default 0(OFF), Step 0.01sec


2) (-)TIME OC-GND Setup

‘(-)TIME OC-GND’ settings are very similar ‘(+)TIME OC-GND’ time overcurrent setting.



8.2.3. Negative Sequence Overcurrent (51Q(46))

The ETMFC610 has a negative sequence time overcurrent element. The negative sequence element measures the amount of unbalance current in the system. The negative sequence overcurrent element can also be used to detect phase to ground and two phase ground faults. The negative sequence time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping using that an inverse time curve characteristic is operated to coordinate, current pickup value, T-C curve type, T-

C curve's time dial, T-C curve's time adder, minimum response time(M.R.T) fault reset method and low set definite time.

The negative sequence time overcurrent element is enabled in the group setting and both

PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel.

Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the negative sequence time overcurrent element to closely coordinate with other protection elements in the ETMFC610 and other external devices on the distribution system.

The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The negative sequence time delay reset mode applies to the ANSI/IEEE, IEC, ESB, US, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other instantaneous reset devices such as a CB or other protective equipment on the distribution system. In the instantaneous mode, the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for one cycle.

Linear reset mode, the CB is used for the cooperation with the protection device necessary for delay time as mechanical relay reset.

At the restoration of load supply, the negative sequence time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a period specified the inrush restraint function.

Figure 8-11. Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent(51Q) Logic Diagram



‘Time OC-NEQ’ menu is sub-divided as follow;

[TIME OC-NEQ]

>1.(+)TIME OC-NEQ

2.(-)TIME OC-NEQ

Following setting is used to program ‘Time OC-NEQ’ elements. http://www.entecene.co.kr

1) (+)Time OC-NEQ Setup

(+)Time OC-NEQ setting menu is available for setting (+)Negative sequence time overcurrent

Protection Curve.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)TIME OC-NEQ / Function

[(+)TIME OC-NEQ]

>Function: DISABLE

Pickup: 500

Curve: [US-VI]

Time Dial: 1.00

Time Add.: 0.00

[DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]

Range DISABLE, TRIP, ALARM, TR&AL

Default TRIP Step -

Set the function of (+)Negative sequence time overcurrent as enable or disable.

If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational.

If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip condition, the device trips.


If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)TIME OC-NEQ / Pickup

Range OFF, 1.0 ~ 1600.0A

[(+)TIME OC-NEQ]

> Function: DISABLE

>Pickup: 500

Curve: [US-VI]

Time Dial: 1.00

Time Add.: 0.00

[10~1600:1A]

Default element.

500.0A


Step 1A

(+)Negative sequence time overcurrent



GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)TIME OC-NEQ / Curve

[(+)TIME OC-NEQ]

> Function: DISABLE

Pickup: 500

>Curve: [US-VI]

Time Dial: 1.00

Time Add.: 0.00

[curves : total 62]


Default US-VI

Select desired curve type for (+)Negative sequence time overcurrent element. For more details, refer to operation characteristic setting range” .

“Table 8-2.

CB time-current

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)TIME OC-NEQ / Time Dial

Range 0.05 ~ 15.00

[(+)TIME OC-NEQ]

> Function: DISABLE

Pickup: 500

Curve: [US-VI]

>Time Dial: 1.00

Time Add.: 0.00

[0.05~15.00:0.01]


Step 0.01


GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)TIME OC-NEQ / Time Add

[(+)TIME OC-NEQ]

> Function: DISABLE

Threshold: 1.00

Curve: [US-VI]

Time Dial: 1.00

>Time Add.: 0.00

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec


Set time adder to add set value on selected T-C curve.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)TIME OC-NEQ / M.R.T

Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec

[(+)TIME OC-NEQ]

Threshold: 1.00

Curve: [US-VI]

Time Dial: 1.00

Time Add.: 0.00

>M.R.T: 0.00

[0.00~10.00:0.01s]

Default 0.00 Step protective device and line fuse coordination.

0.01 sec

T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is added to T-C curve for more delay. This function can be useful for other

GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)TIME OC-NEQ / Reset Method

[(+)TIME OC-NEQ]

Curve: [US-VI]

Time Dial: 1.00

Time Add.: 0.00

M.R.T: 0.00

>Reset Method: INST

[INST/LINEAR]

Range INST, LINEAR

Default INST Step ~

In case that a fault current is decreased under pickup level, (+)Negative sequence time overcurrent protection is reset.

 .INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.





GROUP # / PROTECTION / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)TIME OC-NEQ / Low Set DT

[(+)TIME OC-NEQ]

Curve: [US-VI]

Time Add.: 0.00

M.R.T: 0.00

Reset Method: INST

>Low Set DT: OFF

0(OFF),0.01~600.00s

Range 0(OFF), 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec

Default OFF Step 0.01 sec


2) (-)TIME OC-NEQ Setup

‘(-)TIME OC-NEQ’ settings are very similar ‘(+)TIME OC-NEQ’ time overcurrent setting.



8.2.4. Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (50P)


The ETMFC610 has a phase instantaneous overcurrent element. This element in the ETMFC610, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This element provides a definite time delay versus phase high fault current.

The operating time of this element should be set for equal to or faster than the phase time overcurrent elements. This element is enabled in the group setting and PROTECTION ENABLED on user interface panel.

This element is not affected by the inrush restrain and cold load pickup scheme.

PROTECTION ENABLED

EPROT

50P Pickup Current

Setting Value

CURRENT INPUT

A

CURRENT INPUT

B

-

+

-

+

50A1

50B1

50C1

TIME DELAY

LATCH

RST

FLTA

FLTB

FLTC

50P1T

A LAMP

B LAMP

C LAMP

CURRENT INPUT

C

FI RESET

-

+

Figure 8-12. Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent(50P) Logic Diagram

‘INST OC - PHA’ menu is sub-divided as follow:

[INST OC - PHA]

>1.(+)INST OC-PHA

2.(-)INST OC-PHA



Following settings are used to program ‘INST OC – PHASE’ elements.

1) (+)INST OC-PHA Setup

GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC-PHA / (+)INST OC-PHA / Function

Range ENABLE, DISABLE

[(+)INST OC-PHA]

>Function: ENABLE

> Pickup: 4000

Time Delay: 0.00

[ENABLE,DISABLE]

Default

Set the function disable.

ENABLE

DISABLE :

(+) Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent

(+) INST OC -PHASE

Step ~

as enable or

function does not operate.

ENABLE : (+) INST OC -PHASE function operates.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC-PHA / (+)INST OC-PHA / Pickup

Range 10 ~ 20000 A

[(+)INST OC-PHA]

Function: ENABLE

>Pickup: 4000

Time Delay: 0.00

[10~20000:1A]

Default 4000

Set the pickup current for

Instantaneous Overcurrent

Step

element

1A

(+) Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent element. This value is the minimum operating current for (+) Phase

GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC-PHA / (+)INST OC-PHA / Time Delay

Range 0.00~600.00 sec

[(+)INST OC-PHA]

Function: ENABLE

> Pickup: 4000

>Time Delay: 0.00

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Default time.

0.00

Set time delay of trip operation for

Overcurrent

Step 0.01 sec

(+) Phase Instantaneous

element. If it is set for 0, trips immediately without delay

2) (-) INST OC – PHA Setup

(-) INST OC-PHA settings are very similar with (+) INST OC-PHA settings.



8.2.5. Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (50G)

The ETMFC610 has a ground instantaneous overcurrent element. This element in the ETMFC610, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This element provides a definite time delay versus ground high fault current.

The operating time of this element should be set for equal to or faster than the ground time overcurrent elements. This element is enabled in the ground setting and both PROTECTION

ENABLED and GROUND ENABLED in user interface panel.


PROTECTION

ENABLED

EPROT

GROUND

ENABLED

EGPROT

50G Pickup Current

Setting Value

CURRENT INPUT

GROUND

-

+

50G1

TIME DELAY

LATCH

RST

50G1T

FLTG G LAMP

FI RESET

Figure 8-13. Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent(50G) Logic Diagram

‘INST OC - GND’ menu is sub-divided as follow;

[INST OC - GND]

>1.(+)INST OC-GND

2.(-)INST OC-GND

Following settings are used to program the ‘INST OC –GND’ element.

1) (+) INST OC-GND Setup

GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC-GND / (+)INST OC-GND / Function


[(+)INST OC-GND]

>Function: ENABLE

> Pickup: 4000

Time Delay: 0.00

[ENABLE,DISABLE]

Default ENABLE

Set the function of as enable or disable.

DISABLE:

(+) Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent

(+) INST OC-GND

Step ~

element

function on the ground does not operate.

ENABLE: (+) INST OC-GND function on ground operates.



GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC-GND / (+)INST OC-GND / Pickup

[(+)INST OC-GND]

Function: ENABLE

>Pickup: 4000

Time Delay: 0.00

[10~20000:1A]

Range 10 ~ 20000 A

Default 4000

Set the pickup current of

Step 1A

(+) Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent element. This value is the minimum operating current of this element.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC-GND / (+)INST OC-GND / Time Delay

[(+)INST OC-GND]

Function: ENABLE

> Pickup: 4000

>Time Delay: 0.00

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Range 0.00~600.00 sec


Set Time Delay for (+) Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent element.

If it is set for 0, trips immediately on ground fault current without delay.

2) (-) INST OC-GND Setup

(-) INST OC-GND settings are very similar to the (+) INST OC-GND settings.



8.2.6. Sensitive Earth Fault (50SG)


The sensitive earth fault (SEF) is applicable to systems that have restricted current flow for phase to earth fault. The SEF is not applicable to the case in 4 wire multi-earthed systems. The sensitivity of SEF element for non-earthed systems is dependent upon available fault current and the accuracy of CTs. For SEF element, ETMFC610 has the separate SEF terminal on side panel. This input can be connected in series with the provided phase CT’s(standard) or connected to a separate window type ZCT.

The SEF element provides a definite time delay versus sensitive earth fault current. The SEF element is enabled in the group setting and PROTECTION ENABLED, GROUND ENABLED and

SEF ENABLED on user interface panel.

For user systems, a directional SEF is available. The directional control is polarized by a zero sequence voltage(V0). The CVD or PTs should be connected Wye-grounded.

A sensitive earth fault element does not work during the inrush restraint to prevent malfunction of the inrush current that occurs when the recloser or nearby distribution device is closed.

PROTECTION

ENABLED

GROUND

ENABLED

SEF

ENABLED

EPROT

EGPROT

ESPROT

TIME DELAY

LATCH

RST

50SG1T

FLTS SEF LAMP

50SG Pickup Current

Setting Value

CURRENT INPUT

SET

BLOCKING by

SEF INRUSH

-

+

50SG1

FI RESET

Figure 8-14. Sensitive Earth Fault (50SG) Logic Diagram

‘INST OC-SEF’ menu is sub-divided as follow;

[INST OC - SEF]

>1.(+)INST OC-SEF

2.(-)INST OC-SEF



Following settings are used to program the ‘INST OC –SEF’ element.

1) (+)INST OC-SEF Setup

GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC – SEF / (+)INST OC – SEF / Function

Range DISABLE, TRIP, ALARM, TR&AL

[(+)INST OC-SEF]

>Function: DISABLE

Pickup: 10.0

> Time Delay: 5.00

[DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]

Default DISABLE

Set the function of

Step ~

(+) Sensitive earth fault element as enable or disable when the power flow is in forward direction.


If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip condition, the device trips.


If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives the alarm..

GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC – SEF / (+)INST OC – SEF / Pickup

Range 0.1~160.0 A

[(+)INST OC-SEF]

Function: DISABLE

>Pickup: 10.0

Time Delay: 5.00

[0.1~160.0:1A]

Default fault

10.0

Set the pickup current of element.

Step 1A

(+) Sensitive earth fault

This value is the minimum operating current of element.

(+) Sensitive earth

GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC – SEF / (+)INST OC – SEF / Time Delay

Range 0.00~600.00 sec

[(+)INST OC-SEF]

Function: DISABLE

Pickup: 10.0

>Time Delay: 5.00

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Default 5.00

Set Time Delay for immediately

Step



0.01 sec trip. If it is set for 0, trips without delay.

2) (-) INST OC – SEF Setup

(-) INST OC- SEF settings are very similar to the (+)INST OC- SEF settings.



8.2.7. Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent (50Q)

The negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent element in the ETMFC610 is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This element provides a definite time delay versus negative sequence high fault current.

The operating time of this element should be set equal to or faster than the negative sequence time overcurrent elements. This element is enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION on user interface panel.


PROTECTION

ENABLED

EPROT

50Q Pickup Current

Setting Value

-

+

50Q1

TIME DELAY

LATCH

RST

50Q1T

FLTQ

CURRENT INPUT

NEGATIVE SEQ ＇

FI RESET

Figure 8-15. Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent(50Q) Logic Diagram

‘INST OC - NEQ’ menu is sub-divided as follow;

[INST OC - NEQ]

>1.(+)INST OC-NEQ

2.(-)INST OC-NEQ

Following settings are used to program the ‘INST OC – NEQ’ element.

1) (+)INST OC-NEQ Setup

GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC – NEQ / (+)INST OC – NEQ / Function


[(+)INST OC-NEQ]

Function: DISABLE

>Pickup: 4000

Time Delay: 0.00

Active Shot: 1

[ENABLE,DISABLE]

Default DISABLE

Set the function of (+) Negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent element as enable or disable.

Step ~

DISABLE : (+) INST OC-NEQ function on the negative sequence does not operate.

ENABLE : (+) INST OC-NEQ function on negative sequence operates.



GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC – NEQ / (+)INST OC – NEQ / Pickup

[(+)INST OC-NEQ]

Function: DISABLE

>Pickup: 4000

Time Delay: 0.00

Active Shot: 1

[10~20000:1A]

Range 10 ~ 20000 A

Default 4000 Step 1A

Set the pickup current of (+) Negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent element.

This value is the minimum operating current of negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent element.

GROUP # / PROTECTION / INST OC – NEQ / (+)INST OC – NEQ / Time Delay

Range 0.00~600.00 sec

[(+)INST OC-NEQ]

Function: DISABLE

Pickup: 4000

>Time Delay: 0.00

Active Shot: 1

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Default 0.00

Set Time Delay for current without delay.

Step 0.01 sec

(+) Negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent element. If it is set for 0, trips immediately on negative sequence fault

2) (-) INST OC – NEQ Setup

(-) INST OC- NEQ settings are very similar to the (+) INST OC- NEQ settings.



8.2.8. Inrush Restraint


The ETMFC610 suppresses the time overcurrent operation during the inrush current restraint period to prevent erroneous operation of the ETMFC610 due to the inrush current generated when the CB does close operation or the near-field distribution device does close operation (the instantaneous and instantaneous lockout overcurrent elements do normal operation). The setting of the Inrush current restraint function can be set individually for phase, ground, sensitive earth fault and negative sequence.

Figure 8-16. Inrush Restraint Operation Characteristics



After it’s done black out more than outage time, it restores load current supply, inrush current restraint algorithm is applied. When the restoration of load supply is occurred, in the case of that generated inrush current is greater than inrush duration fault pickup current as inrush current 1 of

“Figure 8-16. Inrush Restraint Operation Characteristics” , it’s considered as fault current, CB does trip operation during inrush duration. (But, when the delay curve of time overcurrent element is ENABL, CB does operation). When inrush current is less than inrush duration fault pickup current as inrush current 2 of “Figure 8-16. Inrush Restraint Operation Characteristics” After fault protection operation is suppressed during R.M.T Time(Restore Minimum Time), CB does trip operation after inrush duration.

However, inrush duration is removed if inrush current is less than reset current before R.M.T Time

(Restore Minimum Time) as inrush current 3 of “Figure 8-16. Inrush Restraint Operation

Characteristics” .

NOTE:

According to setting of “Make use ‘I’”, in order to activate inrush current restraint the condition to decide the restoration of load supply will be changed. If “YES” is set, the decision is made when the load current becomes over 2A. If “NO” is set, the decision is made when a CB is closed (52A) by local or remote control.

8.2.8.1. Inrush Restraint Setup

‘INRUSH RESTRAINT’ menu is sub-divided as follow;

[INRUSH RESTRAINT]

>1.FUNCTION

2.PICKUP CURRENT

3.RESTORE MIN. TIME

4.INRUSH RES’ RESET

5.PHASE CURVE

6.GROUND CURVE

7.NEG SEQ’ CURVE

8.OTHERS



1) Fuction Setup http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP #/ PROTECTION / INRUSH RESTRAINT / FUNCTION / Phase


[FUNCTION]

>Phase: ENABLE

Ground: ENABLE

SEF: ENABLE

Neg Seq’: ENABLE

[ENABLE/DISABLE]

Default ENABLE phase current.

Step ~

Sets whether the inrush current suppression function is applied to

GROUP #/ PROTECTION / INRUSH RESTRAINT / FUNCTION / Ground


[FUNCTION]

Phase: ENABLE

>Ground: ENABLE

SEF: ENABLE

Neg Seq’: ENABLE

[ENABLE/DISABLE]

Default ENABLE ground current.

Step ~


GROUP #/ PROTECTION / INRUSH RESTRAINT / FUNCTION / SEF

[FUNCTION]

Phase: ENABLE

Ground: ENABLE

>SEF: ENABLE

Neg Seq’: ENABLE

[ENABLE/DISABLE]


Default ENABLE

Sets whether the inrush current suppression function is applied to sensitive earth fault current.

Step ~

GROUP #/ PROTECTION / INRUSH RESTRAINT / FUNCTION / Neg Seq’

[FUNCTION]

Phase: ENABLE

Ground: ENABLE

SEF: ENABLE

>Neg Seq’: ENABLE

[ENABLE/DISABLE]


Default ENABLE


Negative sequence current.

Step ~



2) Inrush Duration Fault Pickup Current Setup http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/INRUSH RESTRAINT / PICKUP CURRENT/ Phase

Range 10 ~ 20000A

[PICKUP CURRENT]

>Phase: 2000

Ground: 2000

SEF: 20.0

> Neg Seq’: 2000

[10~20000:1 A]


Phase fault current level is configured during inrush current restraint duration. If the phase current is greater than the setting value, the delay curve of the phase time overcurrent element is activated.

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/INRUSH RESTRAINT / PICKUP CURRENT/ Ground

Range 10 ~ 20000A

[PICKUP CURRENT]

> Phase: 2000

>Ground: 2000

SEF: 20.0

> Neg Seq’: 2000

[10~20000:1 A]


Ground fault level is configured during the inrush current restraint duration. If the ground current is greater than the setting value, the delay curve of the ground time overcurrent element is activated.

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/INRUSH RESTRAINT / PICKUP CURRENT/ S.E.F

Range 0.1 ~ 2000.0A

[PICKUP CURRENT]

> Phase: 2000

> Ground: 2000

>SEF: 20.0

> Neg Seq’: 2000

[0.1~2000.0:0.1 A]

Default 20.0 Step sensitive earth fault element will operate.

0.1A

Sets the sensitive earth fault current level during the inrush current restraint duration If S.E.F current is greater than this setting, a

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/INRUSH RESTRAINT / PICKUP CURRENT/ Neg Seq’

Range 10 ~ 20000A

[PICKUP CURRENT]

> Phase: 2000

> Ground: 2000

SEF: 20.0

>Neg Seq’: 2000

[10~20000:1 A]


Sets the negative sequence fault current level during the inrush current restraint duration. If the negative sequence current is greater than the setting value, the delay curve of the negative sequence time overcurrent element operates.

NOTE:

The above setting applies the pickup current to operate the time overcurrent element, and the multiple of current pickup current which is applied to the T-C curve during the time overcurrent operation applies the pickup current setting value of the delay curve.



3) Restroe Minimum Time Setup http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/INRUSH RESTRAINT / RESTORE MIN. TIME / P-Function


[RESTORE MIN. TIME]

>P-Function: ENABLE

G-Function: ENABLE

S-Function: ENABLE

Q-Function: ENABLE

RMT TIME: 0.60

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

Default ENABLE Step ~

Set whether to apply restore minimum time for phase inrush current.

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/INRUSH RESTRAINT / RESTORE MIN. TIME / G-Function


[RESTORE MIN. TIME]

> P-Function: ENABLE

>G-Function: ENABLE

S-Function: ENABLE

Q-Function: ENABLE

RMT TIME: 0.60

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Sets whether to apply restore minimum time for ground inrush current.

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/INRUSH RESTRAINT / RESTORE MIN. TIME / S-Function

[RESTORE MIN. TIME]


G-Function: ENABLE

>S-Function: ENABLE

Q-Function: ENABLE

RMT TIME: 0.60

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Default ENABLE

Sets whether to apply restore minimum time for sensitive earth inrush current.

Step ~

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/INRUSH RESTRAINT / RESTORE MIN. TIME / Q-Function

[RESTORE MIN. TIME]


> G-Function: ENABLE

S-Function: ENABLE

>Q-Function: ENABLE

RMT TIME: 0.60

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Default ENABLE

Sets whether to apply restore minimum time for negative sequence inrush current.

Step ~

NOTE:

Depending on the above settings, the inrush current restraint duration release condition will be different. If it sets to EANBLE, the restore minimum time is applied and regardless of current size, the inrush current restraint duration is released after a restore minimum time.

On the other hand, if it sets to DISABLE, the restore minimum time is not applied and the current size should fall below the reset current, and the inrush current restraint duration is released.



GROUP #/ PROTECTION/INRUSH RESTRAINT/ RESTORE MIN. TIME/ RMT TIME

[RESTORE MIN. TIME]

P-Function: ENABLE

G-Function: ENABLE

S-Function: ENABLE

Q-Function: ENABLE

>RMT TIME: 0.60

[0.01~600.00:0.01 s]

Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec


Select the restore minimum time required for the inrush current.

The Restore Minimum Time have to raised pickup levels for time overcurrent detection from inrush duration fault pickup current back to nominal pickup level.

4) Reset Current & Time Setup

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’ RESET / P-Reset I

Range 10~1600A

[INRUSH RES’ RESET]

>P-Reset I: 500

G-Reset I: 250

S-Reset I: 10.0

Q-Reset I: 500

Reset Time: 0.60

[10~1600:1 A]

Default 500 Step 1A

Set the level of reset current for phase inrush restraint.

Inrush current that is lower than this reset current setting level, is kept for the reset time, Inrush current restraint algorithm is stopped and normal over current protection function operates.

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’ RESET / G-Reset I

Range 10~1600A


> P-Reset I: 500

>G-Reset I: 250

S-Reset I: 10.0

Q-Reset I: 500

Reset Time: 0.60

[10~1600:1 A]

Default 250 Step 1A

Set the level of reset current for ground inrush restraint.

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’ RESET / S-Reset I

Range 0.1~160.0A


> P-Reset I: 500

G-Reset I: 250

>S-Reset I: 10.0

Q-Reset I: 500

Reset Time: 0.60

[10~1600:1 A]

Default 10.0 Step 0.1A

Set the level of reset current for sensitive earth inrush restraint.



GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’ RESET / Q-Reset I


> P-Reset I: 500

G-Reset I: 250

S-Reset I: 10.0

>Q-Reset I: 500

Reset Time: 0.60

[10~1600:1 A]

Range 10~1600A

Default 500 Step 1A

Set the level of reset current for negative sequence inrush restraint.

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’ RESET / Reset Time


P-Reset I: 500

G-Reset I: 250

S-Reset I: 10.0

Q-Reset I: 500

>Reset Time: 0.60

[0.01~600.00:0.01 s]

Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec


Sets the time to reset inrush current restraint duration.

5) Inrush Current Restrait Duration’s T-C Curve Setup

Set the T-C curve to be applied during the Inrush current restraint duration.

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ PHASE CURVE / Curve


[PHASE CURVE]

>Curve: [US-VI]

Time Dial: 1.00

Time Add.: 0.00

M.R.T: 0.00

Reset Method: INST

[curve : total 62]

Default

Set T-C curve to apply when Phase inrush current is more than few times of phase disconnect inrush current. Applicable curve range refers to

US-VI

“Table 8-2.

Step ~

CB time-current operation characteristic setting range” .

*. NOTE) Ground Curve and NEG SEQ’ CURVE are same as PHASE CURVE above.

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ PHASE CURVE/ Time Dial

[PHASE CURVE]

Curve: [US-VI]

>Time Dial: 1.00

Time Add.: 0.00

M.R.T: 0.00

Reset Method: INST

[0.01~15.00:0.01]

Range

Default

0.01~15.00

1.00 Step 0.01

Set a coefficient to apply to a set curve. The coefficient application changes the slop of a curve. Coefficient multiply works after Time Adder.




GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ PHASE CURVE / Time Add.

[PHASE CURVE]

Curve: [US-VI]

Time Dial: 1.00

>Time Add.: 0.00

M.R.T: 0.00

Reset Method: INST

[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]

Range

Default

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

0.00 including its own delay time.

Step 0.01 sec

Adding a time onto a set curve. More delays due to this set time


GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ PHASE CURVE / M.R.T

[PHASE CURVE]

Curve: [US-VI]

Time Dial: 1.00

Time Add.: 0.00

>M.R.T: 0.00

Reset Method: INST

[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]

Range

Default

0.00 ~ 10.00 sec

0.00 Step 0.01 sec

Minimum Response Time. A set T-C curve is faster than this set time, tripping may be delayed as much as this set time. This function can be cooperated with other protection device or fuse.


GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ PHASE CURVE / Reset Method

[PHASE CURVE]

Curve: [US-VI]

Time Dial: 1.00

Time Add.: 0.00

M.R.T: 0.00

>Reset Method: INST

[INST/LINEAR]

Range INST, LINEAR

Default INST Step ~

In case that current level is decreased under Pickup level, Phase cold load pickup element is reset.

 INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.

 LINEAR : When the fault value is reached at selected curve’s

Rt(Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset.




6) Other Setup http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ OTHERS / Outage Time

Range 0.01 ~ 10.00 sec

[OTHERS]

>Outage Time: 5.00

> Make Use ‘I’: NO

[0.01~600.00:0.01 s]


Set the outage time. After the outage condition is maintained for more than the setting time, the restoration of load supply becomes active and the Inrush current restraint section becomes active.

Outage conditions are as follows;

 If "Make Use 'I'" setting is NO, it is considered to be outage when

CB status is open.

 If "Make Use 'I'" setting is YES, it is considered to be outage when current is below 2A.

However, under the above conditions, current should be below

"Outage I".

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ OTHERS / Make Use ‘I’

Range NO, YES

[OTHERS]

> Outage Time: 5.00


[NO/YES]

Default function.



NO Step ~

Set whether or not to use current as decision condition for operating

When it sets to NO, the inrush current restraint interval becomes active when recloser is changed from open to close status.

 When it set to YES, when the current increases above 2A, the inrush current restraint interval is active.



8.2.9. User Curve - Time Overcurrent Curves


The ETMFC610 has a total of 62 kinds of standard curves: ANSI / IEEE curves, IEC curves, US curves and Definite time curves, KEPCO ES curves, KERI curves, 4 user-defined curves, 3 fuse curves, 32 nonstandard curves. According to Standard ANSI / IEEE C37.112 and IEC 255-3, trip operation times and reset times can be defined as follows.

The operation times and reset times are defined as follows :

US

Trip Time(Sec) = TD × ( α / (M β

1) + γ ) + TA

ANSI/IEEE


1) + γ ) + TA

IEC


1)) + TA

ES


1) + γ ) + TA

USER-DEFINED


1) + γ ) + TA

RESET TIME

Reset Time(Sec) = TD × (Rt / (1 M 2 ))

Table 8-3. Curve Factor

TD

TA

α ,

M

Rt

β , γ

Time dial

Time adder

Characteristic constant

Multiples of pickup current

Reset characteristic constant

NOTE :

“CB clearing time curves” are used when rated voltage of CB is 15 ㎸ or 27 ㎸ , otherwise which added 30 ㎳ ( ± 4 ㎳ ) are used when it is 38 ㎸ .



8.2.9.1. User-Defined Curves


The ETMFC610 supports 4 user-defined curves for user to implement their own curve according to their requirement. The user can define the aforementioned characteristic constant of trip operation time and reset time equation in 4 user-defined curves.

[USER CURVE]

>1.USER CURVE1

2.USER CURVE2

3.USER CURVE3

4.USER CURVE4

1) USER CURVE1 Setup

GROUP #/ PROTECTION/ USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor a

Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9998

[USER CURVE 1]

>Factor a: 59.5000

Factor b: 2.0200

Factor r: 1.8000

Factor rt: 59.5000

[0~150.9998:0.0001]

Default 59.5000

User defined curve factor α

Step 0.0001

GROUP #/ PROTECTION / USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor b

Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9998

[USER CURVE 1]

Factor a: 59.5000

>Factor b: 2.0000

Factor r: 1.8000

Factor rt: 59.5000

[0~150.9998:0.0001]

Default 2.0000

User defined curve factor β

Step 0.0001

GROUP #/ PROTECTION / USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor r

[USER CURVE 1]

Factor a: 59.5000

Factor b: 2.0200

>Factor r: 1.8000

Factor rt: 59.5000

[0~150.9998:0.0001]

Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9998

Default 1.8000

User defined curve factor γ

Step 0.0001



GROUP #/ PROTECTION / USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor rt

[USER CURVE 1]

Factor a: 59.5000

Factor b: 2.0200

Factor r: 1.8000

>Factor rt: 59.5000

[0~150.9998:0.0001]

Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9998

Default 59.5000

User defined curve factor rt

Step 0.0001

2) USER CURVE 2, 3, 4 Setup

USER CURVE 2 ~ 4, the same as USER CURVE 1 above.



8.2.9.2. Standard Curves Coefficients

Table 8-4. US Curve

Curves

Normally Inverse

Very Inverse

Extremely Inverse

Short Time Inverse

Short Time Very Inverse

Table 8-5. IEC Curve

Curves

Normally Inverse

Very Inverse

Extremely Inverse

Long Time Inverse

Short Time Inverse

α

5.95

3.88

5.67

0.00342

1.9925

α

0.1400

13.500

80.000

135.000

0.0500

Table 8-6. ES Curve

Curves

Normally Inverse

Very Inverse

Extremely Inverse

Long Time Very Inverse

Table 8-7. ANSI/IEEE Curve

α

0.011

3.985

2.82

15.94

Curves

Normally Inverse

Very Inverse

Extremely Inverse

Table 8-8. Definite Time

Curves

Definite Time 1sec

Definite Time 10sec

α

0.0515

19.61

28.2

α

0.0

0.0

β

-

-

β

0.02

1.95

2.00

1.95

β

2.0

2.0

2.0

0.02

2.0

β

0.0200

1.000

2.000

1.000

0.0400

β

0.02

2.0

2.0

EN HANCED TEC HNOLOGY http://www.entecene.co.kr

γ

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

γ

0.18

0.0963

0.0352

0.00262

0.0475

γ

0.042

0.1084

0.01217

0.4336

γ

0.114

0.491

0.1217

γ

1.0

10.0

Rt

5.95

3.55

5.67

0.323

1.992

Rt

9.700

13.500

80.000

135.00

0.500

Rt

9.000

3.985

2.91

15.94

Rt

4.85

21.6

29.1

Rt

1.0

10.0

228


8.2.9.3. Non Standard Curves

Table 8-9. Non Standard Curves

McGraw-Edison TC curves

Phase

D

E

K

L

M

Old

A

B

C

T

V

W

Y

Z

N

P

R

Table 8-10. KEPCO(Korea) Curvers

New

101

117

133

116

132

162

107

118

104

115

105

161

137

138

120

134

4

5

6

7

8

Old

1

2

3

13

14

15

16

18

8*

9

11

Curves

N1, N2, N3, N4 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Ground

New

102

135

140

106

114

136

152

113

111

131

141

142

119

112

139

151



8.2.9.4. Fuse Curves


1) RI Curve Trip Time

“RI” curve is a special curve to be used in conjunction with mechanical relay. When “RI” curve is applied, time overcurrent element is operated by following formula.

Trip Time 

0 .

339

1

 0 .

236

Here,

TD

is set time dial,

Is

is pickup current for time overcurrent element.

I is actual fault current.

2) HR Curve Trip Time

“HR” curve is a special curve to be used in conjunction with the fuse. When “HR” curve is applied, time overcurrent element is operated by following formula.

Trip Time 

10

log

I

Is

 (  3 .

832 )  3 .

66



1

0 .

1

Here,

TD

is set time dial,

Is is pickup current for time overcurrent element.




3) FR Curve Trip Time http://www.entecene.co.kr

“FR” curve is a special curve to be used in conjunction with the fuse. When “FR” is applied, inverse protection element is operated by following formula.

Trip Time  10 log 



 I

Is 





 (  7 .

16 )  3 .

0



1

0 .

1

, when 1 .

2 

I

I

S

 2 .

0

·· formula (1)




 I

Is 





 (  5 .

4 )  2 .

47



1

0 .

1

, when 2 .

0 

I

I

S

 2 .

66

· formula (2)




 I

Is 





 (  4 .

24 )  1 .

98



1

0 .

1

, when 2 .

66 

I

I

S

·· formula (3)

Here,

TD

is set time dial,

Is

is pickup current for time overcurrent element.




8.2.9.5. Curves

Table 8-11. Curve List

6

7

8

9

10

No

1

2

3

4

5

14

15

16

17

11

12

13

18

19

20

21

Curve

A(101)

B(117)

C(133)

D(116)

E(132)

IEC-EI

K(162)

L(107)

M(118)

N(104)

IEC-NI

P(115)

R(105)

T(161)

V(137)

IEC-VI

W(138)

Y(120)

Z(134)

1(102)

2(135)

27

28

29

30

31

No

22

23

24

25

26

35

36

37

38

32

33

34

39

40

41

42

Table 8-12. Curve Characteristics

*. Curve time is Clearing Time.

*. Operation accuracy is +/-5% or +/-10 ㎳ .

Curve

3(140)

4(106)

5(114)

6(136)

7(152)

8(113)

8*(111)

9(131)

11(141)

13(142)

14(119)

15(112)

16(139)

18(151)

N1

N2

N3

N4

US-NI

US -VI

US -EI http://www.entecene.co.kr

48

49

50

51

52

No

43

44

45

46

47

56

57

58

59

53

54

55

60

61

62

Curve

ES-NI

ES-VI

USER-1

USER-2

USER-3

USER-4

DEF-1S

DEF-10S

IEEE-NI

IEEE-VI

IEEE-EI

US-STI

US-STVI

IEC-LTI

IEC-STI

ES-LTVI

ES-EI

RI

HR

FR



1) US Nermally Inverse Curves http://www.entecene.co.kr

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE

: 11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18

CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME

VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

14

15

17

13

16

11

18

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-17.

US Normally Inverse Curves



2) US Very Inverse Curves http://www.entecene.co.kr

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


: US VERY INVERSE



15.00

13.00

11.00

9.00

7.00

5.00

4.00

3.00

2.00

1.00

0.5

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-18.

US Very Inverse Curves



3) US Extremely Inverse Curves http://www.entecene.co.kr

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


: US EXTREMELY INVERSE



15.00

13.00

11.00

9.00

7.00

5.00

4.00

3.00

2.00

1.00

0.5

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-19. US Extremely Inverse Curves



4) US Short Time Inverse Curves http://www.entecene.co.kr

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


: US SHORT TIME INVERSE



15.00

13.00

11.00

9.00

7.00

5.00

4.00

3.00

2.00

1.00

0.5

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-20. US Short Time Inverse Curves



5) US Short Time Very Inverse Curves http://www.entecene.co.kr

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


: US SHORT TIME VERY INVERSE



15.00

13.00

11.00

9.00

7.00

5.00

4.00

3.00

2.00

1.00

0.5

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-21. US Short Time Very Inverse Curves



6) IEC Normally Inverse Curves http://www.entecene.co.kr

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


: IEC NORMALLY INVERSE



1

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.05

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-22. IEC Normally Inverse Curves



7) IEC Very Inverse Curves http://www.entecene.co.kr

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


: IEC VERY INVERSE



1

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.05

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-23. IEC Very Inverse Curves



8) IEC Extremely Inverse Curves http://www.entecene.co.kr

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1,000

800

700

600

500

400

300

200

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


: IEC EXTREMELY INVERSE



0.05

0.1

1

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

70

60

50

40

30

20

7

6

10

8

5

4

3

2

1,000

800

700

600

500

400

300

200

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-24. IEC Extremely Inverse Curves



9) IEC Long Time Inverse Curves http://www.entecene.co.kr

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1,000

800

700

600

500

400

300

200

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


: IEC LONG TIME VERY INVERSE



1

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.05

70

60

50

40

30

20

7

6

10

8

5

4

3

2

1,000

800

700

600

500

400

300

200

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-25. IEC Long Time Inverse Curves



10) IEC Short Time Inverse Curves http://www.entecene.co.kr

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1,000

800

700

600

500

400

300

200

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


: IEC SHORT TIME INVERSE



1

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.05

70

60

50

40

30

20

7

6

10

8

5

4

3

2

1,000

800

700

600

500

400

300

200

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-26. IEC Short Time Inverse Curves



11) ES Normally Inverse Curves http://www.entecene.co.kr

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


: ES NORMALLY INVERSE



15.00

13.00

11.00

9.00

7.00

5.00

4.00

3.00

2.00

1.00

0.5

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-27. ES Normally Inverse Curves



12) ES Very Inverse Curves http://www.entecene.co.kr

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


: ES VERY INVERSE



15.00

13.00

11.00

9.00

7.00

5.00

4.00

3.00

2.00

1.00

0.5

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-28. ES Very Inverse Curves



13) ES Extremely Inverse Curves http://www.entecene.co.kr

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


: ES EXTREMELY INVERSE



0.5

15.00

13.00

11.00

9.00

7.00

5.00

4.00

3.00

2.00

1.00

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-29. ES Extremely Inverse Curves



14) ES Long Time Very Inverse Curves http://www.entecene.co.kr

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


: ES LONG TIME VERY INVERSE



15.00

13.00

11.00

9.00

7.00

5.00

4.00

3.00

2.00

1.00

0.5

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-30. ES Long Time Very Inverse Curves



15) IEEE Normally Inverse Curves http://www.entecene.co.kr

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


: IEEE NORMALLY INVERSE



15.00

13.00

11.00

9.00

7.00

5.00

4.00

3.00

2.00

1.00

0.5

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-31. IEEE Normally Inverse Curves



16) IEEE Very Inverse Curves http://www.entecene.co.kr

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


: IEEE VERY INVERSE



15.00

13.00

11.00

9.00

7.00

5.00

4.00

3.00

2.00

1.00

0.5

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-32. IEEE Very Inverse Curves



17) IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves http://www.entecene.co.kr

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


: US EXTREMELY INVERSE



15.00

13.00

11.00

9.00

7.00

5.00

4.00

3.00

2.00

1.00

0.5

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-33. IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves



18) Definite Time Curves (DEF-1S, DEF-10S) http://www.entecene.co.kr

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


: DEFINITE TIME 1 sec, 10 sec



DEF-10S

DEF-1S

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-34. Definite Time Curves (DEF-1S, DEF-10S)



19) KEPRI Curves(N1, N2, N3, N4) http://www.entecene.co.kr

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

N2

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


: ANSI MODERATELY INVERSE



N3

N4

N1

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-35. KEPRI Curves (N1, N2, N3, N4)



20) Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E) http://www.entecene.co.kr

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01

A


: A, B, C, D, E



D

C

B

E

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-36. Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)



21) Non Standard Curves (K, L, M, N) http://www.entecene.co.kr

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01

N

L


: KP, L, M, N



K

M

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-37. Non Standard Curves (K, L, M, N)



22) Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V) http://www.entecene.co.kr

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01

P


: P, R, T, V



T

R

V

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-38. Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)



23) Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z) http://www.entecene.co.kr

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01

P


: P, R, T, V



T

R

V

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-39. Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)



24) Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) http://www.entecene.co.kr

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01

1

4

5


: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5



3

2

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-40. Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)



25) Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9) http://www.entecene.co.kr

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


: 6, 7, 8, 8*, 9



7

8*

6

9

8

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-41. Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)



26) Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18) http://www.entecene.co.kr

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


: 11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18



14

17

15

13

16

11

18

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-42. Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)



27) Fuse Curves http://www.entecene.co.kr

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


: FUSE (RI, HR, FR)



FR HR

RI

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.09

0.08

0.07

0.06

0.05

0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01


Figure 8-43. Fuse Curves (RI, HR, FR)



8.3. Directional Controls (67)


Place the curser on “DIRECTION” in GROUP# menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

This menu applies to both “Fault Indication type(FITYPE)” and “Protection type(PROTYPE)”.

[DIRECTION]

>1.PHASE

2.GROUND

3.SEF

4.NEG SEQ

The Directional Controls provide fault indication and overcurrent protection in the direction of power flow. The directional controls are necessary for the fault indication and protection of multiple feeders, when it has the necessity of finding faults in different directions. The directional controls are comprised of phase, ground, SEF and negative sequence fault indication and overcurrent elements.

If directional controls are selected, it will determine whether current flow in each phase is in forward or reverse direction, as determined by the connection of the phase CTs, selected Maximum

Torque Angle (MTA), voltage and current phasors. To increase security of all directional controls, add one power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation.

The directional controls settings can be different in each GROUP settings.

8.3.1. Phase Directional Controls (67P)

Normal voltage V

1

provides phase pole direction in Power line system. Phase direction is determined by comparing normal voltage(V

1

) and normal current(I

1

). If an angle between normal voltage(V

1

) and normal current(I

1

) is within



90 ˚ , the direction is forward otherwise it is backward(reverse direction). Maximum torque angle is set between ∠ 0 ˚ and ∠ 359 ˚ . Max torque initial angle is set for ∠ 300 ˚ lead angle for Normal voltage V1 (Initial set value of Max Torque angle shall be set ∠ 300 ˚ lead angle).

If Polarized voltage becomes lower than the Minimum polarized Voltage, phase direction control is lost and phase fault(fault indication type) and phase overcurrent(protection type) are not detected.

On the other hand, if phase direction control is set for ‘NONE’, regardless of phase direction, phase fault and phase overcurrent are detected.



Phase direction control type can be set in order to detect phase fault and phase overcurrent.

Depending on control type, phase fault and phase overcurrent can be detected in Forward direction or reverse direction or regardless of direction.

Following “Figure 8-44. Phasor Diagram for I

1

Directional Polarization” shows normal current

(I

1

) direction polarity phasor diagram in complex plane.

Polarizing Referance

Voltage:

V 1

Z er o

T o rq ue

L in e

Typical Fault Angle

I 1

Ma xim um

To rqu e L ine

Maximum Torque Angle : set 300 degree

Fo rw ard

Re ve rse

Figure 8-44.

Phasor Diagram for I

1

Directional Polarization



The phase direction control in following four settings should be enabled.

GROUP # / DIRECTION / PHASE / Type

[PHASE]

>Type: NONE

M.T.A: 300

M.P.V(V1): 0.30

Block OC: YES

[NONE/FOR/REV]

Range NONE, FORWARD, REVERSE

Default NONE Step ~

Set phase direction type.

NONE : Regardless of phase direction, phase fault and overcurrent are detected by normal phase current(Ia,Ib,Ic).

FOR : Phase fault and (+) Phase overcurrent are detected when forward phase direction.

(-) Phase overcurrent is detected when reverse phase direction.

REV : Phase fault and (+) Phase overcurrent are detected when reverse phase direction.

(-) Phase overcurrent is detected when forward phase direction.

GROUP # / DIRECTION / PHASE / Type

Range 0 ~ 359 degree

[PHASE]

Type: NONE

>M.T.A: 300

M.P.V(V1): 0.30

Block OC: YES

[0~359:1 Lead]

Default voltage.

300 Step 1 degree

Enter the Maximum Torque Angle. The Maximum Torque Angle setting determines the range of current direction for the polarizing

For typical distribution systems, the faulted angle of the phase will be approximately ∠ 300 ∼∠ 330 degree.

GROUP # / DIRECTION /PHASE / M.P.V(V1)

Range 0(OFF), 0.10~0.80 xVT

[PHASE]

Type: NONE

M.T.A: 300

>M.P.V(V1): 0.30

Block OC: YES

0(OFF),0.10~0.80 xVT


To check Phase disconnect direction, it shall set Minimum Polarizing

Voltage, V

1

). It is available to check the direction when a voltage shall be more than this set value. Otherwise, checking is blocked. In case of setting 0(OFF), direction is not checked.



GROUP # / DIRECTION / PHASE / Block OC

[PHASE]

Type: NONE

M.T.A: 60

M.P.V(V1): 0.30

>Block OC: YES

[NO/YES] http://www.entecene.co.kr

Range NO, YES

Default NO Step ~

Select whether to trip when polarizing voltage is dropped below minimum polarizing voltage set.

NO : Trip on over current element.

YES : No trip on over current element.

8.3.2. Ground Directional Controls (67G)

Zero phase voltage 3V

0

provides ground control direction in power system. Ground direction is determined by comparing zero phase voltage (3V

0

) and zero phase current(I

0

). If an angle from zero phase voltage to zero phase current is within



90˚ based on Maximum Torque Angle, it is forward direction, otherwise, reverse direction. Maximum Torque Angle is between ∠ 0 ˚ and ∠ 359

˚. Initial set value of max torque angle is set for ∠ 135 ˚ leading compared with Zero sequence voltage(V

0

).

Polarized voltage drops Min. polarized voltage, ground direction control is cancelled and ground fault(fault indication type) and ground overcurrent(protection type) are not detected. On the other hand, if ground direction control is set for ‘NONE’, ground fault and ground overcurrent are detected regardless of direction.

Ground direction control type is set to detect ground fault and ground overcurrent. Depending on control type, ground fault and ground overcurrent are detected or is not detected.

Following figure shows phasor graph of zero phase current direction polarity in complex plane.



-V0

Ze ro

T orq ue

Lin e http://www.entecene.co.kr

Fault Current

Ig

M ax im um

T or qu e

Li ne

Fo rw ar d

Re ve rs e


Voltage:

V 0

Figure 8-45.

Phasor Graph for I g


The ground direction control in following four settings should be enabled.

GROUP # / DIRECTION / GROUND / Type

[GROUND]

>Type: NONE

M.T.A: 135

M.P.V(3V0): 0.30

Block OC: YES

[NONE/FOR/REV]


Default NONE Step ~

Set ground direction type.

NONE : Regardless of ground direction, ground fault and overcurrent are detected by normal phase current(I n

).

FOR : Ground fault and (+) Ground overcurrent are detected when forward ground direction.

(-) Ground overcurrent is detected when reverse ground direction.

REV : Ground fault and (+) Ground overcurrent are detected when reverse ground direction.

(-) Ground overcurrent is detected when forward ground direction.



GROUP # / DIRECTION / GROUND / M.T.A

[GROUND]

Type: NONE

>M.T.A: 135

M.P.V(3V0): 0.30

Block OC: YES

[0~359:1Lead] http://www.entecene.co.kr


Default 135 Step 1 degree

Enter the maximum torque angle, The maximum torque angle setting determines the range of current direction for the polarized voltage.

For system with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals, the ground maximum torque angle will be approximately ∠ 135 degree.

For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the maximum torque angle will be approximately ∠ 90 degree.

GROUP # / DIRECTION / GROUND / M.P.V(3V0)

Range 0(OFF), 0.10~0.80 xVT

[GROUND]

Type: NONE

M.T.A: 135

>M.P.V(3V0): 0.30

Block OC: YES

0(OFF),0.10~0.80 xVT


Set Minimum Polarizing Voltage to check ground fault direction.

Voltage shall be higher than this set value to check the direction.

Otherwise, direction check will be blocked. In case of setting 0(OFF), direction checking is disabled.

GROUP # / DIRECTION / GROUND / Block OC

Range NO, YES

[GROUND]

Type: NONE

M.T.A: 135

M.P.V(-3V0): 0.30

>Block OC: YES

[NO/YES]

Default minimum polarizing voltage set.

NO :

YES

Trip on over current element.

Step ~

Select whether to trip when polarizing voltage is dropped below


8.3.3. SEF Directional Controls (67SEF)

The SEF direction control process a very similar method to the GROUND directional control. But the default value of SEF directional element “Type” is ‘NONE’, and default value of “M.T.A(V0) is ‘135°’ .



8.3.4. Negative Sequence Directional Controls (67Q)

Negative Sequence voltage V

2

provides negative sequence pole direction in power system.

Negative sequence direction is determined by comparing negative sequence voltage(V

2

) and negative current(I

2

). If an angle from negative sequence voltage (V

2

) to negative sequence current

(I

2

) is within



90˚ based on Maximum Torque Angle, it is forward direction, otherwise, reverse direction. Maximum Torque Angle is between ∠ 0 ˚ and ∠ 359 ˚ . Maximum Torque Angle initial set value leads from negative sequence voltage(V2) for ∠ 135˚.

If polarizing voltage drops minimum polarizing voltage, negative sequence direction control is cancelled and negative sequence fault(fault indication type) and negative sequence overcurrent(protection type) are not detected. On the other hand, if negative sequence direction control type is set for ‘NONE’, fault and over current are detected regardless of direction.

Set negative sequence direction control type to detect negative sequence fault and overcurrent.

Depending on control type, negative sequence fault and overcurrent are detected in forward or reverse or both direction.

Following figure shows phasor graph of negative sequence current(I

2

) direction polarity.

-V 2

Ze ro

T orq ue

Lin e

Fault Current

I 2

M ax im um

T or qu e

Li ne

Maximum Torque Angle : set 135 degree

Fo rw ar d

Re ve rs e


Voltage:

V 2

Figure 8-46.

Phasor Diagram for I

2




The negative sequence directional controls in following four settings should be enabled.

GROUP # / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ’ / Type

[NEG SEQ’]

>Type: NONE

M.T.A: 135

M.P.V(V2): 0.30

Block OC: YES

[NONE/FOR/REV]


Default NONE Step ~

Set Negative sequence direction type.

NONE : Regardless of negative sequence direction, Negative sequence fault indication and overcurrent are detected by normal current(I

2

).

FOR : Negative sequence fault indication (+) Negative sequence overcurrent are detected when forward negative sequence direction.

(-) Negative sequence overcurrent is detected when reverse negative sequence direction.

REV : Negative sequence fault indication (+) Negative sequence overcurrent are detected when reverse negative sequence direction.

(-) Negative sequence overcurrent is detected when forward negative sequence direction.

GROUP # / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ’ / M.T.A


[NEG SEQ’]

Type: NONE

>M.T.A: 135

M.P.V(V2): 0.30

Block OC: YES

[0~359:1Lead]


In case that negative sequence over current is occurred, Minimum

Torque Angle of negative sequence current(I voltage(V

2

) is set

2

) against zero phase

GROUP # / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ’ / M.P.V(V2)

[NEG SEQ’]

Type: NONE

M.T.A: 135

>M.P.V(V2): 0.30

Block OC: YES

0(OFF),0.10~0.80xVT

Range 0(OFF), 0.10 ~ 0.80 xVT

Default 0.30 checking is disabled.

Step 0.01 xVT

Set Minimum Polarizing Voltage to check Negative Sequence. Voltage shall be higher than this set value to check the direction. Otherwise, direction check will be blocked. In case of setting 0(OFF), direction



GROUP # / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ’ / BLOCK OC

[NEG SEQ’]

Type: NONE

M.T.A: 135

M.P.V(V2): 0.30

>Block OC: YES


Range NO, YES

Default YES Step ~

Select whether to trip when polarizing voltage is dropped below minimum polarizing voltage set.

NO : Trip on over current element.




8.4. Cold Load Pickup


The cold load pickup function is used to prevent the switch(or CB) from incorrectly operating by the cold load current caused by applying voltage to a transformer, a reactor or a long-distance line.

ETMFC610 provides “Cold Load Pickup” to prevent fault indication functions(in case of FI type) and protection functions(in case of Protection type) from operating wrong by the cold load current caused by applying power to a transformer, a reactor or a long-distance line.

In the state of cold load, this function is used to restrain the operation fault indication functions and protection functions to over current occurring by change of load(the close of a switch on longdistance line, incoming heavy load etc.). This function to restrain fault indication functions and protection functions rise or drop the fault pickup current during certain time(CLPU Time) defined by a user. In case of FI control type, FI pickup current is changed(risen and dropped) during certain time. But, in case of Protection control type, pickup current of time overcurrent elements(51) is changed.

Over Current Pickup Level Step Up

At power loss (a Switch(or CB) is opened or a load current is 0A), the pickup current of FI or time overcurrent is risen as follows.

Operationa l Cold Load Multi '  1 





 Without Supply

Interval

Time

Time

 ( Pickup Multi '  1 )







As example, when ‘Pickup Multi’ and ‘Interval Time’ are set to be 3.0 and 60min respectively, over 30 min after power loss, the applied cold load multiple is 2. If the minimum working current is set to be 200A, the current of Over Current Pickup becomes 400A, twice as much as the minimum working current. In addition, after 60 min, the cold load multiple is fixed to be 3.

Over Current Pickup Level Step Down

If power is restored (52A closed or restoration of load current (over 2A)), the pickup current of FI or time overcurrent is dropped with the same speed when rising until the cold load multiple becomes 1.



When ‘Pickup Multi’ and ‘Interval Time’ are set to be 3.0 and 60 min respectively, the graph of the cold load multiple in “Figure 8-48. Cold Load Multiplier” is shown as follows.

NOTE:

The risen level of overcurrent pickup by multiple of cold load is the pickup level to operate overcurrent protection element. The standard current level of T-C curve is a minimum working current.

Cold Load Multiplier

Without Supply

× 3

T(60min)

0.5×T

(30min)

× 2

Supply Restore

T(60min)

0.5×T

(30min)

× 1

Time(min)

Figure 8-47. Cold Load Multiplier

8.4.1.1. Cold Load Pickup Setup

Place the curser on “COLD LOAD PICKUP” in GROUP# menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. This menu applies to both “Fault Indication type(FITYPE)” and “Protection type(PROTYPE)”.

GROUP # / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Function


[COLD LOAD PICKUP]

>Function: ENABLE

Make Use ‘I’: NO

Pickup Multi: 2.0

Interval Time: 10

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Set whether to Enable or disable the Cold load pickup function.

When it sets to ON, cold load multiplier is applied to pickup current of fault indication, phase, ground and negative sequence time overcurrent.



GROUP #/ COLD LOAD PICKUP / Make Use ‘I’

[COLD LOAD PICKUP]

> Function: ENABLE


Pickup Multi: 2.0

Interval Time: 10


Range YES, NO

Default NO Step ~

Set whether or not to be used as a decision condition for operating the cold load pickup function.

 If it sets to NO, power loss and power restoration are considered as open or close state of switch(or CB) and live line status.

In case of fault indication type, ETMFC610 decides on the power restoration condition when switch is closed(52A) and live line status. And ETMFC610 decides on the power loss condition when switch is opened(52B) or dead line status.

In case of protection type, ETMFC610 decides on the power restoration condition when CB is closed(52A). And

ETMFC610 decides on the power loss condition when CB is opened(52B).

 If it sets to YES, determine power loss and power restoration as current (less than or equal to 2A)

GROUP #/ COLD LOAD PICKUP / Pickup Multi’

Range 1.0~5.0 xMTC

[COLD LOAD PICKUP]

> Function: ENABLE


>Pickup Multi: 2.0

Interval Time: 10

[1.0~5.0:0.1xMTC]

Default 2.0 for overcurrent pickup current.

Step 0.1xMTC

Set the multiple of cold load. If 1 is set, the cold load multiple is not applied and the setting of minimum working current is always applied

GROUP #/ COLD LOAD PICKUP / Interval Time

Range 1~720 min

[COLD LOAD PICKUP]

> Function: ENABLE


> Pickup Multi: 2.0

>Interval Time: 10

[1~720:1 m]

Default 10 level is raised or dropped.

Step 1 min

Set the cold load time. During this set time, the overcurrent pickup



8.5. Monitoring


Place the curser on “MONITERING” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. This menu applies to both “Fault Indication type(FITYPE)” and “Protection type(PROTYPE)” and can set up monitoring function for line condition.

[MONITORING]

>1.BROKEN CONDUCT

2.VOLTAGE

3.FREQUENCY

4.POWER

5.DEMAND

6.PHASE DIFFERENCE

7.SYNCHRO’ CHECK

8.OPEN PHASE

9.LIVE LINE BLOCK

10.FAULT LOCATOR

11.LOAD CURR’ ALARM

12.POWER FACTOR

8.5.1. Broken Conductor(46BC)

Place the curser on “BROKEN CONDUCT” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

The broken conductor element detects when the ratio between the negative sequence current (I2) and the positive sequence current (I1) of the ETMFC610 is larger than the operation setting

(pickup) value. Under normal conditions I2/I1 ratio is zero but when a fault occurs on the load, this ratio of I2/I1 increases.

‘Broken Conductor’ protection element configuration is as below .

.

Figure 8-48. Brocken Conductor(46BC) Function Block Diagram



The figure below shows the function logic diagram of Broken Conductor.

Figure 8-49. Brocken Conductor(46BC) Function Logic Diagram

The Broken Conductor element in following settings should be enabled.

GROUP # / MONITORING / BROKEN CONDUCT / Function

[BROKEN CONDUCT]

>Function: DISABLE

Pickup(I2/I1): 5

Time Delay: 4.00

Min.I: 60

Max.I: 500

[DISABLE/ENABLE]



Set the function of broken conduct element as enable or disable.


If function = ENABLE, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts an alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.

GROUP # / MONITORING / BROKEN CONDUCT / Pickup(I2/I1)

Range 1~100 %

[BROKEN CONDUCT]

Function: DISABLE

>Pickup(I2/I1): 5

Time Delay: 4.00

Min.I: 60

> Max.I: 500

[1~100:1 %]

Default 5 Step

Set the Broken Conductor pickup level.

1 %

GROUP # / MONITORING / BROKEN CONDUCT / Time Delay

[BROKEN CONDUCT]

Function: DISABLE

Pickup(I2/I1): 5

>Time Delay: 4.00

Min.I: 60

> Max.I: 500

[0.00:600.00:0.01 s]

Range 0.00~600.00 sec


Set the Broken Conductor function delay time.



GROUP # / MONITORING / BROKEN CONDUCT / Min. I

[BROKEN CONDUCT]

Function: DISABLE

Pickup(I2/I1): 5

Time Delay: 4.00

>Min.I: 60

> Max.I: 500

[0(OFF), 1~630:1 A] http://www.entecene.co.kr


Default 60 Step 1A

Enter the minimum value of current required to allow the broken conduct element to operate.

Positive sequence current is less than setting value, element will not operate.

GROUP # / MONITORING / BROKEN CONDUCT / Min. I

Range 0(OFF), 10~1600

[BROKEN CONDUCT]

Function: DISABLE

Pickup(I2/I1): 5

Time Delay: 4.00

> Min.I: 60

>Max.I: 500

[0(OFF),10~1600:1 A]

Default 500

Enter the maximum value of current required to allow the broken conduct element to operate.

Step 1A

Positive sequence current is greater than setting value, element will not operate.

8.5.2. Voltage (27/59/64N/47P)

Place the curser on “VOLTAGE” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. In this menu, undervoltage, overvoltage and neutral elements will be described. And the voltage menu is composed with 6 sub-menus as follows:

[VOLTAGE]

>1.UNDER VOLT1

2.UNDER VOLT2

3.OVER VOLT1

4.OVER VOLT2

5.NEUTRAL OVERVOLT1

6.NEUTRAL OVERVOLT2

8.5.2.1. Undervoltage (27)

In case that nominal voltage is kept below a certain voltage for a certain time, two under voltage elements make an alarm operation.

The under voltage element are set in GROUP setting. It is available to select a number of phase to be checked for undervoltage function.



1) UNDER VOLT1 Setup http://www.entecene.co.kr

The undervoltage 1 should be enabled to following settings.

GROUP # / MONITORING / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Function


[UNDER VOLT1]

>Function: DISABLE

Pickup: 0.80

Time Delay: 5.00

Min. V: 0.10

Voltage Type: 1P

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Set the function of under voltage 1 element as enable or disable.


If function = ENABLE,


the feature is operational. When the feature asserts an alarm condition, the device gives the alarm.

GROUP # / MONITORING / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Pickup

Range 0.10~1.40 xVT

[UNDER VOLT1]

Function: DISABLE

>Pickup: 0.80

Time Delay: 5.00

Min. V: 0.10

Voltage Type: 1P

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]


Enter the pickup value for under voltage 1 element.

This setting is the ratio of the rated voltage. If the set value is 0.80xVT and the phase rated voltage is 13.2kV, the phase voltage should be less than 10.56kV (= 13.2kV * 0.80) to operate this element.

GROUP # / MONITORING / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Time Delay

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

[UNDER VOLT1]

Function: DISABLE

Pickup: 0.80

>Time Delay: 5.00

Min. V: 0.10

Voltage Type: 1P

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]


Set the time delay to operate this element. If the voltage is maintained during this time delay below the pickup level, this element will operate.

GROUP # / MONITORING / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Min. V

Range 0.10~1.40 xVT

[UNDER VOLT1]

Function: DISABLE

Pickup: 0.80

Time Delay: 5.00

>Min. V: 0.10

Voltage Type: 1P

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

Default 0.10

Set the minimum voltage to operate this element. This setting is the ratio of the rated voltage.

Step 0.01 xVT



GROUP # / MONITORING / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Voltage Type

[UNDER VOLT1]

Function: OFF

Pickup: 0.80

Time Delay: 5.00

Min. V: 0.10

>Voltage Type: 1P

[1P/2P/3P]

Range 1P, 2P, 3P

Default 1P Step ~

Set a number of phase to be detected for Undervoltage.

1P : More than 1 phase is detected with more than pickup voltage.

2P : More than 2 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.


2) UNDER VOLT2 Setup

The undervoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the undervoltage 1.

8.5.2.2. Overvoltage (59) and Neutral Overvoltage (64N)

In case that nominal voltage is kept higher than a certain voltage for a certain time, over voltage elements makes an alarm operation. Over voltage elements is set in GROUP setting. Phase overvoltage(59) elements are available to select a number of phase to be checked for overvoltage function. Neutral overvoltage elements operate with zero sequence voltage (3V0) by the input phase voltage. And negative Sequence overvoltage elements (V2) also operate by the input phase voltage.

1) OVER VOLT1 Setup

The overvoltage 1 should be enabled to following settings.

GROUP # / MONITORING / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLT1 / Function


[OVER VOLT1]

>Function: DISABLE

Pickup: 1.10

Time Delay: 5.00

Voltage Type: 1P

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Set the function of over voltage 1 element as enable or disable.







GROUP # / MONITORING / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLT1 / Pickup

[OVER VOLT1]

Function: DISABLE

>Pickup: 1.10

Time Delay: 5.00

Voltage Type: 1P

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

Range 0.10~1.40 xVT


Enter the pickup value for over voltage element1.

This setting is the ratio of the rated voltage. If the set value is 1.10xVT and the phase rated voltage is 13.2kV, the phase voltage should be higher than 14.52kV (= 13.2kV * 1.10) to operate this element.

GROUP # / MONITORING / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLT1 / Time Delay

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

[OVER VOLT1]

Function: DISABLE

Pickup: 1.10

>Time Delay: 5.00

Voltage Type: 1P

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]


Set the time delay to operate this element. If the voltage is maintained above this pickup level for this time delay, this element will operate.

GROUP # / MONITORING / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLT1 / Voltage Type

[OVER VOLT1]

Function: DISABLE

Pickup: 1.10

Time Delay: 5.00

>Voltage Type: 1P

[1P/2P/3P]

Range 1P, 2P, 3P

Default 1P Step ~

Set a number of phase to be detected for Overvoltage

1P : More than 1 phase is detected with more than pickup voltage.



2) OVER VOLT2 Setup

The overvoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1.

3) NEUTRAL OVERVOLT 1 Setup

The neutral overvoltage 1 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1. However, there is no setting menu for voltage type.

4) NEUTRAL OVERVOLT 2 Setup

The neutral overvoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1. However, there is no setting menu for voltage type.



5) NEQ OVERVOLT 1 Setup http://www.entecene.co.kr

The negative sequence overvoltage 1 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1.

However, there is no setting menu for voltage type.

6) NEQ OVERVOLT 2 Setup

The negative sequence overvoltage 1 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1.

However, there is no setting menu for voltage type.

8.5.3. Frequency (81)

Place the curser on “FREQUENCY” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. In this menu, underfrequency, overfrequency and frequency delay elements will be described. And the frequency menu is composed with 6 sub-menus as follows:

8.5.3.1. Underfrequency (81U)

[FREQUENCY]

>1.UNDER FREQUENCY1

2.UNDER FREQUENCY2

3.OVER FREQUENCY1

4.OVER FREQUENCY2

5.FREQUENCY DELAY

The underfrequency element is activated to alarm when the distribution system frequency drops below a specified frequency pickup for a specified time. The power system frequency is measured from the zero crossing on the VA-N voltage input for Wye connected VTs and VA-B voltage for

Delta connected VTs.(If VTs is delta connection(



), V

A-B

voltage is zero crossing and if wye connection(Y), V

A-N

voltage zero crossing to measure frequency.)

The underfrequency minimum voltage and underfrequency minimum current are used to prevent incorrect operation when dead line.



The underfrequency element should be enabled to following settings.

1) UNDER FREQUENCY 1 Setup

The under frequency 1 should be enabled to following settings.

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY / UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Function


[UNDER FREQUENCY1]

>Function: DISABLE

Pickup: 58.50

Time Delay: 2.00

Reset Time: 2.00

Min.Volt: 0.10

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Set the function of under frequency 1 element as enable or disable.





GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY /UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Pickup

Range 40.00 ~ 65.00 Hz

[UNDER FREQUENCY1]

Function: DISABLE

>Pickup: 58.50

Time Delay: 2.00

Reset Time: 2.00

Min.Volt: 0.10

[40.00~65.00:0.01Hz]

Default 58.50 Step 0.01Hz

Enter the level of which the underfrequency element is to pickup.

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY /UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Time Delay

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

[UNDER FREQUENCY1]

Function: DISABLE

Pickup: 58.50

>Time Delay: 2.00

Reset Time: 2.00

Min.Volt: 0.10

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]


It sets the delay time to operate the underfrequency element.

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY / UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Reset Time

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

[UNDER FREQUENCY1]

Function: DISABLE

Pickup: 58.50

Time Delay: 2.00

>Reset Time: 2.00

Min.Volt: 0.10

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]


It sets the time to reset the underfrequency element



GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY / UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Min. Volt

[UNDER FREQUENCY1]

Function: DISABLE

Pickup: 58.50

Time Delay: 2.00

Reset Time: 2.00

>Min.Volt: 0.10

[0.00~1.40:0.01 xVT]

Range 0.00~1.40 xVT

Default 0.10

Enter the minimum voltage required to allow the underfrequency element to operate.

Step 0.01 xVT

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY / UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Min. I

[UNDER FREQUENCY1]

Pickup: 58.50

Time Delay: 2.00

Reset Time: 2.00

Min.Volt: 0.10

>Min. I: 60

[0(OFF), 1~630:1 A]

Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 630A

Default 60

Enter the minimum value of current required for any phase to allow the underfrequency element to operate.

Step 1A

2) UNDER FREQUENCY 2 Setup

The underfrequency 2 settings process a very similar method to the underfrequency 1.



8.5.3.2. Overfrequency (81O)


In case that overfrequency is kept higher than a certain frequency for a certain time, overfrequency element makes an alarm operation. Overfrequency element is set in GROUP setting. If VTs is delta



- connection V

A-B

is to be zero-crossing and if Y connection, V

A-N

.is to be zero-crossing.

Overfrequency minimum voltage and minimum current is used to prevent mal-operation when dead line.

1) OVER FREQUENCY 1 Setup

The over frequency 1 should be enabled to following settings;

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY /OVER FREQUENCY1 / Function


[OVER FREQUENCY1]

>Function: DISABLE

Pickup: 62.50

Time Delay: 2.00

Reset Time: 2.00

Min. Volt: 0.10

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Set the function of over frequency 1 element as enable or disable.





GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Pickup

Range 40.00 ~ 65.00 Hz

[OVER FREQUENCY1]

Function: DISABLE

>Pickup: 62.50

Time Delay: 2.00

Reset Time: 2.00

Min. Volt: 0.10

[40.00~65.00:0.01Hz]

Default 62.50 Step 0.01Hz

Enter the level of which the overfrequency element is to pickup.

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Time Delay

Range 0.00~ 600.00 sec

[OVER FREQUENCY1]

Function: DISABLE

Pickup: 62.50

>Time Delay: 2.00

Reset Time: 2.00

Min. Volt: 0.10

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]


Sets the delay time to operate the overfrequency element.



GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Reset Time

[OVER FREQUENCY1]

Function: DISABLE

Pickup: 62.50

Time Delay: 2.00

>Reset Time: 2.00

Min. Volt: 0.10

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec


Sets the time to reset the overfrequency element.

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Min. V

[OVER FREQUENCY1]

Pickup: 62.50

Time Delay: 2.00

Reset Time: 2.00

>Min. Volt: 0.10

Min. I: 60

[0.00~1.40:0.01 xVT]

Range 0.00~1.40 xVT

Default 0.10 Step

Enter the minimum voltage required to allow the overfrequency element and overfrequency to operate.

0.01 xVT

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Min. I

Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 630A

[OVER FREQUENCY1]

Pickup: 62.50

Time Delay: 2.00

Reset Time: 2.00

Min. Volt: 0.10

>Min. I: 60

[0(OFF),1~630:1A]

Default 60 overfrequency element to operate.

Step 1A

Enter the minimum value of current required for any phase to allow the

2) OVER FREQUENCY 2 Setup

The overfrequency 2 settings process a very similar method to the overfrequency 1.



8.5.3.3. Frequency Decay (81D)


When frequency fluctuates due to unbalance between load and active power in power system,

ETMFC610 offers frequency decay element in order to detect unstable condition in the power system.

Frequency decay should be enabled as follows;

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Function

[FREQUENCY DECAY]

>Function: DISABLE

Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00

Time Delay: 2.00

Reset Time: 2.00

Min.Freq: 45.00

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Default DISABLE DISABLE ~

Set the function of over frequency decay element as enable or disable.



GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Pickup(Hz/sec)

Range 0.01~5.00 Hz/sec

[FREQUENCY DECAY]

Function: DISABLE

>Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00

Time Delay: 2.00

Reset Time: 2.00

Min.Freq: 45.00

[0.01~5.00:0.01Hz]

Default 1.00 Step 0.01Hz/sec

Enter the level of which the frequency decay element is to pickup.



GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Time Delay

[FREQUENCY DECAY]

Function: DISABLE

Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00

>Time Delay: 2.00

Reset Time: 2.00

Min.Freq: 45.00

[0.05~600.00:0.01s]

Range

Default

0.05~600.00sec

2.00 Step 0.01sec

Set the delay time for frequency decay elements. According to pickup setting value, time window of frequency decay rate is changed described in following table.

Detection time of frequency decay element is like below;

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Reset Time

Range 0.05~600.00sec

[FREQUENCY DECAY]

Function: DISABLE

Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00

Time Delay: 2.00

>Reset Time: 2.00

Min.Freq: 45.00

[0.05~600.00:0.01s]

Default 2.00 Step 0.01sec

Set the reset time of Frequency decay element pickup. It must configure reset time longer than time window.

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Min. Freq

[FREQUENCY DECAY]

Function: DISABLE

Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00

Time Delay: 2.00

Reset Time: 2.00

>Min.Freq: 50.00

[45.00~65.00:0.01Hz]

Range 45.00~65.00 Hz


Set the minimum frequency in order to operate frequency decay element. When frequency is bigger than setting value, it will be operated.



GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Min. Volt

[FREQUENCY DECAY]

Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00

Time Delay: 2.00

Reset Time: 2.00

Min.Freq: 45.00

>Min.Volt: 0.10

[0.00~1.40:0.01 xVT]

Range 0.00~1.40 xVT


Set the minimum voltage in order to operate frequency decay element.

Even if one of the three phases on source side is bigger than this setting value, it will be operated.

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Min. I


[FREQUENCY DECAY]

>Min.I: 60

Type : ABSOLUTE

[0(OFF), 1~630A:1A]

Default 60 value, it will be operated.

Step 1A

Set the minimum current in order to operate frequency decay element.

Even if one of the three phases on source side is bigger than this setting

GROUP # / MONITORING / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Reset Time

Range INCREASE, DECREASE, ABSOLUTE

[FREQUENCY DECAY]

Min.I: 60

>Type : ABSOLUTE

[INC/DEC/ABSOLUTE]

Default ABSOLUTE

Set operation trend type of Frequency decay element.

When INCREASE is configured, rate is increased.

Step ~

it operates when frequency decay

When DECREASE is configured, it operates when frequency decay rate is decreased.

When ABSOLUTE is configured, it operates when absolute value of frequency decay rate is bigger than pickup setting value.



8.5.4. Power (32)


Place the curser on “POWER” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. In this menu, forward power elements and directional power elements will be described.

And the power setting menus are composed with 3 sub-menus as follows:

[POWER]

>1.FUNCTION

2.FORWARD POWER

3.DIRECTIONAL POWER

8.5.4.1. Common Setting for Power elements

This setting applies to all power elements of forward power and directional power elements;

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER / Function

[FUNCTION]

>Function: DISABLE

BLK After RS: 5.00

[ DISABLE/ENABLE]



Set the function of power elements as enable or disable.



GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER / BLK After CL

Range 0.02~600.00 sec

[FUNCTION]

>Function: DISABLE

BLK After CL: 5.00

[ 0.02~600.00:0.01s]


Set the Block Time After Close for power elements.

To prevent malfunction of power elements by inrush current incurred at the restoration of load supply, set the time that each power element ’ s operation is suppressed after the restoration of load supply. After close operation, all function for power elements are blocked during this set time.



8.5.4.2. Forward Power(32FP)


ETMFC610 provides the two of the Forward Power (32FP) elements. If three phase active power is kept above the pickup level for a certain time, ETMFC610 generates an alarm for this element.

Three phase active power is calculated as below, and it operates only about the forward (positive) active power.

 WYE VT Connection Type

 DELTA VT Connection Type

*. Note )

NON-OPERATION OPERATION

-P P+

0

Figure 8-50. Forward Power(32FP) Elements Characteristic

The forward power should be enabled to following settings;

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER / FORWARD POWER /Pickup1

[FORWARD POWER]

>Pickup1: 0.00

Time Delay1: 5.00

Pickup2: 0.00

Time Delay2: 5.00

0(OFF),0.00~300.00MW

Range

Default

0.00~300.00 MW

0.00 Step 0.01

Set the pickup level of forward power element 1

*. NOTE ) Pickup2 setting is same as Pickup1 setting above.



GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER / FORWARD POWER /Time Delay1

[FORWARD POWER]

Pickup1: 0.00

>Time Delay1: 5.00

Pickup2: 0.00

Time Delay2: 5.00

[0.02~600.00:0.01s]

Range

Default

0.02~600.00 sec

5.00 Step 0.01

Set each time delay of forward power element 1.

*. NOTE ) Time Delay2 setting is same as Time Delay1 setting above.

8.5.4.3. Directional Power(32P)

ETMFC610 has two directional power(32P) elements. If measured three phase power is kept above the pickup level for a certain time and measured phasor angle of the power is located on operation area, ETMFC610 generates an alarm for this element.

Q

Directional

Power

Operation

Area

Minimum

Operation

Power Torque

Angle

Restraint

Area

P

Figure 8-51. Directional Power(32P) Elements Characteristic



The direction power should be enabled to following settings; http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER / DIRECTION POWER /Min.Power1

[DIRECTION POWER]

>Min.Power1: OFF

Angle1: 0.00

Time Delay1: 0.00

Min.Power2: OFF

Angle2: 0.00

-300.00~+300.00:0.01

Range

Default

0(OFF), -300.00~300.00 MW

0(OFF) Step

Set the minimum power level for directional power element 1.

*. NOTE ) Min.Power2 setting is same as Min.Power1 setting above.

0.01 MW

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER / DIRECTION POWER /Angle 1

[DIRECTION POWER]

Min.Power1: OFF

>Angle1: 0.00

Time Delay1: 0.00

Min.Power2: OFF

Angle2: 0.00

0.00~359.99:0.01deg

Range

Default

0.00~359.99 degree

0.00 Step 0.01 degree

Set torque degree for directional power element 1.

*. NOTE ) Angle2 setting is same as Angle1 setting above.

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER / DIRECTION POWER / Time Delay 1

[DIRECTION POWER]

Min.Power1: OFF

Angle1: 0.00

>Time Delay1: 1.00

Min.Power2: OFF

Angle2: 0.00

[0.02~600.00:0.01s]

Range

Default

0.02~600.00 sec

1.00 Step

Set time delay for directional power element 1.

*. NOTE ) Time Delay2 setting is same as Time Delay1 setting above.

0.01 sec



8.5.5. Demand (49)


ETMFC610 has five types for demand detect elements. When Demand current or demand power over the detect level is maintained a constant time during the detect element activation, ETMFC610 generates an alarm for this element.. The detect level and delay time can be set individually per phase current, ground current, negative sequence current, active power and reactive power elements.

And the demand current menu is composed with 5 sub-menus as follows:

[DEMAND]

>1.PHASE

2.GROUND

3.NEG SEQ’

4.ACTIVE POWER

5.REACTIVE POWER

8.5.5.1. Phase Demand Current (49P)

Phase demand current element setting items are same as following;

GROUP # / MONITORING / DEMAND / PHASE / Function


[PHASE]

>Function: DISABLE

Pickup: 500

Time Delay: 10.00

Demand Type:THERMAL

Thermal Interval:15

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Set whether phase demand current element is used or not.

GROUP # / MONITORING / DEMAND / PHASE / Pickup

Range 10~1600A

[PHASE]

Function: DISABLE

>Pickup: 500

Time Delay: 10.00

Demand Type:THERMAL

Thermal Interval:15

[10~1600:1 A]

Default 500 Step 1A

Set the pickup level of the phase demand current element



GROUP # / REC MONITORING LOSER / DEMAND / PHASE / Time Delay

[PHASE]

Pickup: 500

>Time Delay: 10.00

Demand Type:THERMAL

Thermal Interval:15

Block Interval: 15

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Range 0.00~600.00


Set the time delay of the phase demand current element

GROUP # / MONITORING / DEMAND / PHASE / Demand Type

[PHASE]

Pickup: 500

Time Delay: 10.00

>Demand Type:THERMAL

Thermal Interval:15

Block Interval: 15

[THERMAL/BLOCK]

Range THERMAL, BLOCK

Default THERMAL

Set the type of arithmetic operation for the phase demand current element.

Step ~

GROUP # / MONITORING / DEMAND / PHASE / Thermal Interval

Range 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min

[PHASE]

Pickup: 500

Time Delay: 10.00

Demand Type:THERMAL

>Thermal Interval:15

Block Interval: 15

[5/10/15/20/30/60m]

Default 15

Set the interval of the phase demand current element when thermal type is selected for arithmetic operation.

Step ~

GROUP # / MONITORING / DEMAND / PHASE / Block Interval

Range 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min

[PHASE]

Pickup: 500

Time Delay: 10.00

Demand Type:THERMAL

Thermal Interval:15

>Block Interval: 15

[5/10/15/20/30/60m]

Default 15 is selected for arithmetic operation.

Step ~

Set the interval of the phase demand current element when block type

8.5.5.2. Ground Demand Current (49G)

Ground demand current element settings process is similar method to the phase demand current element.

8.5.5.3. Negative Sequence Demand Current (49Q)

Negative sequence demand current element settings process is similar method to the phase demand current element.



8.5.5.4. ACTIVE POWER Setup


Active demand power element settings process is similar method to the phase demand current element.

8.5.5.5. REACTIVE POWER Setup

Reactive demand power element settings process is similar method to the phase demand current element.

8.5.6. Phase Difference

Place the curser on “PHASE DIFFERENCE” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. The ETMFC610 provides a phase difference element to check whether the source side and the load side are in the open state. If the difference in voltage magnitude, phase difference, and frequency difference between the source side and the load side deviate from the set value, it is determined that synchronization is inconsistent and a DIFFPT (Phase Different Timeout) event is registered. In the PLC configuration, manual close can be blocked by local or remote control in case of synchronization inconsistency (Manual close is blocked when default is not matched with synchronization)

The phase difference element in following settings should be enabled.

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Function

[PHASE DIFFERENCE]

>Function: DISABLE

Dead Line Lv: 0.50

Live Line Lv: 0.80

Max Volt Diff: 0.10

Max Angle Diff: 10

[OFF/ON]



It decides whether to use Phase difference element.

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Dead Line Lv

[PHASE DIFFERENCE]

Function: DISABLE

>Dead Line Lv: 0.50

Live Line Lv: 0.80

Max Volt Diff: 0.10

Max Angle Diff: 10

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

Range 0.10~1.40 xVT


Enter the dead line maximum voltage for phase difference

Used to Prevent the phase difference element for voltage below this level.



GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Live Line Lv

[PHASE DIFFERENCE]

Function: DISABLE

Dead Line Lv: 0.50

>Live Line Lv: 0.80

Max Volt Diff: 0.10

Max Angle Diff: 10

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

Range

Default

Enter the live line minimum voltage for phase difference element.

Used to activate the phase difference element for voltage over this level.

0.10~1.40 xVT

0.80 Step

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Max Volt Diff

0.01 xVT

[PHASE DIFFERENCE]

Function: DISABLE

Dead Line Lv: 0.50

Live Line Lv: 0.80

>Max Volt Diff: 0.10

Max Angle Diff: 10

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

Range 0.10~1.40 xVT


Enter the maximum voltage difference.

A voltage magnitude differential of the two input voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for phase difference element.

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Max Angle Diff


[PHASE DIFFERENCE]

Function: DISABLE

Dead Line Lv: 0.50

Live Line Lv: 0.80

Max Volt Diff: 0.10

>Max Angle Diff: 10

[1~100:1 deg]


Enter the maximum angle difference of the phase difference element.

An angular differential between the voltage angles below this value is within the permissible limit for phase difference element.

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Max Freq. Diff

Range 0.01 ~ 5.00 Hz

[PHASE DIFFERENCE]

>Max Freq.Diff: 2.00

Check Phase: ALL

Time Delay: 1.0

[0.01~5.00:0.01 Hz]


Enter the maximum frequency difference of voltages.

A frequency differential between the voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for phase difference element.

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Check Phase

Range ALL, A, B, C

[PHASE DIFFERENCE]

Max Freq.Diff: 2.0

>Check Phase: ALL

Time Delay: 1.0

[ALL/A/B/C]

Default

Select reference voltage for phase difference element on load side.

ALL element.

ALL Step ~

: Three phase voltages on load side are used for phase difference

A/B/C : Single phase voltage on load side is used for phase difference element.



GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Time delay

Range 0.0 ~ 600.0sec

[PHASE DIFFERENCE]

> Max Freq.Diff: 2.0

Check Phase: ALL

>Time Delay: 1.00

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Default 1.00 Step

Set delay time for phase difference element

0.01sec

8.5.7. Synchro’ Check (25)

The ETMFC610 provides a synchronism check element. The synchronism check element is used when both the source and load side circuit are in a live state, when the phases of the two circuits are synchronized. If it remains in the asynchronous state for the set waiting time, it will not close even after synchronization.

If all of the following conditions are satisfied, it is determined to be as synchronization.

 The voltage of the source side and the load side must be within the synchronous detection range.

If the voltage is out of the lower limit value (Min. Volt) and the upper limit value (Max. Volt), it is determined that the voltage of the system is not stable and it is determined as asynchronous.

 The frequency on the source side and the load side must be within ± 5 Hz of the rated value.

 The voltage difference between the source side and the load side must be less than or equal to the set voltage.

 The frequency difference between the source side and the load side must be less than or equal to the set frequency difference.

 The phase difference between the source side and the load side must be less than or equal to the set



The phase difference (ΔAngle) of the two circuits means the sum of the currently measured phase difference( ∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 ) and the compensation value (∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 ) of the phase difference to be generated during body turn-in time by the slip frequency. The formula for calculating the phase difference is as follows;

∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 = | ∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 + ∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 |

= | (∠𝑉 − ∠𝑉 ) + { (𝑓 − 𝑓 ) × 𝑇𝑖𝑚𝑒 × 360° } |

*. NOTE) The variables used in the above equation are as follows.

− ∠𝑉 : Voltage phase at the source side

− ∠𝑉 : Voltage phase at the load side

− 𝑓 : Frequency at source, 𝑓 : Frequency at load, Sleep Frequency : 𝑓 - 𝑓

− 𝑇𝑖𝑚𝑒 : CB closing time [s]

However, when the source side or load side circuit is diagonal, it is always closes regardless of synchronous detection.

The synchronism check element in following settings should be enabled.

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Function


[SYNCHRO’ CHECK]

>Function: DISABLE

Max.Volt: 1.10

Min.Volt: 0.30

Max Volt Diff: 0.10

Angle Diff1: 30.0

[DISABLE,ENABLE]


It decides whether to use synchronism check element .

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Max.Volt

Range 0.10~1.40 xVT

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK]

Function: DISABLE

>Max.Volt: 1.10

Min.Volt: 0.30

Max Volt Diff: 0.10

Angle Diff1: 30.0

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]


It sets minimum system voltage for synchronism check.



GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Min.Volt

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK]

Function: DISABLE

Max.Volt: 1.10

>Min.Volt: 0.30

Max Volt Diff: 0.10

Angle Diff1: 30.0

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

Range 0.10~1.40 xVT

Default 0.30 http://www.entecene.co.kr

Step 0.01 xVT

It sets minimum system voltage for synchronism check.

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Max.Volt Diff

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK]

Function: DISABLE

Max.Volt: 1.10

Min.Volt: 0.30

>Max Volt Diff: 0.10

Angle Diff1: 30.0

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

Range 0.10~1.40 xVT


Enter the maximum voltage difference.

A voltage magnitude differential of the two input voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism check.

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Angle Diff 1

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK]

Function: DISABLE

Max.Volt: 1.10

Min.Volt: 0.30

Max Volt Diff: 0.10

>Angle Diff1: 30.0

0(OFF),20.0~80.0deg

Range 0(OFF), 20.0~80.0 degree

Default 30.0 Step 0.1 degree

Enter the maximum angle difference.

An angular differential between the voltage angles below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism check.

*. NOTE) Angle Diff 2 is same as Angle Diff 1 above.

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Slip Freq.

Range 0.5~5.0 Hz

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK]

Angle Diff2: 30.0

>Slip Freq.: 1.0

Sync Phase: A

Compens’ Angle: 0

Load-V Factor: 1.00

[0.5~5.0:0.1 Hz]


Enter the maximum slip frequency(frequency difference).

An angular differential between the frequency below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism check.

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Sync Phase

Range A, B, C, AB, BC, CA

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK]

Angle Diff2: 30.0

Slip Freq.: 1.0

>Sync Phase: A

Compens’ Angle: 0

Load-V Factor: 1.00

[A/B/C/AB/BC/CA]

Default A Step ~

Select reference voltage for synchronism check element on load side.



GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Compens’ Angle

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK]

Angle Diff2: 30.0

Slip Freq.: 1.0

Sync Phase: A

>Compens’ Angle: 0

Load-V Factor: 1.00

[0~330:30 deg]

Range 0~330 degree


When calculating the phase difference between the source side and the load side, set the load side compensate angle. The load side angle is the actual measured angle plus the set value.

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Load-V Factor

Range 0.50~2.00

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK]

Angle Diff2: 30.0

Slip Freq.: 1.0

Sync Phase: A

Compens’ Angle: 0

>Load-V Factor: 1.00

[0.50~2.00:0.01]


It is the compensation factor of the load side voltage magnitude. When calculating the voltage difference between the source side and the load side, it will apply this value to the load side voltage multiplied by this set value.

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Closing Time

Range 0.0~600.0 ms

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK]

Sync Phase: A

Compens’ Angle: 0

Load-V Factor: 1.00

>Closing Time: 50.0

CL Wait Time: 10

[0.0~600.0:0.1 ms]

Default 50.0 Step 0.1 ms

It sets the time to close the recloser. The phase difference calculation value can be changed according to the switch(or CB) closing time.

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / CL Wait Time

Range 1~600 sec

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK]

Sync Phase: A

Compens’ Angle: 0

Load-V Factor: 1.00

Closing Time: 50.0

>CL Wait Time: 10

[1~600:1 s]

Default 10 command, it does not close.

Step 1 sec

It sets synchronous detection input wait time. If the synchronous condition is not satisfied during this set time after manual close

The front panel “25 PHASE DIFFERENCE” LED lights up when the manual close command is in the standby state .



8.5.8. Open Phase


This function determines phase as open phase when one or two phase voltages are more than Off

Level and determines as normal if that all three phase voltages are higher than On Level. Dead line normal condition it does not indicate open phase.

When detecting the open phase, the corresponding LED of the open phase LED (VA / VR, VB /

VS, VC / VT) on the front panel lights up.

The setting items of OPEN PHASE element are same as below.

GROUP # / MONITORING / OPEN PHASE / Function

[OPEN PHASE]

>Function: DISABLE

On Level: 0.80

> Off Level: 0.50

Time Delay: 4.00

[DISABLE,ENABLE]



Set whether it activates open phase function to detect open phase or not.

GROUP # / MONITORING / OPEN PHASE/ On Level

[OPEN PHASE]

Function: DISABLE

>On Level: 0.80

> Off Level: 0.50

Time Delay: 4.00

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

Range 0.10~1.40 xVT

Default 0.80 Step

Set voltage level to detect open of phase.

0.01 xVT

GROUP # / MONITORING / OPEN PHASE/ Off Level

Range 0.10~1.40 xVT

[OPEN PHASE]

Function: DISABLE

On Level: 0.80

>Off Level: 0.50

Time Delay: 4.00

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

Default 0.50 Step

Set voltage level to detect loss of phase.

0.01 xVT

GROUP # / MONITORING / OPEN PHASE/ Time Delay

Range 0.00~600.00 sec

[OPEN PHASE]

Function: DISABLE

On Level: 0.80

Off Level: 0.50

>Time Delay: 4.00

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Default 4.00

Set delay time to detect open phase.

Step 0.01 sec



8.5.9. Live Line Block


It is to block LBS closing if the load side is live line.

GROUP # / MONITORING /LIVE LINE BLOCK / Function

[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING]

>Funcktion: DISABLE

> Live Level: 0.80

> Source: VS&VL

Time Delay: 0.10

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Default OFF Step

It decides whether to use Live line block.

~

GROUP # / MONITORING / LIVE LINE BLOCK / Live Level


Funcktion: DISABLE

>Live Level: 0.80

> Source: VS&VL

Time Delay: 0.10

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

Range 0.10~1.40 xVT

Default 0.80

Set pickup level of live line

Step 0.01 xVT

GROUP # / MONITORING / LIVE LINE BLOCK / Source

Range VS, VL, VS&VL


Funcktion: DISABLE

> Live Level: 0.80

>Source: VS&VL

Time Delay: 0.10

[VS/VL/VS&VL]

Default





VS :

VL :

VS&VL Step

Set which side of voltage to detect live line.

~

Switch(or CB)’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage

Switch(or CB)’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage

 VS&VL : Switch(or CB)’s Source and Load Side Voltage

GROUP # / MONITORING /LIVE/DEAD BLOCK / Time Delay

Range 0.00~600.00 sec


Funcktion: DISABLE

> Live Level: 0.80

Source: VS&VL

>Time Delay: 0.10

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]


Set a time to detect live line in load side. The live line is determined if load side voltage is more than pickup level for this set time.



8.5.10. Fault Locator


The fault locator calculates the distance to the fault. When fault occurs the magnitude and the phase of voltage and current are varied, and then fault type (phase to ground, (phase to phase to ground), phase to phase, three phase) can be determined by the analysis of these variations, and fault distance can be calculated by the estimation of the apparent impedance.

This calculation is based on the assumptions that the feeder positive and zero sequence impedance are a constant per unit distance and fault impedance is composed of pure resistance. In calculating, errors could be introduced by several reasons (fault resistance etc.), the major error due to fault resistance can be reduced by comparing the prefault current and voltage to the fault current and voltage.

For more accurate calculation, the prefault data is required at least 2 cycles, and the after fault data is required at least 2 cycles.

If the line impedance per unit and total length were known, the fault distance can be easily achieved, but source impedance is not required.

Fault data may not be accurate for a close-into-fault condition where there is no prefault power flow.

The algorithm for the fault locator is most applicable to a radial three-phase feeder.

Faulted distribution system is considered as following simplified “Figure 8-36. Faulted distribution system circuit” for example.

mZ (1-m)Z

I

A

V

A

I

F

R

F

L

O

A

D

Figure 8-52.

Faulted distribution system circuit

The calculated “Fault Location” information be checked on the “Fault Cycle” event menu. For more details, refer to “9.2. Fault Event” and “9.3. Fault Cycle - Summary” .



The fault locator settings are as follows;

GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Function

[FAULT LOCATOR]

>Function: DISABLE

Feeder Length: 5.0

Z1 (Real): 1.00

Z1 (Imag): 1.00

Z0 (Real): 1.00

Z0 (Imag): 1.00

[DISABLE/ENABLE]


Default DISABLE

It decides whether to use Fault locator. http://www.entecene.co.kr

Step ~

GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Feeder Length

[FAULT LOCATOR]

Function: DISABLE

>Feeder Length: 5.0

Z1 (Real): 1.00

Z1 (Imag): 1.00

Z0 (Real): 1.00

Z0 (Imag): 1.00

[1.0~99.9:0.1km]

Range 1.0 ~ 99.9 km

Default 5.0 Step 0.1 km

Enter the total length of the feeder in kilometers

GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z1 (Real)

Range 0.01~99.9 9 ohm

[FAULT LOCATOR]

Function: DISABLE

Feeder Length: 5.0

>Z1 (Real): 1.00

Z1 (Imag): 1.00

Z0 (Real): 1.00

Z0 (Imag): 1.00

[0.01~99.99:0.01ohm]

Default 1.00 impedance, in actual ohms.

Step 0.01ohm

Enter the total real components of the feeder positive sequence

GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z1 (Imag)

Range 0.01~99.9 9 ohm

[FAULT LOCATOR]

Function: DISABLE

Feeder Length: 0.0

Z1 (Real): 1.00

Z1 (Imag): 1.00

Z0 (Real): 1.00

Z0 (Imag): 1.00

[0.01~99.99:0.01ohm]

Default 1.00 impedance, in actual ohms.

Step 0.01ohm

Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder positive sequence

GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z0 (Real)

[FAULT LOCATOR]

Function: DISABLE

Feeder Length: 0.0

Z1 (Real): 1.00

Z1 (Imag): 1.00

Z0 (Real): 1.00

Z0 (Imag): 1.00

[0.01~99.99:0.01ohm]

Range 0.01~99.9 9 ohm

Default 1.00

Enter the total real components of the feeder zero sequence impedance, in actual ohms.

Step 0.01ohm



GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z0 (Imag)

[FAULT LOCATOR]

Function: DISABLE

Feeder Length: 0.0

Z1 (Real): 1.00

Z1 (Imag): 1.00

Z0 (Real): 1.00

Z0 (Imag): 1.00

[0.01~99.99:0.01ohm]

Range 0.01~99.9 9 ohm

Default 1.00

Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder zero sequence impedance, in actual ohms. http://www.entecene.co.kr

Step 0.01ohm



8.5.11. Load Current Alarm


ETMFC610 generates a Load Current Alarm event when the value over the detect level of RMS current is maintained for a constant time. Load Current Alarm event is generated individually for each A, B, C, N phase and Negative Sequence. Then, the peak current measurement value is updated by each phase current and negative sequence current at which the load current alarm event is generated. If the function is disabled, the peak current measurement value will not be updated even if a large current flows.

For details of the Load Current Alarm event recorded by this function, refer to “9.9. Load Current

Alarm Event” and the peak current updated by this function can be checked in the “METERING/

CURRENT” menu (Please refer to “13.1. Current” ).

Load Current Alarm setting items are same as below.

GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / Function

[LOAD CURR’ ALARM]

>Function: DISABLE

P-Pickup: 500

> P-Time Delay: 0.00

G-Pickup: 250

> G-Time Delay: 0.00

[DISABLE/ENABLE]



Set whether to use load current alarm function.

~

GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / P-Pickup


Function: DISABLE

>P-Pickup: 500

> P-Time Delay: 0.00

G-Pickup: 250


[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]

Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A

Default 500 Step 1A

Set the detect current of load current alarm about phase current.

GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / P-Time Delay

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec


Function: DISABLE

P-Pickup: 500

>P-Time Delay: 0.00

G-Pickup: 250


[0.00~600.0:0.01s]


Set the detect time of load current alarm about the phase current.



GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / G-Pickup


Function: DISABLE

P-Pickup: 500

P-Time Delay: 0.00

>G-Pickup: 250

G-Time Delay: 0.00

[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]

Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A

Default 250 Step 1A

Set the detect current of load current alarm about ground current.

GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / G-Time Delay

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec


Function: DISABLE

P-Pickup: 500

P-Time Delay: 0.00

G-Pickup: 250

>G-Time Delay: 0.00

[0.00~600.0:0.01s]


Set the detect time of load current alarm about the ground current.

GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / Q-Pickup


P-Time Delay: 0.00

G-Pickup: 250

G-Time Delay: 0.00

>Q-Pickup: OFF

Q-Time Delay: 0.00

[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]

Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A

Default OFF 1A

Set the detect current of load current alarm about negative sequence current.

Step

GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / Q-Time Delay

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec


P-Time Delay: 0.00

G-Pickup: 250

G-Time Delay: 0.00

Q-Pickup: OFF

>Q-Time Delay: 0.00

[0.00~600.0:0.01s]

Default current.

0.00 Step 0.01sec

Set the detect time of load current alarm about the negative sequence



8.5.12. Power Factor (55)


ETMFC610 has two power factor(55) elements. If measured power factor(lag, lead) is kept above the pickup level for a certain time, the element are detected. Through the PLC configuration, if an event of this function is detected, the switch(or CB) can be opened or closed.

Power factor setting items are same as below.

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / Function

[POWER FACTOR]

>Function: DISABLE

Pickup-Lag1: 0.00

Pickup-Lead1: 0.00

Time Delay1: 0.00

Pickup-Lag2: 0.00

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

Range

Default

DISABLE, ENABLE

DISABLE Step

It decides whether to use Power factor element.

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / Pickup-Lag1

~

[POWER FACTOR]

Function: DISABLE

>Pickup-Lag1: 0.00

Pickup-Lead1: 0.00

Time Delay1: 0.00

Pickup-Lag2: 0.00

[0(OFF) 0.05~0.99]

Range

Default

0(OFF), 0.05~0.99

0.00 Step

Set pickup level of lag power factor for element1.

If the power factor is lag, detect this element if it exceeds this set value.

*. NOTE ) Setting for Pickup-Lag2 is same as Pickup-Lag1 setting above.

0.01

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / Pickup-Lead1

Range 0(OFF), 0.05~0.99

[POWER FACTOR]

> Function: DISABLE

Pickup-Lag1: 0.00

>Pickup-Lead1: 0.00

Time Delay1: 0.00

Pickup-Lag2: 0.00

[0(OFF) 0.05~0.99]

Default value.

0.00 Step 0.01

Set pickup level of lead power factor for element1.

If the power factor is lag, detect this element if it exceeds this set

*. NOTE ) Setting for Pickup-Lead2 is same as Pickup-Lead1 setting above.

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / Time Delay1

[POWER FACTOR]

> Function: DISABLE

Pickup-Lag1: 0.00

Pickup-Lead1: 0.00

>Time Delay1: 0.00

Pickup-Lag2: 0.00

[1.00~600.00:0.01s]

Range

Default

1.00~600.00sec

1.00 Step

Set time delay for power factor element1.

*. NOTE ) Setting for Time Delay2 is same as Time Delay1 setting above.

0.01sec



GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / BLK After CL http://www.entecene.co.kr

[POWER FACTOR]

>Time Delay2: 0.00

BLK After CL: 0.00

[1.00~600.00:0.01s]

Range 0.05~600.00sec


Set the Block Time After Close for power factor elements.

8.6. Save Setting

From this menu, you can save the changed setting values of the GROUP menu. The procedure for storing the set value is described in “6.3.4. Setting Save” .



9. EVENT RECORDER


Place the curser on “3.EVENT” , press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

ETMFC610 records all events during the operation, occurred events are recorded separately such as operation event, fault event, system event, set change event, load event and diagnostic event. All events are recorded in order(FIFO). In this menu, all events can be checked and deleted. Also, all events can be checked in interface program.

This menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu.

[EVENT]

>1.OPERATION

2.FAULT

3.FAULT CYCLE

4.SYSTEM

5.SET CHANGE

6.LOAD&ENERGY/MIN

7.LOAD&ENERGY/HOUR

8.LOAD&ENERGY/DAY

9.DIGNOSTIC

10.PQM


12.CLEAR SAVED DATA



9.1. Operation Event


Operation event records max. 5,000 events. When Switch(or CB) operates(OPEN/CLOSE), operation status and control signal(LOCAL/REMOTE) is recorded in operation event.

Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / OPERATION” to confirm operation events.

[▼][▲] are used to check event. [0001/5000] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source

 STATUS : Switch(or CB) Operation Status

CLOSE-OK or CLOSE-FAIL

OPEN-OK or OPEN-FAIL

 CONTROL

PL-HMI : Operation through control button at the front panel

REMOTE : Operation through remote control

MANUAL : Switch(or CB) mechanical manual operation.

AUTO : Automatic operation through ETMFC610

EXT’ : Operation through external command (External command condition is available through PLC configuration)

Trigger Time

Monitor changes of Trigger source status in every 5 msec.

Trigger Capacity

Stores last 5,000 events.

*. NOTE ) The maximum number of events to be stored can be increased according to user requests.



9.2. Fault Event


Fault event records max 1,500 events. Fault event records fault occurred time, fault phase, fault current size and each phase fault records can be checked.

Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / FAULT” to confirm fault events.

[ ▼ ][ ▲ ] buttons are used to check fault events. Press [ENT] button in fault event screen to check fault current value. And press [ENT] again to return to previous screen. [0001/1500] is the latest event record.

Fault Event Information

Information before a fault occurring, is recorded..

NO Shows the latest event in order and records 1,500 events.

CNOTROL Control type of ETMFC610 when recording event

TYPE< ⓐ > FI: Fault Indication Type

PRO: Protection Type

TYPE Fault type

FAULT : Fault event before the final fault(Permanent fault or Temporary fault), (Applied when Fault Indication Type)

P-FI : Permanent fault (Applied when Fault Indication Type)

T-FI : Temporary fault(Applied when Fault Indication Type)

51 : Time Overcurrent Trip (Applied when Protection Type)

50 : Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip (Applied when Protection Type)

DIR Fault direction

F : Forward fault

R : Reverse fault

- : If it is the final fault event or cannot determine the fault direction, fault direction is not indicated.



TARGET Records the fault detect phase and event trigger source.

A: A Phase Fault

B: B Phase Fault

C: C Phase Fault

G: Ground Fault

S: Sensitive Earth Fault

Q : Negative Sequence Fault

SEQ Fault sequence number (Applied when Fault Indication Type)

LOC It registers Fault Location Information (location and reactance).

*. NOTE) 1. Indicated when “Fault Locater” function is ENABLE.

2. For more details about settings of “Fault Locater” function, refer to

“8.5.9. Fault Locator” .

FAULT

CURRENT

Max. Current value is indicated when fault is occurred.

It registers current of the each phase, ground, sensitive earth and negative sequence.

Trigger Source

Please refer to “TARGET” and “TYPE” of the above mentioned Fault Event Information.

Trigger Time

Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.

Trigger Capacity





9.3. Fault Cycle - Summary


Fault wave is recorded up to 32 fault waves. Fault wave information is displayed on LCD.

Captured waveform can be checked in ETIMS Interface Software. However, if the ‘Wave Record’ setting in the “MAIN MENU/ GENERAL/ EVENT RECORDER” menu is OFF, fault cycles will not be recorded.

Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / FAULT CYCLE” to confirm fault cycle summary.

[▼][▲] is used to check the fault event. [01/32] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source

 Fault wave captured time.

EWTRIG1 : Fault pick up time.

EWTRIG2 : Fault detection time(Applied when Fault Indication Type) or trip time

Applied when Protection Type.

EWTRIG1&2 : Fault Pickup & Trip time Fault detection time(Applied when Fault

Indication Type) or trip time Applied when Protection Type.

 Fault current [A]: A phase, B phase, C phase, Ground, Sensitive earth and Negative sequence.

 Fault Location Information

Fault Location [km]

Fault Reactance [Ohm]

*. NOTE) 1. Indicated when “Fault Locater” function is ENABLE.

Trigger Time

2. For more details about settings of “Fault Locater” function, refer to “8.5.9. Fault

Locator” .




Trigger Capacity

Maximum 32 events are recorded.

Recorder Cycle Length


60 cycles for 64 sampling, 120 cycles for 32 sampling and 240 cycles for 16 sampling.

9.4. System Event

Maximum 5,000 events are recorded.

Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / SYSTEM” to confirm system events.

No. 0001/5000

ITEM : CPULINK

STATUS : HI/ASSERT

No. 0002/5000

ITEM : CLST

STATUS : LO/DEASSERT

2018/01/01 00:00:00 2018/01/01 00:01:00

[▼][▲] button is used to check the records. [0001/5000] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source

 Protection element

 52A Contact

 Sequence status

 Front panel control

 AC supply

 External control

 Fail operation

 External input status

 System alarm

 Sleep mode

 Gas Status, etc.

Trigger Time




Trigger type

Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)

Storage Capacity




9.5. Set Change Event

Maximum 2,000 Set change Event can be recorded.

Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / SET CHANGE” to confirm set change events.

No. 0001/2000

TARGET : GLOBAL

CONTROL: LOCAL

No. 0002/2000

TARGET : GROUP1

CONTROL: REMOTE

2018/01/01 00:00:00 2018/01/01 00:01:00

[▼][▲] button is used to check the records. [0001/2000] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source

 Changed set menu

GLOBAL : GLOBAL SETTING

GROUP 1~6 : GROUP 1~6 SETTING

 Change method

The first name of the target name identifies the change method.;

LOCAL : Set change at local LCD menu

REMOTE : Sec change in remote

PROGRAM : Set change by Interface software.

Trigger Time

Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 5msec.



Storage Capacity




9.6. Load & Energy Event

ETMFC610 has the function of periodically recording the load and energy measurement data. The user can configure the data field to record in the Load & Energy event. For the data field configuration method, please refer to “9.6.4. Load & Energy Field Configuration” .

Load & Energy events are recorded in three ways: minute average, maximum value per hour, and maximum value per day. However, if the ‘L&E Record’ setting in the "“MAIN MENU/

GENERAL/ EVENT RECORDER” menu is OFF, Load & Energy events will not be recorded.

9.6.1. Load & Energy/Min. Event

Average load and energy value is recorded every a period set on “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL/

EVENT RECORDER / L&P Interval” . Maximum 8,640 values, it’s about 90 days events can be recorded based on 15 minutes(default) for the event register period.

To check the average value per minute Load & Energy events, please move to “MAIN MENU /

EVENT / LOAD&ENERGY/MIN” .

*. NOTE ) Configuration display for Load&Energy/min events may be revised on user’s request.



[▼][▲] button is used to check the events. To check real active power and reactive power, press

[ENT] button. To return back to previous screen, press [ENT] again. [0001/8640] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source

 Demand Current – A, B, C, G

 Demand Voltage – A, B, C, R, S, T

 Demand Active Power - A, B, C, 3 ф

 Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3 ф

 Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3 ф

 Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3 ф ), Positive Varhour(3 ф )

Trigger Time

Monitors to change Trigger source status every period set on “ GLOBAL SETTING / EVENT

RECORDER / L&E Interval” .

Storage Capacity





9.6.2. Load & Energy/Hour Event


Peak load & Energy event is recorded in every hour. Maximum load in every hour, is recorded up to 8,640 events, it’s about 360 days events are recorded.

Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / LOAD&ENERGY/HOUR” to confirm Peak Load &

Energy/Hour events.

*. NOTE ) Configuration display for peak. load/min events may be revised on user’s request.


[ENT] button in Current display screen. To return back to current display screen, press [ENT] again. [0001/8640] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source







Trigger Time

Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1hour.



Storage Capacity




9.6.3. Load & Energy/Day

Peak load event is recorded in every day. Maximum load in every day, is recorded up to 8,640 events, it’s 8,640 days events are recorded.

Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / LOAD&ENERGY/DAY” to confirm Peak Load & Energy

/day events.

*. NOTE ) Configuration display for peak. load/min events may be revised on user’s request.


[ENT] button in Current display screen. To return back to current display screen, press [ENT] again. [0001/8640] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source









Trigger Time

Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1 day.

Storage Capacity




9.6.4. Load & Energy Field Configuration

Operator can easily configure fields recorded in Load & Energy Event through “Load & Energy

Field Config Edit” window of ETIMS Interface Software. Load & Energy Field Configuration procedure is as follow:

1) Click “SETTING / LOAD & ENERGY FIELD CONFIG” to open ‘Load & Energy Field

Config Edit’.

Figure 9-1.

Load & Energy Event Field Config Edit Window



2) In the ‘Load & Energy Field Config Edit’ window, configure fields recorded in Load & Energy

Event. The number of selected field is between 4 and 14 fields.

3) After completing the configuration, click the [Apply] button.

4) While ‘ONLINE’ communication status between Interface Software and ETMFC610, upload the changed load profile field configuration in ETMFC610 using “ONLINE / UPLOAD /

LOAD & ENERGY FIELD CONFIG” menu.

9.7. Diagnostic Event

Diagnostic event is recorded, maximum 2,000 events.

Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / DIGNOSTIC” to confirm diagnostic events.

No. 0001/2000

ITEM : SELFTOK

STATUS : HI/ASSERT

No. 0002/2000

ITEM : SELFTOK

STATUS : HI/ASSERT

2018/01/01 00:00:00 2018/01/01 01:00:00

[▼][▲] button is used to check the events. [0001/2000] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source

 DSP Fail

 ADC Fail

 RTC Fail

 Memory Fail

 Flash-Rom Fail

 Circuit voltage Fail

 Global Setting Fail

 Group Setting Fail

 Event Fail

 Count Fail

 DO Fail

 Close Fail

 Open Fail, etc.



Trigger Time

Monitors status of Trigger source in every 5msec.

Trigger type

Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)

Storage Capacity




When Diagnostics Fail is occurred the treatment method is same as following.

Table 9-1.

Treatment Method when Diagnostics Fail is occurred

No. Item Period

1

2

DSP

ADC

Within 200msec

1/4 cycle

3

4

5

6

RTC

Memory

Flash-Rom

Circuit voltage

1 hour, at booting

1 hour, at booting

At Flash-Rom reading and writing, at booting

1/4 cycle

Method

Change to fault detect block


Change the date to January 1 st , 2017

Restart

Restart

7

8

9

10

Global setting

Group # setting

Event

Count

At setting change, at booting

At setting change, at booting

At event save and reading

At counter writing and reading


Change the Global setting value to

Default value

Change the Group # setting value to

Default value

Event initialization

Counter initialization

11

12

DO signal

Close/Open

50msec

At closing and opening

Output power block

Necessary to check in local



9.8. PQM Event


Power Quality Management (PQM) detect event is recorded up to 1,500 events.

Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / PQM” to confirm PQM events. In this menu, PQM event item, phase occurrence, measurement value and event maintenance time can be checked (But, event maintenance time is recorded only when events are sag, swell, interruption). PQM events are generated by the “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/ MONITORING/ POWER

QUALITY” setting.

[▼][▲] button is used to check the event. [0001/1500] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source

 PQM detect element.

 Sag(SAG): Instantaneous(INST), Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP),

Long Time(LONG)

 Swell(SWL): Instantaneous(INST), Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP),

Long Time(LONG)

 Interruption(INT): Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP), Sustained(LONG)

 Voltage Harmonic distortion(VTH)

 Current Harmonic distortion(ITH)

 Source side Unbalance Voltage(UBV)

 Load side Unbalance Voltage(UBL)

 Current Unbalance(UBI)

 Source side Over Voltage(OVS)

 Load side Over Voltage(OVL)

 Source side Under Voltage(UVS)

 Load side Under Voltage(UVL)

 Under Frequency(UNF)

 PQM detected phase : A phase, B phase, C phase

 PQM element related measured value.

 PQM detect time(cycle)



Trigger Time

Monitors status of Trigger source in every 5msec.

Storage Capacity




9.9. Load Current Alarm Event

Load current alarm event is occurred by “MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ GROUP # /

MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM” menu. Max. 1,500 events of load current alarm event can be recorded and indicated.

Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / LOAD CURR’ ALARM” menu to check the load current alarm event. In this menu, you can check the alarm occurrence and the current value of each phase and the period of occurrence.

[▼][▲] is used to check the event. [0001/1500] is the latest recorded event.

Trigger Source

 Target element

A: Phase A Alarm current

B: Phase B Alarm current

C: Phase C Alarm current

G: Ground Alarm current



 Current of correspondent phase in case of alarm current event is occurred

Trigger Time

Check the status change of trigger source every 1/4 cycle.

Trigger Capacity

Max. 1,500 events are saved.




9.10. Clear Saved Data


Move to “EVENT / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear saved events. Passcode 3 certification is required to enter “CLEAR SAED DATA” menu.

EVENT / CLEAR SAVED DATA

[CLEAR SAVED DATA]

>1.OPERATION

2.FAULT

3.FAULT CYCLE

4.SYSTEM

5.SET CHANGE

6.LOAD & ENERGY

7.DIGNOSTIC

8.PQM

9.PQM CYCLE


11.ABOVE ALL

[CLEAR EVENT]

EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS

Clear Saved Data

Select an item to delete and press [ENT] button.

If deleting is completed, “EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS” message is displayed.

11. ABOVE ALL

1 ~ 10 items are all deleted.



10. MAINTENANCE


Place the curser on “MAINTENANCE” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

This menu displays Maintenance information.

This menu has sub-menu as below and by pressing [ENT] button, move into sub-menu.

[MAINTENANCE]

>1.COUNT

2.INTERRUT TIME

3.CONTACT WEAR

4.DATA RESET

5.CONTROLLER INFO

6.MECHANISM SCALE

10.1. Count

Counter information is displayed, it has sub-menus as below.

[COUNT]

>1.ETMFC610

2.FAULT

3.PQM

4.COMMUNICATION

10.1.1. ETMFC610 Count

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / ETMFC610” to confirm ETMFC610 count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / CCU

[ETMFC610]

RESTART : 30

DIAGNOSTIC : 0

OPERATION : 0

Restart Count

ETMFC610 restart number is displayed.

Diagnostic Count

ETMFC610 diagnostic count is displayed.

Operation Count

Switch(or CB) operation counter is displayed.



10.1.2. Fault Count


Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT” to confirm fault count. Number of fault is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 6 pages. Use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT

TOTAL FAULT (1/5)

Displays the total fault count for each target.

PERMANENT FAULT (2/5)

Displays the permanent fault count of total and each target.(Applied when Fault Indication Type)

TEMPORARY FAULT (3/5)

Displays the temporary fault count of total and each target. (Applied when Fault Indication Type)

51-TOC FAULT (4/5)

Displays the time overcurrent trip count of total and each target.(Applied when Protection Type)

50-IOC FAULT (5/5)

Displays the instantaneous overcurrent trip count of total and each target.(Applied when

Protection Type)



10.1.3. PQM Count


This menu displays power quality(PQM) related counter information, it has sub-menu as below.

When a PQM event occurs, the corresponding counter is increased.

[PQM COUNT]

>1.INTERRUT

2.SAG

3.SWELL

4.HARMONICS

5.CURR UNBALANCE

6.VOLT UNBALANCE

7.UNDER VOLTAGE

8.OVER VOLTAGE

9.UNDER FREQUNCY

10.1.3.1. Interrupt

Move to “MAINTENANCE / PQM / INTERRUPT” to confirm interrupt count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / INTERRUPT

Number of Interruption Detection is displayed.

[INTERRUPT]

TOTAL : 0

PHASE A : 0

PHASE B : 0

PHASE C : 0

MONENTARY : 0

TEMPORARY : 0

SUSSTAINED : 0

10.1.3.2. Sag

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SAG” to confirm sag count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SAG

[SAG]

TOTAL : 0

PHASE A : 0

PHASE B : 0

PHASE C : 0

INSTANT : 0

MONENTARY : 0

TEMPORARY : 0

Number of Sag Detection is displayed.



10.1.3.3. Swell


Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SWELL” to confirm swell count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SWELL

[SWELL]

TOTAL : 0

PHASE A : 0

PHASE B : 0

PHASE C : 0

INSTANT : 0

MONENTARY : 0

TEMPORARY : 0

10.1.3.4. Under Voltage

Number of Swell Detection is displayed.

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE” to confirm under voltage count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE

Number of under-voltage detection is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.

UNDER VOLT-VS (1/2)

Total number of under-voltage detection at source side and number of under-voltage per phase are displayed.

UNDER VOLT-VL (2/2)

Total number of under-voltage detection at load side and number of under-voltage per phase are displayed.



10.1.3.5. Over Voltage


Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE” to confirm over voltage count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE

Number of over-voltage detection is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.

UNDER VOLT-VS (1/2)

Total number of over -voltage detection at source side and number of over -voltage per phase are displayed.

UNDER VOLT-VL (2/2)

Total number of over -voltage detection at load side and number of over -voltage per phase are displayed.

10.1.3.6. Under Frequency

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER FREQUENCY” to confirm under frequency count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER FRQUENCY

[UNDER FREQUENCY]

COUNT : 0

Number of underfrequency detection is displayed.

10.1.3.7. Unbalance

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNBALANCE” to confirm unbalance count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNBALANCE

[UNBALANCE]

CURRENT : 0

VOLT-SOURCE: 0

VOLT-LOAD : 0

Number of current unbalance detection, source side voltage unbalance detection and load side voltage unbalance are displayed.



10.1.3.8. Harmonics


Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / HARMONIC” to confirm sag count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / HARMONIC

Number of Harmonic distortion is displayed. The COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [▼][▲] buttons to move into sub-menu.

VTHD(1/2)

Total number of Voltage Harmonic distortion and number of voltage harmonic distortion per phase are displayed.

ITHD(2/2)

Total number of current harmonic distortion and number of current harmonic distortion per phase are displayed.



10.1.4. Communication Count


Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / COMMUNICATION” to confirm fault count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / COMMUNICATION

Indicates the counter information of DNP3.0 protocol. This COUNT menu consists 6 pages. Use

[▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.

COMM-S1(1/8)

 Rx Message: Indicates the total number of received message of DNP3.0 Slave1.

 Tx Message: Indicates the total number of transferred message of DNP3.0 Slave1.

 Unsol Tx: Indicates the total number of transferred Unsol message of DNP3.0 Slave 1.

COMM-S1(2/8)

 Rx CRC Err: Indicates the total number of CRC error message of DNP3.0 Slave 1.

 Tx Message: Indicates the total number of resend messange of DNP3.0 Slave1.

 SBO TO: Indicates the SBO Time-out number of DNP3.0 Slave 1.

COMM-S1(3/8)

 D Conf TO: Indicates the Data Link confirm Time-out number of DNP3.0 Slave1.

 A Conf TO: Indicates the Application Link Confirm Time-out number of DNP3.0 Slave1.



MAINTENANCE / COUNT / COMMUNICATION http://www.entecene.co.kr

COMM-S1(4/8)

 DI Evt buf: Indicates the untransmitted DI events number of DNP3.0 Slave1.

 AI Evt buf: Indicates the untransmiteed AI events number of DNP3.0 Slave1.

 CI Evt buf: Indicates the untransmitted CI events number of DNP3.0 Slave1.

COMM-S2(5~8/8)

Indicates the communication counter of DNP3.0 Slave2. The composition counter is same as

DNP3.0 Slave 1.

10.1.5. User Count

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / USER COUNT” to confirm user count.

The ETMFC610 provides eight(8) user counts. The user count can define the counter to be managed by the user through the PLC configuration. When input condition set in CLSET # (User

Counter Set Condition) of PLC is occurred, the corresponding user count is increased by 1. When the input condition set in CLRST # (User Counter Reset Condition) occurs, the corresponding user count is cleared to 0. When you set CLST (close status) on CLSET01, user count 1 is increased by

1, whenever the Switch(or CB) is closed. User count can be monitored by Pulse Count logic of

PLC function. For details, refer to “7.1.6.3. PULSE COUNTER” .

Figure 10-1.

PLC Edit Window of ETIMS Interface Software



MAINTENANCE / COUNT / USER COUNT http://www.entecene.co.kr

Displays the user count defined by the PLC configuration

(CLSET01 ~ CLSET08).

This COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.

10.2. Interrupt Time

Move to “MAINTENANCE / INTERRUPT TIME” to confirm interrupt time.

MAINTENANCE / INTERRUPT TIME

[INTERRUPT TIME]

TOTAL : 0

PHASE A : 0

PHASE B : 0

PHASE C : 0

MONENTARY : 0

TEMPORARY : 0

SUSSTAINED : 0

Accumulated interrupt time is displayed.

10.3. Contact Wear

Move to “MAINTENANCE / CONTACT WEAR” to confirm contact wear.

MAINTENANCE / CONTACT WEAR

[CONTACT WEAR-%]

A : 100.00

B : 100.00

C : 100.00

Display switch(or CB) contact wear in percentage.



10.4. Data Reset


Move to “MAINTENANCE / DATA RESET” . This menu resets COUNT and Maintenance data.

Passcode 3 certification is required to enter “CLEAR SAED DATA” menu.

MAINTENACE / DATA RESET

[DATA RESET]

>1.ETMFC610 COUNT

2.OPERATION COUNT

3.FAULT COUNT

4.PQM COUNT

5.COM’ COUNT

6.COUNT ALL

7.INTERRUPT TIME

> 8.BATT. CAPACITY

9.CONTACT WEAR

10.ENERGY

11.MAX DEMAND

12.PEAK CURRENT

13.COMM BUFF

14.USER COUNT

15.ABOVE ALL

[CLEAR EVENT]

EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS

Saved Data Reset

Select an item to delete and press [ENT] button.

If deleting is completed, “EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS” message is displayed.

*. NOTE )

1.

‘OPERATION COUNT’ is reset by a set value in “MAIN

MENU/ GLOBLA SETTING/ MONITERING/ OPERATION

COUNT” .

2.

‘CONTACT WEAR’ is reset by a set value in “MAIN MENU/

GLOBLA SETTING/ MONITERING/ CONTACT WEAR” .

3.

‘BATT. CATPACITY’ is reset by a set value in “MAIN MENU/

GLOBLA SETTING/

MANAGEMENT” .

MONITERING/ BATT

4.

Except ‘OPERATION COUNT’ , ‘CONTACT WEAR’ and

‘BATT CATPACITY’ , all data is reset for 0.

15. ABOVE ALL

All count data of 1 ~ 14 menus are reset at once.

10.5. Controller Information

Move to “MAINTENANCE / CCU INFO” to confirm ETMFC610 controller information.

In this menu, information such as option, version and serial number of current ETMFC610 is displayed.



10.6. Mechanism Scale


Move to “MAINTENANCE / MECHANISM SCALE” to confirm CT and VT mechanism calibration scale. When replacing the ETMFC610 controller, the manufacturer shall notify the manufacturer of the mechanism calibration scale indicated on the ETMFC610 before replacement.

MAINTENACE / MECHANISM SCALE

[MECHANISM SCALE]

VA:1.0000 IA:1.0000

VB:1.0000 IB:1.0000

VC:1.0000 IC:1.0000

VR:1.0000 IG:1.0000

VS:1.0000 IS:1.0000

VT:1.0000

VA, VB, VC, VR, VS, VT

The mechanism calibration scale of each phase VT is displayed.

IA, IB, IC, IG, IS

The mechanism calibration scale of CT and ZCT of each phase is displayed.



11. TIME


Place the curser on “TIME” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu.

TIME

[CURRENT TIME]

2006/11/05 21:02:38

PRESS <ENT> TO SET

[SETTING TIME]

2006/11/05 21:02:38

USE [UP/DOWN/ENTER]

PRESS <FUNC> : ABORT

[SAVE TIME]

2006/11/06 15;01:50

PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE

In this menu, you can check and set the current data and time. This menu applies local time and UTC time is managed internally depending on the time zone setting.

Here's how to change the present date and time;

1) Press [ENT] button to select and change a setting.

2) To change a number, use [▲][▼] button and to move next item, press [ENT] button.

3) To save all changed setting, press [ENT].

If “ GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE /

Time Syn ’ Type ” is “ GMT ” and “ GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL /

DEVICE / H/W OPTION / IRIG Use ” is “ ON ” , do not set current time manually.



12. STATUS


Place the curser on “STATUS” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. This menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu.

[STATUS]

>1.ETMFC610

2.INPUT PORTS

3.OUTPUT PORTS

4.GOOSE S-IN

5.GOOSE D-IN

6.GOOSE OUT

7.LATCH LOGIC

8.DIAGNOSTIC

12.1. ETMFC610

Move to “MAINTENANCE / STATUS / ETMFC610” to confirm tank and ETMFC610 status.

STATUS / ETMFC610

[ETMFC610]

>SWITCH : CLOSE

TYPE : FITYPE

> PANEL LOCK : UNLOCK

> CONTROL : LOCAL

> PHA-PROTECT: OFF

> GND-PROTECT: OFF

> LOOP CONTR.: OFF

LOCKOUT : OFF

> AC POW FAIL: ON

> BATTERY : NORMAL

> BATT&CHARGE: NORMAL

> DOOR OPEN : ON

> HANDLE : OFF

> GAS : NORMAL

Present Switch(or CB) and ETMFC610 status are displayed.

Use [▼] [▲] button to check all items.

SWITCH

Displays Switch(or CB) status.(OPEN, CLOSE, TROUBLE)

TYPE

Displays control type.(Fault Indication type(FITYPE), Protection type(PROTYPE))

PANEL LOCK

Displays panel lock status.(LOCK, UNLOCK)

CONTROL

Operation control select is displayed.(REMOTE, LOCAL, TROUBLE)

P-ROTECT

Phase fault indication function and phase protection function status is displayed. (ON, OFF)



STATUS / ETMFC610 http://www.entecene.co.kr

[ETMFC610]

>SWITCH : CLOSE

TYPE : FITYPE

> PANEL LOCK : UNLOCK

> CONTROL : LOCAL

> PHA-PROTECT: OFF

> GND-PROTECT: OFF

> LOOP CONTR.: OFF

LOCKOUT : OFF

> AC POW FAIL: ON

> BATTERY : NORMAL

> BATT&CHARGE: NORMAL

> DOOR OPEN : ON

> HANDLE : OFF

> GAS : NORMAL

GND-PROTECT

Ground fault indication function and ground protection function status is displayed. (ON, OFF)

LOOP CONTR.

Loop control function status is displayed. (ON, OFF)

LOCKOUT

Lockout status is displayed(ON, OFF)

AC POW FAIL

External power supply status is displayed. (NORMAL, FAIL)

BATTERY

Battery status is displayed. (NORMAL, FAIL)

BAT’ CHARGER

Battery charger status is displayed. (NORMAL, FAIL)

DOOR OPEN

Door open status is displayed(ON, OFF)

GAS

Switch(or CB) gas pressure status is displayed. (NORMAL, LOW)



12.2. Input Ports


Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / INPUT PORTS” to confirm input ports’s status.

STATUS/ INPUT PORTS

[INPUT PORTS]

IN 101 : OFF

IN 102 : OFF

IN 103 : OFF

IN 104 : OFF

IN 105 : OFF

：

：

：

IN 208 : OFF

Displays input terminals’ status.

 IN101 ~ IN112 : Displays the status of SCADA input ports (But, when ‘SCADA I/O Use’ setting is OFF, it always is marked “OFF” )

 IN201 ~ IN208 : Displays the status of input ports.

Depending on input signal, “ON” or “OFF” is displayed.

[▼] [▲] button is used to check all input terminal status.

12.3. Output Ports

Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / OUTPUT PORTS” to confirm output ports’s status.

STATUS/ OUTPUT PORTS

[OUTPUT PORTS]

OUT 101: OFF

OUT 102: OFF

OUT 103: OFF

OUT 104: OFF

OUT 105: OFF

：

：

：

OUT 214: OFF

Displays output terminals’ status.

 OUT101 ~ OUT108 : Displays the status of the SCADA output ports

(But, when the ‘SCADA I/O Use’ setting is OFF, it always is marked

“OFF” ).

 OUT201 ~ OUT214 : Displays the status of the output ports.

Depending on output signal, “ON” or “OFF” is displayed.

[▼] [▲] button is used to check all output terminal status.



12.4. GOOSE Single Input


Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / GOOSE S-IN” to confirm goose single inputs’s status.

STATUS/ GOOSE S-IN

[GOOSE S-IN]

>GSIN01 ST : ON

> GSIN01 FAIL: OFF

> GSIN02 ST : ON

> GSIN02 FAIL: OFF

> GSIN03 ST : ON

> GSIN03 FAIL: OFF

：

：

> GSIN16 ST : ON

> GSIN16 FAIL: OFF

The ETMFC610 provides 16 goose single inputs of IEC 61850 communication protocol. This menu displays the goose single input's status provided by the ETMFC610.

 GSIN## ST : Displays goose single input’s current status

 GSIN## FAIL : Displays goose single input’s fail status.



12.5. GOOSE Double Input

Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / GOOSE D-IN” to confirm goose double inputs’s status.

STATUS/ GOOSE D-IN

[GOOSE D-IN]

>GDIN010 Bit0: ON

> GDIN011 Bit1: OFF

> GDIN01F Fail: OFF

> GDIN020 Bit0: ON

> GDIN021 Bit1: OFF

> GDIN02F Fail: OFF

：

：

> GDIN160 Bit0: ON

> GDIN161 Bit1: OFF

> GDIN16F Fail: OFF

The ETMFC610 provides 16 goose double inputs of the IEC 61850 communication protocol. This menu displays the goose double input's status provided by the ETMFC610.

 GSIN##0 Bit0 : goose double input – displays the current status of first bit(bit 0).

 GSIN##1 Bit1 : goose double input – displays the current status of the second bit(bit 1).

 GSIN##F Fail : Displays goose double input’s fail status.





12.6. GOOSE Output


Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / GOOSE OUT” to confirm goose outputs’s status.

STATUS/ GOOSE S-IN

[GOOSE OUT]

>GOUT01: OFF

> GOUT02: OFF

GOUT03: OFF

：

：

> GOUT16: OFF

The ETMFC610 provides 16 goose outputs of the IEC 61850 communication protocol. This menu displays the goose output's status provided by the ETMFC610.



12.7. Latch Logic

The ETMFC610 provides eight(8) latch logics. The latch logic can be configurated by the user through the PLC Edit. When input condition set in LSET # (Latch Logic Set Condition) of PLC is occurred, the LT#(Latch Logic) is set(‘1’). When the input condition set in LRST # (Latch Logic

Reset Condition) occurs, the corresponding latch logic is cleared to 0. For details, refer to “7.1.6.5.

Latch Logic” .

Figure 12-1.

PLC Edit Window of ETIMS Interface Software



You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / STATUS / LATCH LOGIC”. http://www.entecene.co.kr

STATUS/ LATCH LOGIC

[LATCH LOGIC]

>LT01 : OFF

LT02 : OFF

LT03 : OFF

LT04 : OFF

LT05 : OFF

LT06 : OFF

LT07 : OFF

LT08 : OFF

Displays latch logic’s status.

 LT01 ~ LT08 : Displays the status of the latch logic 01 ~ 08.

12.8. Diagnostic

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / STATUS / DIGNOSTIC”

STATUS/ DIGNOSTIC

[DIGNOSTIC]

>DIGALM : OFF

> DIGERR : OFF

DIGIGBT: OFF

> DIGRTC : OFF

DIGCLC : OFF

DIGOPOW: OFF

> ACFAIL : OFF

> BATBAD : OFF

NOBATT : OFF

> CHGBAD : OFF

PWDOWN : OFF

Diagnostic status of ETMFC610 and System are displayed. When a diagnostic event occurs, the related status is displayed on “ON” . After the diagnostic event disappears, the status changes to “OFF” status.

Use [▼] [▲] button to check all items.

DIGALM :

ETMFC610 on the alarm status.

DIGERR :

ETMFC610 has one error or more. When this status is

“ON, it means that there are critical errors on the system.

Thus, it makes to block all protection functions.

DIGRTC :

Unusual condition on Real Time Clock(RTC)

DIGCLC :

Unusual condition on Close Coil

DIGSPOW :

Unusual condition on System Power

ACFAIL:

External AC Power Fail status

BATBAD :

Battery Voltage Bad status

NOBATT :

Battery Voltage Low status

CHGBAD :

Charger Voltage Fail status

PWDOWN :

Power Down status (AC Fail & No Battery)



13. METERING


Place the curser on “METERING” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. This menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu.

The accuracy of the measurement value displayed in this menu is “2.3. Metering Accuracy” .

[METERING]

>1.CURRENT

2.VOLTAGE

3.FREQUENCY

4.POWER

5.ENERGY

6.DEMAND

7.UNBALANCE

8.HARMONICS

9.TRUE R.M.S

10.TD

11.CONTROLLER REF

13.1. Current

Following values are contained in the current metering.

R.M.S CURRENT

 IA : Displays the measured phase A RMS current and phasor (A, deg ° )

 IB : Displays the measured phase B RMS current and phasor (A, deg ° )

 IC : Displays the measured phase C RMS current and phasor (A, deg ° )

 IG : Displays the measured ground RMS current and phasor (A, deg ° )

 SEF: Displays the measured sensitive earth RMS current and phasor (A, deg ° )

SEQUENCE CURRENT

 I1 : Displays the measured normal voltage and phasor.(A, deg°)

 I2: Displays the measured negative phase sequence current and phasor. (A, deg°)

 3I0: Displays the zero sequence current and phasor. (A, deg°)

PEAK CURRENT

 Peak IA : Displays the measured phase A Peak current (A)

 Peak IB : Displays the measured phase B Peak current (A)

 Peak IC : Displays the measured phase C Peak current (A)

 Peak IG : Displays the measured ground Peak current (A)

 Peak IQ : Displays the measured negative sequence Peak current (A)



NOTE http://www.entecene.co.kr

The peak current is updated by the recorded load current value when the load current alarm event occurs. If the load current alarm function is DISABLE, the peak current is not updated. The load current alarm function is described in “8.3.6. Load Current Alarm” .

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT”

MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT

Current per phase and angle per phase are displayed.

Use [ ▲ ] [ ▼ ] keys to move to next value.

13.2. Voltage

Following values are contained in the voltage metering.

SOURCE VOLT

 VA : Displays the measured phase A RMS voltage and phasor (V, deg ° ) in source side

 VB : Displays the measured phase B RMS voltage and phasor (V, deg ° ) in source side

 VC : Displays the measured phase C RMS voltage and phasor (V, deg ° ) in source side

 V1 : Displays the measured normal sequence voltage and phasor (V, deg ° ) in source side

 V2: Displays the measured negative phase sequence voltage and phasor (V, deg ° ) in source side

 3V0: Displays the zero sequence voltage and phasor (V, deg ° ) in source side



LOAD VOLT


 VR : Displays the measured phase R RMS voltage and phasor (V, deg ° ) in load side

 VS : Displays the measured phase S RMS voltage and phasor (V, deg ° ) in load side

 VT : Displays the measured phase T RMS voltage and phasor (V, deg ° ) in load side

 V1 : Displays the measured normal sequence voltage and phasor (V, deg ° ) in load side

 V2: Displays the measured negative phase sequence voltage and phasor (V, deg ° ) in load side

 3V0: Displays the zero sequence voltage and phasor (V, deg ° ) in load side

LINE VOLT

 AB : Displays the measured AB line voltage and phasor (V, deg ° ) in load side

 BC : Displays the measured BC line voltage and phasor (V, deg ° ) in load side

 CA : Displays the measured CA line voltage and phasor (V, deg ° ) in load side

 RS : Displays the measured RS line voltage and phasor (V, deg ° ) in load side

 ST : Displays the measured ST line voltage and phasor (V, deg ° ) in load side

 TR : Displays the measured TR line voltage and phasor (V, deg ° ) in load side

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / VOLTAGE”

MAIN MENU / METERING / VOLTAGE

Voltage and angle per phase are displayed. Use [▼][▲] button to check it.



13.3. Frequency


Following values are contained in the frequency metering.

 Source: Metering value of present source side frequency is indicated.

 Load : Metering value of present load side frequency is indicated.

 Slip : Frequency difference between the power source side and the load side is indicated.

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / FREQUENCY”

MAIN MENU / METERING / FREQUENCY

[FREQUENCY]

Source: 0.00 Hz

0.00 Hz/s

Load : 0.00 Hz

0.00 Hz/s

Slip : 0.00 Hz

0.00 D

Frequency Display

 Source

Frequency in source side (Hz)

Frequency decay rate in source side (Hz/sec)

 Load

Frequency in load side (Hz)

Frequency decay rate in load side (Hz/sec)

 Slip

Frequency difference between source and load sides: Slip frequency (Hz)

Phase difference between sour and load sides : Slip angle (deg ° )



13.4. Power


Following values are contained in the power metering.

 ACTIVE POWER: Each phase and three phase’s active power displayed.

 REACTIVE POWER: Each phase and three phase’s reactive power displayed.

 APPARENT POWER: Each phase and three phase’s apparent power displayed.

 POWER FACTOR: Each phase and three phase’s power factor per phase is displayed.

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / POWER”

MAIN MENU / METERING / POWER

Per phase, power and power factor are displayed.

Use [▼][▲] button to check the power metering information.



13.5. Energy


Following values are contained in the energy metering.

 POS’ W/H: Each phase and three phase active power amount of forward direction are indicated.

 POS’ V/H: Each phase and three phase reactive power amount of forward direction are indicated.

 NEG’ W/H: Each phase and three phase active power amount of reverse direction are indicated.

 NEG’ V/H: Each phase and three phase reactive power amount of reverse direction are indicated.

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / ENERGY”

MAIN MENU / METERING / ENERGY

Energy is displayed Use [▼][▲] button to check the energy metering information.

The last line “S” of each page indicates the time that have started the present power amount metering. It means, it is the time that has reset in

0 the power by using the “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/ DATA

RESET/ ENERGY” menu.



13.6. Demand Current and Power


ETMFC610 measures and indicates following Demand current and power items;

 DEMAND CURRENT: Indicates the measured value of each phase and negative phase sequence Demand current.

 PHASE A CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase A, Demand current maximum value of phase A and the time that have measured the maximum value.

 PHASE B CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase B, Demand current maximum value of phase B and the time that have measured the maximum value.

 PHASE C CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase C, Demand current maximum value of phase C and the time that have measured the maximum value.

 GROUND CURRENT: Indicates the Demand ground current, Ground Demand current maximum value and the time that have measured the maximum value.

 PHASE I2 CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present negative phase sequence,

Demand current maximum value of negative phase sequence and the time that have measured the maximum value.

 POSITIVE REAL POWER - A: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase A,

Demand active power maximum value of phase A direction and the time that have measured the maximum value for forward direction.

 POSITIVE REAL POWER – B: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase B,

Demand active power maximum value of phase B and the time that have measured the maximum value for forward direction.

 POSITIVE REAL POWER - C: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase C,

Demand active power maximum value of phase C and the time that have measured the maximum value for forward direction.

 POSITIVE REAL POWER – 3P: Indicates the Demand active value of present three-phase,

Demand active power maximum value of three-phase and the time that have measured the maximum value for forward direction.

 NEGATIVE REAL POWER - A: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase A,

Demand active power maximum value of phase A direction and the time that have measured the maximum value for reverse direction.

 NEGATIVE REAL POWER – B: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase B,

Demand active power maximum value of phase B and the time that have measured the maximum value for reverse direction.



 NEGATIVE REAL POWER - C: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase C,

Demand active power maximum value of phase C and the time that have measured the maximum value for reverse direction.

 NEGATIVE REAL POWER – 3P: Indicates the Demand active value of present threephase, Demand active power maximum value of three-phase and the time that have measured the maximum value for reverse direction.

 POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER - A: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present phase A, Demand active power maximum value of phase A and the time that have measured the maximum value for forward direction.

 POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER - B: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present phase B, Demand active power maximum value of phase B and the time that have measured the maximum value for forward direction.

 POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER - C: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present phase C, Demand reactive power maximum value of phase C and the time that have measured the maximum value for forward direction.

 POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER – 3P: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present three-phase, Demand reactive power maximum value of three-phase and the time that have measured the maximum value for forward direction.

 NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER - A: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present phase A, Demand active power maximum value of phase A and the time that have measured the maximum value for reverse direction.

 NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER - B: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present phase B, Demand active power maximum value of phase B and the time that have measured the maximum value for reverse direction.

 NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER - C: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present phase C, Demand reactive power maximum value of phase C and the time that have measured the maximum value for reverse direction.

 NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER – 3P: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present three-phase, Demand reactive power maximum value of three-phase and the time that have measured the maximum value for reverse direction.

*. NOTE ) The above Max. Demand current and power of each phase and three-phase can be reset by “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/ DATA RESET/ MAX DEMAND” menu.



You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND”

MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND http://www.entecene.co.kr

Demand current and power is indicated. Use [▼][▲] key to check the Demand metering information.

13.7. Unbalance

Following values are contained in the unbalance metering.

 SOURCE-VOLT: Voltage unbalance at source side is displayed.

 LOAD-VOLT: Voltage unbalance at load side is displayed.

 CURRENT: Current unbalance is displayed.

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / UNBALANCE”

MAIN MENU / METERING / UNBALANCE

[UNBALANCE- %]

SOURCE-VOLT: 0 %

LOAD-VOLT : 0 %

CURRENT : 0 %

Unbalance metering information is displayed.



13.8. Harmonics

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS”

MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS http://www.entecene.co.kr

Voltage and current harmonic rate are displayed. Use [▼][▲] button to check harmonic rate information.

13.9. True R.M.S

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / TRUE R.M.S”

MAIN MENU / METERING / TRUE R.M.S

TRUE R.M.S voltage and current per phase are displayed. Use

[▼][▲] button to check TURE R.M.S. information.



13.10. Controller Reference


You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / CONTROLLER REF”

MAIN MENU / METERING / CONTROLL REF

In this menu, the reference measurement value for checking the condition of ETMFC610 is displayed. This menu consists of 2 pages and use [ ▼ ] [ ▲ ] button to move into sub-menu.

 BATTERY VOLT : Display the battery voltage.

 CHARGER VOLT : Display the voltage of charge circuit.

 CHARGER I : Displays charge current. When the measurement value is positive, it’s charge current. On the other side, the measurement value is negative, it’s discharge current.

 BATTERY CAP.

: Displays battery capacity by ‘Battery

Management’.

 TEMPER .

(IN) : Displays internal temperature of ETMFC610.

 TEMPER.(OUT) : Displays external temperature of

ETMFC610 (control box internal temperature)(But, ‘EXT.

Temper’ Use’ is OFF, it doesn’t indicate that item).

 +12V : Displays +12V system power measurement value.

 -12V : Displays -12V system power measurement value.

 REF. VOLT : Displays reference voltage 2.5V measurement value.

 GAS PRE(bar) : Displays gas pressure(But, when ‘GAS Sensor’ is NONE, it doesn’t indicate that item).

 GAS PRE(VOL) : Displays input voltage value configured on gas pressure input port. It calculates gas pressure using that voltage value. (But, when ‘GAS Sensor’ is NONE, it doesn’t indicate that item).



14. MAINTANANCE

14.1. Warning Events


ETMFC610 possesses self-test and self-diagnostic function. If any abnormal behavior is detected in the system, it records the corresponding events in the Diagnostic Event or System Event and transmits it to SCADA system via remote.

“ Table 14-1. Warning Events” is the list of self-diagnosis conditions managed by ETMFC610 system processing method and user’s recommended actions .

. Users are requested to refer to “Table

14-1. Warning Events” in case of any abnormality in the system.

Table 14-1. Warning Events(1/3)

EVENT

EVENT TEXT

(LCD)

ACFAIL

EXPLANATION

External power FAIL

ETMFC610

ACTION

‘AC SUPPLY’

LED OFF

USER’ RECOMMENDED

ACTION

1. Check AC Power NFB

2. Check AC Power fuse

3. Check AC supply, ensure AC - connector is securely connected

SYSTEM POWER

CHGBAD

1) CHGLOW

2) CHGHIGH

BATBAD

1) BATLOW

2) BATHIGH

3) NOBATT

Battery charge circuit FAIL

; CHGLOW or CHGHIGH

Battery charge circuit volt

LOW (Value 25V)


HIGH (Value ≥ 28V)

Battery BAD

; BATLOW, BATHIG,

NOBAT or

Batt Cap’ Alarm Level when BATT Management is ENABLED.

Battery volt LOW

(15V < Value 21V)


HIGH (Value ≥ 28V)

NO Battery (Value < 15V)

‘CHARGER’

LED OFF

‘BATTERY’

LED OFF

1. Check AC supply

2. Check Battery charge Voltage

(range DC 27 ~ DC 28V)

3. Replace Analog Module

1. Check AC Power NFB

2. Check AC Power fuse

3. Check AC supply, ensure AC connector is securely connected

4. Replace Battery charge T.R

5. Check battery NFB

6. Check battery connection

POWER DOWN

MODE

GAS STATUS

*. applied only gas insulation type

(EVR)

PWDOWN

GASLOW

GASHIGH

Power down mode

(Value < 21V and ACFAIL)

Gas pressure LOW

(Value 0.1 bar)

Gas pressure HIGH

(Value ≥ 1.5V)

Controller power turn off

CLOSE block

When ‘Opr’ Block

GPF’ setting is

ON

No problem

1. Check AC supply

2. Check battery

1.Ensure Control cable is securely connected

2. Check Control cable fault

3. Replace Main Processing Module

4. Replace body.

SYSRST System restarted - No problem

SYSTEM

RESTART

CLDRST Cold Restarted - No problem




EVENT

SETTING

(Refer to SET

CHANGE

Event)

EVENT TEXT

(LCD)

GLSCHG

(Global setting) and GRSCH1~

GRSCH6(Group setting)

EXPLANATION

Setting Changed

CF Close fail

TRIP

& CLOSE

SELF TEST

TRF

DIGOPOW

DIGIGBT

DIGCLC

DIGTRC

SELFTER

DIGGLSET

DIGGRSET

DIGSPU

DIGADC

DIGEVT

DIGCNT

DIGMEM

ETMFC610

ACTION

- http://www.entecene.co.kr

USER’ RECOMMENDED ACTION

No problem

* But somebody modified the setting data.

Trip fail

Capacitor charger power supply error

IGBT error

Close coil error

Trip coil error

1. Check the close/trip module

2. Check the receptacle pin

3.Ensure Control cable is securely connected

4.Check SMPS-C module

5.Check close/open magnetic contactor

(MC)

1.Ensure status input connector cable is securely connected

2.

Check SMPS-C module

3. Check IN210 status

1.Ensure status input cable is securely connected

2. Check IN210 and IN211stauts


2. Check IN210, IN212, IN213 and

IN214 status


2. Check IN210 and IN213stauts

System error detected while booting

Detail message are recorded in diagnostic event

1.Check the diagnostic event

2.Refer to EVENT TEXT

Global setting error

Group setting error

DSP module error or

ADC processer error

A/D conversion error

Recorded events format error

Registered count data error

Restored default setting by itself

Restored default setting by itself

Correct and protection does not work work measurement

Correct measurement and protection does not

Cleared events by itself

Cleared count by itself

1. Execute System Restart

2. Execute default setting



2. Execute default setting



2. Replace DSP Module



2. Replace DSP Module


1. Execute All Clear Event



1. Execute All Clear Data



Registered data error

-

-

-

-

-

-

Cleared data(energy, max. demand, contact wear and battery capacity) by itself

1. Execute All Clear Data






EVENT

SELF TEST

EVENT TEXT

(LCD)

DIGGPS

DIGGPSLK

DIGEXIO

DIGWIFI

DIGWIFILK

DISTHM

EXPLANATION

IRIG/GPS module error

IRIG/GPS link fail

External I/O Unit

ETIO10 error

Wifi module error

Wifi link error

External thermistor error http://www.entecene.co.kr

ETMFC610

ACTION

USER’ RECOMMENDED ACTION

-

-

Cleared external TD metering value, external input status and external output status

-

-

-

1.Ensure IRIG connector connector cable is securely connected

2. Check IRIG module

3. Check ‘IRIG Use’ setting

1.Ensure ETIO10 connector connector cable is securely connected

2. Check ETIO10 module

3. Check ‘EXT. I/O Use’ setting

1.Ensure Wifi connector connector cable is securely connected

2. Check Wifi module

3. Check ‘Wifi Use’ setting

4. Check Wifi communication setting

1.Ensure external thermistor connector cable is securely connected

2. Check external thermistor module

3. Check ‘EXT. Temper’ Use’ setting



15. PLC function


ETMFC610 has PLC(Programmable Logic Control) for user. PLC has Timer, Counter and Event to control input and output. Circuit can be optimized to omit unnecessary timer and aux. relay. During

ETMFC610 running, in case the circuit needs to be changed, PLC can be used to meet user’s need.

PLC is programmed in “ETIMS Interface Software” .

Figure 15-1 . PLC Edit Window (Example)



16. Function of File Transfer Protocol

Without connecting ETIMS interface software, ETMFC610 is possible to patch upgrade firmware and to download COMTRADE(COMmon Format for Transient Data Exchange) format files on operator PC. For this function is used, it is essential to use TLS(Transport Layer Security) that universial FTP utility is installed on PC. By recommendation of universial FTP utility, there are

FileZilla, WinSCP.

16.1. Patching firmware to upgrade

Process of firmware patch is as follows;

1) Connect between PC and ETMFC610

Connect between PC and ETMFC610 using Ethernet cable. The Ethernet cable should be wired at ethernet port(EN1 or EN2) for Ethernet on side panel of ETMFC610.

2) Access ETMFC610 through FTP utility

After executing FTP utility, enter IP address of ETMFC610 required to patch firmware and No. 21 for the number of port on TLS settings of FTP utility. IP address of ETMFC610 refers to setting values on “GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP / EHTERNET/ IP Addr

Oct1~ 4” .

Password refers to ‘Admin PW’ setting on “GLOBAL SETTING / COMMUNICATION / FTP-

SSL / Admin PW” .

Access “/home/entec_system/PACKAGE” on the FTP utility.

3) Firmware Upgrade through ETIMS Interface Software

Upload a file named ‘UPDATE.fw’ on directory. DOES NOT REVISE the file name. If the file name does not correspond, patching firmware is not supported. After completed to upload the file on the directory, patching firmware starts automatically. Changed firmware version is checked on device or through interface ETIMS interface software after patch process is successfully finished.

For reference this function supports on ETIMS interface software, too.



16.2. COMTRADE


ETR-300R supports COMTRADE(Common Format for Transient Data Exchange) format files of fault waveforms recorded on fault event log. After executing FTP utility, enter IP address of

ETMFC610 required to patch firmware and No.21 for the number of ports on TLS settings of FTP utility. Password refers to 'User 1 PW' setting on “GLOBAL SETTING / COMMUNICATION /

FTP-SSL / User1 PW” .

Access “/home/ entec_user/COMTRADE” on the FTP utility.

16.2.1. File format and Name

ETMFC610 generates binary type COMTRADE files, only. Example of generated COMTRADE file name are 'W2C_##.CFG' and 'W2C_##.DAT'’ Here, ## is the order in which they are generated.

16.2.2. Related Setting Items

COMTRADE file relates following settings;

Table 16-1. Setting Items

Menu Location

GLOBAL SETTING >> GENERAL >>

EVENT RECORDER >> COMTRADE Record


EVENT RECORDER >> COMTRADE Rev.


EVENT RECORDER >> COMTRADE P/S


EVENT RECORDER >> COMTRADE Rate

Description

COMTRADE file is generated or not (ON/OFF)

Select COMTRADE standard's revision version which be applied (1999/2013)

Select Analog channel wanted to generate

COMTRADE file (Primary :1st, Secondary: 2 nd )

Enter the rate of COMTRADE waveform wanted to generate(1~10:1)



17. Wireless Connection


ETMFC610 and ETIMS Interface Software can be connected wirelessly.

Wireless connectivity is as an option.

Table 17-1. Wireless Network Protocol Option

Wireless Network Protocol Supported

Wireless Network Frequency Range Supported

802.11 b/g/n

2.4Ghz

17.1. Connection using WIFI (PC)

It is possible to connect ETMFC610 wirelessly using ETIMS interface software. The connection method is same as that of connecting to AP (Access Point). In order to establish a successful connection, check the following setting items in advance.


WIFI Use

SSID

Item

P/W

Hidden SSID

Menu Location

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION/

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/

Please refer to the ETIMS interface software manual for details of connection.



17.2. Connection using Smart ETIMS


ETMFC610 can be connected using Smart ETIMS interface software on the mobile phone. Smart

ETIMS interface software may not be installed depending on the type and version of Mobile OS.

Therefore, it is recommended to check the available Mobile OS and version before installation.

Table 17-3. Supported Mobile OS and Version

Android

Mobile OS Support

O : Jelly Bean (4.1) ~ Oreo (8.0)

X iOS

In order to establish a successful connection, check the following setting items in advance.


WIFI Use

SSID

Item Menu Location

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI

P/W

Hidden SSID

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIF/

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION

Please refer to the ETIMS interface software manual for details of connection.



17.3. Security


Wireless connection between ETMFC610 and ETIMS interface software may be insecure.

Therefore, ETMFC610 uses SSL / TLS and AES to enhance the security.

17.3.1. SSL / TLS

SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) / TLS Transport Layer Security (TLS) is a protocol that ensures the network security and integrity of the data transmitted and received. Using this protocol,

ETMFC610 and ETIMS interface software establish a secure channel for secure communication.

To use SSL / TLS, ETMFC610 and PC ETIMS interface software must have the same certification and private key.

The current version is TLS v1.2.

17.3.2. AES

Mobile ETIMS encrypts the packets transmitted to ETMFC610 using Advanced Encryption

Standard (AES) encryption.

Only the control commands that change the settings of the ETMFC610 are encrypted, other commands are not encrypted.

Table 17-5. AES Commands

Command Type

Control Command

Inquire (Check) and Other

Commands

Encryption Support

O

X
